Key Benefits:
Publics concerned: actors and users of higher education.
Subject: codification of decrees governing the organization of higher teachings (book VI) and higher education institutions (book VII).
Entry into force: the text comes into force on the day after its publication.
Notice: the decree continues the codification of the nine books of the regulatory part of the Education Code, the first five books and a chapter of the ninth have already been published. Books VI and VII are the first two of the three books in the section of the code dedicated to higher education.
This codification is "in constant law" in accordance with the principles established by the Constitutional Council to ensure the legibility, understanding and accessibility of the texts. The only amendments made relate to the editorial coherence of the texts, the updating of the terms used, the harmonization of the law between several texts or between the provisions of the education code and those of other codes, the declassification of legislation in reality under the decree and the repeal of provisions that have become irrelevant. In addition, in order to ensure the regularity of the disciplinary procedure applicable to university users, pursuant to Decision No. 361614 of 17 July 2013 of the Council of State, the last five paragraphs of Article 6 of Decree No. 92-657 of 13 July 1992 concerning the disciplinary procedure in public higher education institutions under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education were repealed. Article R. 712-14, which codifies Article 6, now allows only one professor of universities who presides over the competent disciplinary section in respect of users. Thus, the latter may designate the other professor of universities who is a member of the Disciplinary Section to serve on the board of inquiry.
The transitional provisions governing the situation of some students currently pursuing health or veterinary studies (special medical biology) or engaged in the preparation of the diploma of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology continue to apply to them.
References: the education code, as it is the result of this decree, can be found on the website Légifrance (http://www.legifrance.gouv.fr).
The Prime Minister,
On the report of the Minister of Higher Education and Research,
Considering the Constitution, in particular the second paragraph of article 37;
Considering the education code;
Vu le Administrative Justice Codeincluding its article R. 123-20;
Vu le Public Health Code ;
See?Order No. 2010-49 of 13 January 2010 relating to medical biology;
Vu le Decree No. 60-389 of 22 April 1960 relating to the contract of association to public education passed by private educational institutions;
Vu le Decree No. 2009-553 of 15 May 2009 relating to the regulatory provisions of Book V of the Education Code (Council Decrees and Decrees);
Vu le Decree No. 2012-1247 of 7 November 2012 adapting various texts to the new rules of budgetary management and public accountancy;
In the light of the views of the Superior Commission on Codification of 1 December 2009, 7 December 2010 and 21 June 2011;
Having regard to Constitutional Council decision No. 2012-236 L of 22 November 2012;
The State Council (inland section) heard,
Decrete:
The Schedule to this Order contains the statutory provisions of Books VI and VII of the Education Code. The articles identified by a "R" correspond to the provisions of a decree in the Council of State, those identified by a "D" correspond to the provisions of a decree. These articles may be modified in the same forms.
The references contained in the provisions of a regulatory nature to provisions repealed by section 4 of this Order are replaced by the references to the corresponding provisions of the Education Code.
I. ― In the first paragraph of Article L. 756-2 of the Education Code, the words: "education" are replaced by the words: "higher education".
II. ― In the first paragraph of Article L. 756-2 of the Education Code reproduced in Article L. 1415-1 of the Public Health Code, the words: "education" are replaced by the words: "higher education".
Are repealed, subject to the provisions of section 5:
1° The decree of 25 January 1876 concerning the opening of higher education institutions;
2° Decree of 28 December 1885 on the organization of higher education faculties and schools;
3° The decree of 7 November 1934 concerning the filing of engineering titles and diplomas;
4° The Decree No. 52-178 of 19 February 1952 establishing and establishing general provisions for public examinations under the amended Act of 4 August 1942 relating to the issuance of professional diplomas;
5° The Decree No. 53-202 of 13 March 1953 creating a state diploma of psychotechnician;
6° The Decree No. 54-344 of 27 March 1954 establishing a degree in administrative sciences;
7° The Decree No. 56-349 of 30 March 1956 relating to an exemption from the Bachelor of Secondary Education for the Bachelor of Law;
8° Articles 153 and 162 of Decree No. 56-931 of 14 September 1956 on the codification of legislation concerning technical education;
9° The decree of October 25, 1957 establishing a diploma as an expert demographer;
10° The Decree No. 59-57 of 6 January 1959 reforming public education;
11° The decree of 6 December 1961 establishing a real estate law course at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
12° The Decree No. 63-505 of 17 May 1963 assigning competence to academy rectors, to the directors and directors of the higher normal schools dependent on the general direction of higher education and the director of the National School of Charters;
13° The Decree No. 63-527 of 25 May 1963 the annual competitions open in each Faculty of Law and Economic Sciences;
14° The decree of June 14, 1965 establishing a chair of regional economy and organization at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
15° The decree of August 27, 1965 establishing a course of mathematics applied to financial operations at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
16° The decree of August 27, 1965 establishing a course for the formulation of physical systems for mathematical machines at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
17° The decree of 25 November 1965 establishing a course of physical methods of analysis at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
18° The decree of March 16, 1966 creating a chair for calculating probabilities and mathematical statistics at the Conservatoire national des arts et métiers;
19° The Decree No. 70-1269 of 23 December 1970 the organization of physical, sporting and outdoor activities in higher education;
20° The Decree No. 71-376 of 13 May 1971 relating to the registration of students in universities and public institutions of a scientific and cultural character independent of universities;
21° The Decree No. 71-794 of 24 September 1971 relating to the allocation of the proceeds of tuition in higher education institutions;
22° The Decree No. 71-928 of 15 November 1971 relating to the joint academic and interuniversity services of foreign students;
23° The Decree No. 71-1105 of 30 December 1971 relative to chancelleries;
24° The Decree No. 72-59 of 14 January 1972 granting the title of technical bachelor to the holders of certain technical patents;
25° The Decree No. 80-900 of 17 November 1980 relating to certain operations in laboratories or research packages under the Minister for Universities;
26° The Decree No. 81-1221 of 31 December 1981 relating to the reception of foreign students in universities and public institutions of a scientific and cultural character independent of universities;
27° The Decree No. 84-13 of 5 January 1984 relating to the exemption of tuition fees in universities;
28° The Decree No. 84-573 of 5 July 1984 relating to national diplomas of higher education;
29° The Decree No. 84-932 of 17 October 1984 relating to national diplomas of higher education;
30° The Decree No. 84-1004 of 12 November 1984 relating to academic institutes of technology;
31° The decree of 17 December 1984 setting out the modalities for the election of university presidents;
32° The Decree No. 85-28 of 7 January 1985 relating to the participation of external personalities in scientific, cultural and professional public institutions;
33° The Decree No. 85-59 of 18 January 1985 establishing the conditions for the exercise of the right to vote, the composition of the electoral colleges and the modalities of assimilation and level equivalence for the representation of staff and students in the councils of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character, as well as the procedure for appeal against elections;
34° The Decree No. 85-368 of 22 March 1985 with the exception of Article 7;
35° The Decree No. 85-657 of 27 June 1985 relating to the observatories of universe science;
36° The Decree No. 85-685 of 5 July 1985 relating to the composition and organization of the commission of engineering titles;
37° The Decree No. 85-789 of 24 July 1985 creating scientific, cultural and professional public institutions;
38° The Decree No. 85-827 of 31 July 1985 relating to the order in enclosures and premises of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character;
39° The Decree No. 85-906 of 23 August 1985 setting the conditions for the validation of personal studies, professional or acquired experiences for access to different levels of higher education;
40° The Decree No. 85-934 of 4 September 1985 relating to the operation of the annexed service of accommodation of local public educational institutions;
41° The Decree No. 85-1118 of 18 October 1985 relating to ongoing training activities in public higher education institutions under the Minister of National Education;
42° The Decree No. 85-1243 of 26 November 1985 creating internal institutes and schools in universities and national polytechnic institutes;
43° The Decree No. 85-1244 of 26 November 1985 creating internal institutes and schools in universities and national polytechnic institutes;
44° The Decree No. 86-195 of 6 February 1986 relating to joint academic and interuniversity services for the reception, orientation and professional integration of students;
45° The Decree No. 86-348 of 5 March 1986 bringing various electoral provisions applicable to universities and national polytechnic institutes;
46° The Decree No. 86-501 of 15 March 1986 creating the University of Technology of Nord-Pas-de-Calais;
47° The Decree No. 86-599 of 14 March 1986 relating to the joint academic training service of trainers;
48° TheArticle 4 of Decree No. 86-640 of 14 March 1986 establishing the rules for the organization and operation of certain engineering schools attached to a scientific, cultural and professional public institution;
49° The Decree No. 86-641 of 14 March 1986 establishing and linking public institutions of an administrative nature to a scientific, cultural and professional public institution;
50° The Decree No. 87-347 of 21 May 1987 establishing and setting the conditions for the issuance of the diploma of art professions;
51° The Decree No. 89-266 of 25 April 1989 concerning the institutes of work;
52° The Decree No. 89-901 of 18 December 1989 relating to political institutes;
53° TheArticle 1 of Decree No. 89-902 of 18 December 1989 relating to political institutes with an administrative public institution status attached to a university;
54° The Decree No. 90-97 of 25 January 1990 setting the conditions for access to specialized training in the third cycle of medical studies for foreign physicians other than nationals of states belonging to the European communities or the Principality of Andorra;
55° The Decree No. 90-219 of 9 March 1990 relating to national institutes of applied sciences;
56° The Decree No. 90-867 of 28 September 1990 establishing the rules for the organization and operation of university institutes for teacher training (IUFM);
57° Sections 1 to 21,23 to 39 and 45 to 50-1 of Decree No. 92-657 of 13 July 1992 on disciplinary proceedings in public higher education institutions under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education;
58° The Decree No. 93-489 of 26 March 1993 relating to the validation of professional acquis for the issuance of technological and professional degrees, as it concerns metropolitan, overseas and Mayotte departments;
59° The Decree No. 94-39 of 14 January 1994 the budget and financial regime of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature;
60° The Decree No. 94-684 of 3 August 1994 completing the Decree No. 84-573 of 5 July 1984 relating to national diplomas of higher education;
61° The Decree No. 94-735 of 19 August 1994 relating to the competition and educational program of the boarding school in odontology;
62° The Decree No. 94-959 of 4 November 1994 creating the national degree of specialized technology and completing the Decree No. 84-573 of 5 July 1984 relating to national diplomas of higher education;
63° The Decree No. 94-1015 of 23 November 1994 relating to the organization and operation of preparatory classes for large schools organized in high schools under ministers of education, agriculture and armies, with the exception of Article 5;
64° The Decree No. 94-1204 of 29 December 1994 relating to professional academic institutes;
65° The Decree No. 95-550 of 4 May 1995 General services of universities;
66° The Decree No. 95-665 of 9 May 1995 general regulation of the higher technician ' s patent;
67° The Decree No. 97-1190 of 24 December 1997 for application to the Minister of National Education, Research and Technology 2° of Article 2 of Decree No. 97-34 of 15 January 1997 the deconcentration of individual administrative decisions;
68° The Decree No. 98-2 of 2 January 1998 setting the conditions for validation of personal studies, professional or acquired experiences for access to architectural studies;
69° The Decree No. 99-747 of 30 August 1999 concerning the creation of the master’s degree;
70° The Decree No. 99-1225 of 21 December 1999 relating to the Polytechnic School of the University of Nantes;
71° The Decree No. 2000-250 of 15 March 2000 classification of scientific, cultural and professional public institutions;
72° Articles 1 to 3 of Decree No. 2000-271 of 22 March 2000 establishing national engineering schools;
73° The Decree No. 2000-457 of 23 May 2000 relating to the automated census of student orientation vows in the undergraduate of higher education and the distribution of staff in the event of saturation of reception capacities in Ile-de-France;
74° The Decree No. 2000-1264 of 26 December 2000 setting out the conditions under which public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character can take participation and create subsidiaries;
75° The Decree No. 2001-223 of 6 March 2001 amending Decree No. 95-665 of 9 May 1995 general regulation of the higher technician ' s patent;
76° The Decree No. 2001-242 of 22 March 2001 relating to the empowerment of the graduate engineer;
77° The Decree No. 2001-274 of 30 March 2001 relating to the title of a state graduate engineer;
78° The Decree No. 2001-428 of 14 May 2001 relating to the École polytechnique universitaire de Marseille;
79° The Decree No. 2001-620 of 10 July 2001 relating to the curriculum, the organization of the audio-prosthetic internship and the examination tests for the state diploma of audio-prothesist, with the exception of the schedule;
80° The Decree No. 2001-622 of 12 July 2001 relating to the training of students of the Polytechnic School;
81° The Decree No. 2002-417 of 21 March 2002 authorizing public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character to award the title of Doctor Honoris causa;
82° The Decree No. 2002-468 of 4 April 2002 relating to the Ecole Polytechnique universitaire de Lille;
83° The Decree No. 2002-481 of 8 April 2002 relating to academic qualifications and national degrees;
84° The Decree No. 2002-482 of 8 April 2002 implementing the French system of higher education of the construction of the European Space of Higher Education;
85° The Decree No. 2002-529 of 16 April 2002 taken for the purposes of articles L. 613-3 and L. 613-4 of the Education Code and on the validation of graduate studies carried out in France or abroad;
86° The Decree No. 2002-555 of 16 April 2002 relating to the Polytechnic School of the University of Orleans;
87° The Decree No. 2002-549 of 19 April 2002 relating to the services of industrial and commercial activities of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character;
88° Decree No. 2002-590 of 24 April 2002 for the application of the first paragraph of Article L. 613-3 and Article L. 613-4 of the Education Code and on the validation of the acquired experience by higher education institutions;
89° The Decree No. 2002-654 of 30 April 2002 relating to the remuneration of training services proposed within the framework of their mission of international cooperation by public institutions of higher education;
90° The Decree No. 2002-964 of 2 July 2002 relating to the Polytechnic School of the University of Tours;
91° The Decree No. 2002-1086 of 7 August 2002 amending Decree No. 95-665 of 9 May 1995 general regulation of the higher technician ' s patent;
92° The Decree No. 2002-1145 of 4 September 2002 relating to the Polytechnical School of Grenoble-I University;
93° The Decree No. 2003-56 of 15 January 2003 amending Decree No. 87-347 of 21 May 1987 establishing and setting the conditions for the issuance of the diploma of art professions;
94° The Decree No. 2003-76 of 23 January 2003 establishing the regulation of the degree of specialized medical biology;
95° The Decree No. 2003-1031 of 23 October 2003 relating to the Ecole Polytechnique universitaire de Montpellier;
96° The Decree No. 2004-67 of 16 January 2004 the organization of the third cycle of medical studies;
97° The Decree No. 2004-1380 of 15 December 2004 amending Decree No. 95-665 of 9 May 1995 general regulation of the higher technician ' s patent;
98° The Decree No. 2005-219 of 2 March 2005 relating to the Polytechnic School of the University of Nice;
99° The Decree No. 2005-450 of 11 May 2005 relating to the issuance of diplomas in international partnership;
100° The Decree No. 2005-541 of 25 May 2005 taken for the purposes of articles L. 632-13 and L. 634-1 of the Code of Education and relating to the continuation of studies for the attainment of a degree of practitioner specialized in medicine or dental surgery;
101° The Decree No. 2005-734 of 30 June 2005 relating to architectural studies;
102° The Decree No. 2005-1033 of 24 August 2005 relating to the École polytechnique universitaire Pierre et Marie Curie of the Université Paris-VI;
103° The Decree No. 2005-1037 of 26 August 2005 amending Decree No. 95-665 of 9 May 1995 general regulation of the higher technician ' s patent;
104° The Decree No. 2005-1617 of 21 December 2005 relating to the development of examinations and competitions of education and higher education for candidates with disabilities;
105° The Decree No. 2006-801 of 5 July 2006 relating to the Savoy Polytechnic School of the University of Chambéry;
106° The Decree No. 2006-1093 of 29 August 2006 taken for application ofArticle 9 of Act No. 2006-396 of 31 March 2006 for equal opportunities;
107° The Decree No. 2006-1733 of 23 December 2006 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
108° The Decree No. 2007-250 of 26 February 2007 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
109° The Decree No. 2007-693 of 3 May 2007 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
110° The Decree No. 2007-694 of 3 May 2007 establishing a university institute for the training of masters in the University of Nantes and establishing specific electoral provisions at this institute;
111° The Decree No. 2007-1832 of 24 December 2007 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
112° The Decree No. 2007-1858 of 26 December 2007 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
113° The Decree No. 2007-1916 of 26 December 2007 establishing a university institute for the formation of masters in the University of Toulouse-II and establishing specific electoral provisions at the institute;
114° The Decree No. 2007-1917 of 26 December 2007 establishing university institutes for teacher training in universities and setting specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
115° The Decree No. 2008-326 of 7 April 2008 the general rules of operation of academic foundations;
116° The Decree No. 2008-390 of 24 April 2008 relating to the doctoral degree of business;
117° The Decree No. 2008-606 of 26 June 2008 specifying the conditions under which certain public administrative institutions may apply for expanded responsibilities and competencies, be empowered to establish a partnership foundation and benefit from the transfer of the movable and immovable property belonging to the State that is assigned to them or made available to them;
118° The Decree No. 2008-618 of 27 June 2008 relating to the budget and financial regime of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character with expanded responsibilities and competencies;
119° The Decree No. 2008-874 of 28 August 2008 establishing a university institute for the formation of masters in the University of Strasbourg and establishing specific electoral provisions in this institute;
120° The Decree No. 2008-1026 of 7 October 2008 the organization and missions of academic and interuniversity services of preventive medicine and health promotion;
121° The Decree No. 2008-1520 of 22 December 2008 establishing a university institute for the formation of masters in the University of Corsica and establishing specific electoral provisions at this institute;
122° The Decree No. 2009-465 of 23 April 2009 establishing university teacher training institutes in the universities of New Caledonia and French Polynesia and establishing specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
123° The Decree No. 2009-885 of 21 July 2009 relating to the modalities for the reception of students of higher education in internships in State administrations not presenting an industrial and commercial character;
124° The Decree No. 2009-1246 of 15 October 2009 extending to the Ministry of Culture the provisions of Decree No. 2005-1617 of 21 December 2005 relating to the development of examinations and competitions of education and higher education for candidates with disabilities;
125° The Decree No. 2010-386 of 15 April 2010 assigning the degree of licence to officers graduated from the Inter-Military Military School;
126° Articles 1st, 2 and 5 of Decree No. 2010-700 of 25 June 2010 amending Decree No. 2004-67 of 16 January 2004 the organization of the third cycle of medical studies;
127° Articles 1 to 3 and 11 of Decree No. 2010-735 of 29 June 2010 relating to the contract of public service in medical studies;
128° The Decree No. 2010-956 of 25 August 2010 amending Decree No. 2006-1093 of 29 August 2006 taken for application ofArticle 9 of Act No. 2006-396 of 31 March 2006 for equal opportunities;
129° The Decree No. 2010-1123 of 23 September 2010 relating to the issuance of the degree of licence to holders of certain titles or diplomas under Book III of Part IV of the Public Health Code;
130° The Decree No. 2011-22 of 5 January 2011 the organization of the long third cycle of odontological studies;
131° Articles 1 and 2 of Decree No. 2011-164 of 10 February 2011 on French schools abroad;
132° The Decree No. 2011-402 of 13 April 2011 establishing academic institutes for the training of masters in the University of the West Indies and Guyana and establishing specific electoral provisions for these institutes;
133° The Decree No. 2011-995 of 23 August 2011 relating to the higher degree of applied arts, with the exception of Article 23;
134° The Decree No. 2011-996 of 23 August 2011 related to libraries and other documentation structures of higher education institutions created in the form of common services;
135° The Decree No. 2011-1009 of 24 August 2011 implemented III of Article L. 120-1 of the National Service Code relating to the promotion of civic service in post-baccalaurate training;
136° The Decree No. 2012-116 of 27 January 2012 relating to obtaining a complementary specialized degree in group I medicine by validation of professional experience;
137° The Decree No. 2012-172 of 3 February 2012 relating to the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies;
138° The Decree No. 2012-173 of 3 February 2012 special provisions relating to the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies;
139° The Decree No. 2012-981 of 21 August 2012 relative to the degree of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology;
140° The Decree No. 2012-1147 of 12 October 2012 the issue of real rights by public institutions of higher education;
141° The Decree No. 2013-156 of 20 February 2013 organizing the higher education of plastic arts in higher education institutions delivering diplomas.
I. ― Are governed by sections D. 631-1 to D. 631-16 of the Education Code and considered as internals the holders of the certificate of completion of the national veterinary schools authorized to continue the preparation of the degree of specialized medical biology until the end of the 2015-2016 academic year, in accordance with 2° of Article L. 6213-2 of the Public Health Code.
II. ― Sub-section 2 of chapter IV, section 4, title III, of Book VI of the Education Code and articles R. 634-24 to R. 634-31 are repealed as of the academic year 2016-2017, the date on which Order No. 94-735 of August 19, 1994 on the competition and educational program of the boarding school in odontology is repealed.
III. 1° Students who have started the training leading to the Diploma of High Technician in Medical Imaging and Therapeutic Radiology before September 1, 2012 remain governed by provisions of articles D. 4351-14 to D. 4351-21 of the Public Health Codein force until 31 August 2014;
2° Persons who, before publication Decree No. 2012-981 of 21 August 2012 relating to the diploma of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology, have followed a training leading to this degree may be admitted by the head of institution, on the proposal of the commission defined in article D. 636-52, to follow the training governed by articles D. 636-48 to D. 636-67;
3° For those who, at the end of the 2014 session, did not obtain the degree governed by the sections D. 4351-14 to D. 4351-21 of the Public Health Code, the jury referred to in article D. 636-66, in the light of the achievements of the candidates, validates all or part of the teaching or semester units defined by the order mentioned in article D. 636-49.
IV. ― In accordance with second paragraph of Article 289 of Decree No. 2012-1247 of 7 November 2012 adapting various texts to the new rules of budget management and public accountancy, changes to the Decrees No. 94-39 of 14 January 1994 relating to the budget and financial regime of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature and No. 2008-618 of 27 June 2008 relating to the budget and financial regime of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character with extended responsibilities and competencies, codified in Articles R. 719-51 to R. 719-180, come into force on 1 January 2016, subject to the provisions of the third paragraph of Article 289 of the Decree of 7 November 2012
V. ― 1° The first paragraph of Article 290 of Decree No. 2012-1247 of 7 November 2012 adapting various texts to the new rules of budgetary management and public accountancy is thus amended:
(a) The words: "Decree No. 94-39 of 14 January 1994 referred to above" and "Decree No. 94-39 of 14 January 1994 referred to above" are replaced by the words: "R. 719-113 to R. 719-180 of the Education Code";
(b) After the words: "143 of this decree", the words are inserted: "codified to articles R. 719-116 and R. 719-161 of the Code of Education";
2° The third paragraph of Article 290 of Decree No. 2012-1247 of 7 November 2012 on the adaptation of various texts to the new rules of budgetary management and public accountancy is thus amended:
(a) The words: "Decree No. 2008-618 of 27 June 2008 referred to above" and "Decree No. 2008-618 of 27 June 2008 referred to above" are replaced by the words: "R. 719-51 to R. 719-112 of the Education Code";
(b) After the words: "237 of this decree" are inserted the words: "codified in articles R. 719-54, R. 719-56, R. 719-58, R. 719-60, R. 719-61, R. 719-62, R. 719-73 and R. 719-101 of the Education Code".
VI. ― Notwithstanding the repeal of Decree No. 88-1033 of 10 November 1988 organizing the teaching of plastic arts in national, regional and municipal art schools authorized by the Ministry of Culture Decree No. 2013-156 of 20 February 2013 organizing the higher education of plastic arts in higher education institutions with diplomas, the national diplomas sanctioning the teachings of higher education institutions of plastic arts other than national public institutions and public institutions of cultural cooperation continue, until 1 July 2015, to be issued under the conditions provided by the decree of 10 November 1988.
VII. ― Decree No. 71-376 of 13 May 1971 relating to the registration of students in universities and public institutions of an independent scientific and cultural nature of universities is repealed on November 1, 2013. On that date, the provisions of this decree codified in articles D. 612-1 to D. 612-18 come into force.
The Public Health Code (regulatory portion) is amended as follows:
1° Section D. 4151-1 is replaced by the following provisions:
"Art. D. 4151-1.-The state diploma of midwife, national diploma of higher education in accordance with the tenth paragraph (9°) of Article D. 613-7 of the Code of Education, is governed by articles D. 635-1 to D. 635-7 of the same Code and by articles R. 4151-9 to R. 4151-13 of this Code. The regime of studies for this degree is set by decrees of ministers responsible for higher education and health."
2° Articles D. 4151-3 to D. 4151-8 are repealed;
3° In article D. 4341-5, the words: "to theArticle 1 of Decree No. 84-932 of 17 October 1984 fixing the list of these diplomas" are replaced by the words "in the third paragraph (2°) of section D. 613-7 of the Education Code";
4° In article D. 4342-9, the words: "to theArticle 1 of Decree No. 84-932 of 17 October 1984 fixing the list of these diplomas" are replaced by the words "in the second paragraph (1°) of section D. 613-7 of the Education Code";
5° In subsection 2 of section 2 of chapter I, title V of Book III of Part IV, an article D. 4351-13-1 is inserted as follows:
"Art. D. 4351-13-1.-The diploma of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology, national diploma in higher education in accordance with the fifth paragraph (4°) of section D. 613-7 of the education code, is governed by articles D. 636-48 to D. 636-67 of the same code";
6° Sections D. 4351-14 to D. 4351-21 are repealed from the academic year 2014;
7° Section D. 4361-1 is replaced by the following provisions:
"Art. D. 4361-1.-The state diploma of audioprothesist, national diploma of higher education in accordance with the fourth paragraph (3°) of Article D. 613-7 of the Code of Education, is governed by articles D. 636-1 to D. 636-17 of the same Code. » ;
8° Sections D. 4361-2 to D. 4361-12 are repealed.
Book I of the Education Code (regulatory part) is amended as follows:
1° In the first paragraph of Article D. 112-1, the words: "and, with regard to higher education, to higher education Articles 3 to 8 of Decree No. 2005-1617 of 21 December 2005 on the development of examinations and competitions of school and higher education by candidates with disabilities are replaced by the words: "and sections D. 613-26 to D. 613-30 with respect to higher education. » ;
2° Section D. 161-1 is replaced by the following provisions:
"Art. D. 161-1.-Articles D. 122-1 to D. 122-3, D. 123-2 to R. 123-8 and D. 123-12 to D. 123-22 are applicable in the Wallis and Futuna Islands. » ;
3° Section D. 163-1 is replaced by the following provisions:
"Art. D. 163-1.-Articles D. 123-2 to R. 123-8 and D. 123-12 to D. 123-22 are applicable in French Polynesia. » ;
4° Section D. 164-1 is replaced by the following provisions:
"Art. D. 164-1.-Articles D. 123-2 to R. 123-8 and D. 123-12 to D. 123-22 are applicable in New Caledonia. »
Book II of the Education Code (regulatory part) is amended as follows:
1° Sections D. * 261-6 and D. * 261-7 are replaced by the following:
"Art. R. 261-6.-Article R. 242-1 is applicable in the Wallis and Futuna Islands. » ;
2° Sections D. * 263-8 to D. * 263-10 are replaced by the following:
"Art. R. 263-8.-Article R. 242-1 is applicable in French Polynesia. » ;
3° Sections D. * 264-8 to D. * 264-10 are replaced by the following:
"Art. R. 264-8.-Article R. 242-1 is applicable in New Caledonia. »
Book III of the Education Code (regulatory part) is amended as follows:
1° Section 3 of Chapter IV of Title I is repealed;
2° Articles R. 314-29 and R. 314-30 are repealed;
3° Section 5 of Chapter I of Title V and section D. 351-33 are replaced by the following:
“Section 5
"Training leading to the exercise of the profession
monitor-educator
"Art. D. 351-33.-The training leading to the State degree of monitor-educator, issued by the academy rectors, is organized under the conditions provided by the code of social action and families. »
Book IV of the Education Code (regulatory part) is amended as follows:
1° In article R. 421-48, the words: "by articles 31,31-1 and 31-2 of Decree No. 85-924 of 30 August 1985 and Decree No. 85-1348 of 18 December 1985 relating to disciplinary procedures in colleges, high schools and special education institutions are replaced by the words: "by subsections 3 to 6 of section 2 of the Single Chapter of Title I of the Regulatory Part of Book V, with the exception of sections D. 511-23, R. 511-24, R. 511-29, D. 511-54, D. 511-55, R. 511-57"
2° In R. 421-107, the words: "to theArticle 25 of Decree No. 85-1242 of 25 November 1985 relating to local public establishments under the Minister for the Sea are replaced by the words: "R. 511-24, R. 511-28 and R. 511-57";
3° In the second paragraph of article D. 422-19, the words: "to theArticle 4 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 bringing administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental" are replaced by the words: "at article R. 511-13";
4° In the seventh paragraph of Article D. 422-38, the words: "Article 8-1 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 bringing administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental" are replaced by the words: "of article R. 511-7";
5° In article D. 422-40, the words: "by articles 31,31-1 and 31-2 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 carrying out the administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental and by the Decree No. 85-1348 of 18 December 1985 relating to disciplinary procedures in colleges, high schools and special education institutions are replaced by the words: "by subsections 3 to 6 of section 2 of the Single Chapter of Title I of the Regulatory Part of Book V, with the exception of sections R. 511-22 to R. 511-24, R. 511-29 and R. 511-53 to D. 511-58";
6° R. 411-61, the words: "Articles 4-1 to 4-5,8-1,31-1,31-2 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 concerning the administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and charge are wholly vested in the State and bearing various provisions applicable to second-degree municipal or departmental educational institutions" are replaced by the words: "R. 5-6-11,
7° In article R. 425-16, the words: "to theArticle 15 of Decree No. 2006-246 of 1 March 2006 relating to these establishments are replaced by the words: "R. 511-17 to R. 511-19 and R. 511-29";
8° In article D. 491-14, the words: "byArticle 55-19 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 bringing administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental" are replaced by the words: "by article R. 561-4";
9° In article D. 492-13, the words: "byArticle 55-6 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 bringing administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental" are replaced by the words: "by article R. 562-3";
10° In article D. 494-8, the words: "byArticle 55-13 of Decree No. 86-164 of 31 January 1986 bringing administrative and financial organization of educational institutions whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State and bringing various provisions applicable to educational institutions of second degree municipal or departmental" are replaced by the words: "by article R. 564-4".
I. ― The 14th of Article 3 of the above-mentioned Decree of 15 May 2009 is replaced by the following provisions:
« 14° TheArticle 4 of Decree No. 60-389 of 22 April 1960 relating to the contract of association to public education passed by private educational institutions, as it concerns students of colleges and high schools of the second degree of education; "
II. ― As a result,Article 4 of Decree No. 60-389 of 22 April 1960 relating to the contract of association to public education passed by private educational institutions is restored and thus written:
"Art. 4.-Students of post-baccalaurate classes of private educational institutions under contract of association with the State may receive higher education grants, under the same conditions as students of post-baccalaurate classes and public higher education institutions. »
III. ― Book V of the Education Code (regulatory part) is amended as follows:
In article D. 541-8, the words: "the provisions of articles R. 412-4 and R. 444-7 of the same code" are replaced by the words: "the provisions of articles R. 412-4, R. 444-7 and D. 412-2 to D. 412-6 of the same code".
The provisions of this Decree are applicable in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, French Polynesia and New Caledonia.
The Minister of National Education, the Minister of Social Affairs and Health, the Minister of Defence, the Minister of Culture and Communication, the Minister of Higher Education and Research and the Minister of Overseas are responsible, each with respect to him, for the execution of this Order, which will be published in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
A N N E X E
The types of training courses mentioned in article D. 123-14 are coherent sets of teaching units, organizing adapted educational progressions. They aim to acquire one or more national degrees and are proposed by higher education institutions as part of the procedure referred to in section D. 613-4.
Each teaching unit has a value defined in European credits, at the level of studies concerned.
The number of credits per teaching unit is defined on the basis of the total workload required from the student to obtain the unit. The total workload takes into account all of the required activity of the student and, in particular, the volume and nature of the teachings provided, the personal work required, internships, memoranda, projects and other activities.
In order to ensure the comparison and transfer of training courses in the European space, a common reference is set corresponding to the acquisition of 180 credits for the degree and 300 credits for the master level. This reference allows to define the credit value of all diplomas. Credits are obtained when the validation conditions defined by the knowledge control procedures and abilities specific to each type of study are met.
The conditions for the acquisition of European credits within a typical course of training and the rules for taking into account the previously acquired credits are set to ensure the coherence of the trainings, to guarantee validation by the national diploma concerned and to promote reorientation.
The interested ministers may, after the advice of the relevant advisory bodies, establish the terms and conditions for the application of articles D. 123-13, D. 123-14 and D. 611-1 to D. 611-3 to specific areas of study and corresponding national degrees.
As part of the provisions referred to in Article D. 611-4, a transitional regime may also be provided for higher education institutions to organize all or part of their training either within the regulatory framework in force on 10 April 2002, or under sections D. 123-12 to D. 123-14 and D. 611-1 to D. 611-3.
The application of sections D. 123-12 to D. 123-14 and D. 611-1 to D. 611-5 is the subject of a follow-up mechanism to consider any questions relating to the organization of the standard training courses, their readability, their advertising and the conditions of their generalization.
All of the activities carried out by a student on the occasion of the civic service are valued, in the curricula of institutions that provide post-secondary education and in the curricula of higher education institutions that provide courses sanctioned by a higher education degree, in particular by an enrolment in the descriptive schedule to the degree or in a portfolio of competencies or by any other modality defined by the board of directors of the institution. The same activities carried out by a student on the occasion of the civic service can only give rise to one valuation.
The valuation can take the form of a validation as defined below.
When the exercise of activities related to the voluntary engagement of civic service is such that the acquisition of knowledge, skills and skills under the curriculum followed by the student, the institution may exempt it from certain teachings or courses under its curriculum, assign it to it the benefit of constituent elements of a teaching unit or credits of the European system of transfer and accumulation of credits (European Credits Transfer System,
In the case of a request for validation of civic service activities, the student provides the civic service certificate and the document issued by the State describing the activities carried out and evaluating the skills, knowledge and skills acquired during the civic service period. The establishment may also ask for an original production to be added to define the object and format.
No one may be allowed to participate as a student in the teaching and research activities of a higher education institution if he is not regularly enrolled in this institution.
Registration is annual. It is renewed at the beginning of each academic year. However, special provisions may be decreed by the Minister for Higher Education in order to promote continuing vocational training in the course of lifelong training.
Registration is personal. It can be obtained by correspondence. No person may be registered by a third party, except in the case of collective registrations resulting from a cooperation agreement between a higher education institution and a public or private institution.
Any person wishing to enrol in a higher education institution as a student specifies the training they wish to acquire. It must meet the special conditions required for this purpose by the national regulations, supplemented, as appropriate, by the regulations of the establishment.
The initial choice of the student may be modified in accordance with the rules possibly laid down by the institution.
Registration is subject to the production by the person concerned of a personal file whose composition is defined by the head of institution pursuant to the general provisions of the Minister for Higher Education, as well as to the fulfilment of the formalities provided for in the regulation of university rights.
It is issued to any student regularly registers a student card.
This map provides access to the premises and premises of the facility. It must be submitted to the institution authorities or agents that they designate whenever they so request.
The periods and modalities of the registration process are fixed by the head of institution.
A student regularly enrolled in a higher education institution may be enrolled in another higher education institution to acquire a different training. It is submitted for this second entry to the provisions of articles D. 612-1 to D. 612-3.
No one can register in two public higher education institutions to prepare the same degree.
A student regularly enrolled in a higher education institution and wishing to obtain his transfer to another higher education public institution must apply to his or her supervisor and, under his or her cover, to the head of the institution in which he or she wishes to continue his or her studies. The transfer is subject to the agreement of the two heads of establishment. In this case, the annual registration taken at the departure facility is valid at the reception facility. The Head of the Departure Institution shall forward the file of the Interested to the Head of the Host Institution.
When a student changes his or her institution, the studies that he or she has conducted are taken into account in the conditions determined by the host institution, given the already completed schooling.
Candidates for a first year of higher education, bachelors or admitted to register for another title, have the free choice of their university, depending on the training they wish to acquire, under the conditions provided for in article L. 612-3.
For the purposes of the provisions of the second paragraph of Article L. 612-3, the academies of Paris, Créteil and Versailles are considered to form a single set.
The holders of the French bachelor's degree who have passed the exams in a foreign examination centre are considered to be bachelors of the attached academy for the purposes of Article L. 612-3.
Non-titles to the French bachelor's degree candidates for a first entry in French universities and whose residence is located abroad at the time of the registration process are given a priority to enroll in the academy where they declare their residence in France, without being opposed to their current residence.
In addition to the provisions of paragraphs 1 and 2 of this subsection, those of this paragraph shall apply to foreign students not nationals of a Member State of the European Union, a State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area or the Swiss Confederation.
Foreign nationals referred to in Article D. 612-11, candidates for a first year of licence, must:
1° Justify, in the country in which they were obtained, titles opening up the right to the studies envisaged;
2° Filing an application for admission under the conditions provided for in article D. 612-16;
3° Justify a level of understanding of the French language adapted to the planned training. This level is verified through a review.
Obligations provided in the third (2°) and fourth (3°) paragraphs of Article D. 612-12 are exempted from the obligations provided for in the third (2°) and fourth (3°) paragraphs of Article D. 612-12 foreign candidates who may justify a registration in a post-baccalaurate training provided by a French educational institution in the year preceding the academic year for which they apply for admission as well as foreigners holding the French bachelor's, a French title admitted in exempt from the bachelor's degree by a national regulation or a national bachelor's's degree.
They were also provided by foreign nationals who came to conduct studies in France as part of a program agreed between governments or international cooperation actions organized by institutions pursuant to articles D. 123-15 to D. 123-21.
In addition to the aliens mentioned in article D. 612-13, obligations under the third (2°) and fourth (3°) paragraphs of article D. 612-12 are also exempted:
1° Foreign fellows of the French Government;
2° Foreign fellows from international organizations or foreign governments whose scholarships are managed by an accredited French agency;
3° Stateless persons, refugees and beneficiaries of subsidiary protection;
4° Children of diplomats stationed in France and residing there.
Universities shall verify that candidates from the categories set out in this section have a degree opening access to higher education in the country where it has been obtained and that their level of understanding of the French language is consistent with the planned training.
The examination of the level of understanding of the French language provided for in section D. 612-12 shall be exempted:
1° Nationals of States where French is an exclusive official language;
2° Candidates residing in a country where French is an exclusive official language and holds a high school diploma in a country where French is an exclusive official language;
3° Candidates, whether they are nationals of a country or residents in a country where French is not the only official language, whose secondary education took place, in large part, in French.
In other states, candidates who have completed French-language education in second-degree institutions whose list is prepared jointly by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Foreign Affairs may benefit from this exemption.
The examination also exempts the holders of one of the French-language knowledge diplomas of the Ministry of National Education of a level equal to or above level B2 of the Common European Framework of Reference for Languages.
Similarly, foreign nationals may be exempted from this examination for a first year of licence who have complied with language assessment provisions recognized by a decree of the Minister for Higher Education.
The application under section D. 612-12 is submitted on the form prepared by the Minister in charge of higher education.
The candidate may choose three universities under the conditions provided for in Article D. 612-9; it classes them in order of preference.
The completed forms are forwarded to the first requested institution that makes the decision and communicates it to the applicant. In the event of a refusal of admission, the file is forwarded to the next institution, which makes the decision and communicates it to the candidate.
Foreign nationals are subject to the same rules as French students for a second entry in the first year of licence and for the second or third year of licence, master's degree, doctorate or in any institution practicing admission on competition or title. It is up to institutions to decide whether their level of understanding of the French language is compatible with the planned training.
The procedure for preparing and organizing the review under section D. 612-12 shall be determined by order of the Minister for Foreign Affairs, the Minister for Overseas and the Minister for Higher Education.
The conditions for withdrawal, filing of the form and the terms of its transmission are determined under the same conditions.
The preparatory classes for the major schools are accessible to the holders of the bachelor's degree or a degree in equivalence and to those who have obtained the exemption from this degree under the following conditions:
1° For high schools within the competence of the Minister responsible for education, by a decision of the head of institution made after notice of the admission and evaluation commission referred to in section D. 612-20;
2° For high schools within the competence of the Minister for Agriculture, by decision of the national commission referred to in article D. 612-20;
3° For high schools within the competence of the Minister of Defence, pursuant to the provisions of sections R. 425-2 and R. 425-8 to R. 425-12 with regard to the admission to preparatory classes to the training schools of military officers and related training courses.
However, some preparatory classes are accessible to graduates obtained after two years of higher education, the list of which is set by decree of ministers responsible for education and higher education and by decree of the minister responsible for agriculture.
The minister responsible for higher education, on the one hand, and the minister responsible for agriculture, on the other hand, define, respectively, the conditions of admission to the preparatory classes for the major schools established in the high schools under their jurisdiction.
In each high school within the competence of the Minister responsible for education with one or more preparatory classes for the major schools, and for each category referred to in section D. 612-22, a board of admission and evaluation gives an opinion on the admission and evaluation of students in the different classes. The order in the first paragraph of this article sets out the composition and operation of this commission. It provides for the advisory participation of a teacher-researcher in these commissions when they serve as an assessment.
For high schools under the competence of the minister responsible for agriculture, the admission of students in the preparatory class to the major schools is pronounced by a national commission. An evaluation commission is also constituted in each institution with one or more preparatory classes for the major schools. The order in the first paragraph of this article sets out the composition and operation of these commissions.
For high schools within the competence of the Minister of Defence, provisions for admission and evaluation of students are made in accordance with the provisions of sections R. 425-2 and R. 425-8 to R. 425-12 with regard to admission to preparatory classes to the training schools of officers of the armed forces and related training.
The preparatory classes for the major schools established in the high schools provide courses of higher education which are part of the European architecture of the studies mentioned in article D. 123-13 and based mainly on the three degrees of diploma, master and doctorate, in studies leading to the degree of licence.
They form students for the various economic sectors, teaching, research, administration and defence by preparing them, in particular, for access to major schools.
As such, the training provided in these classes is intended to give students a thorough understanding of the disciplines taught and an apprehension of their general characteristics. It takes into account their evolutions, their applications and the preparation of research approaches. It is defined by national programmes.
The preparatory classes for major schools are divided into three categories:
1° Economic and commercial preparatory classes, which prepare for, inter alia, higher schools of commerce and management and higher normal schools;
2° Literary preparatory classes, which prepare for, inter alia, higher normal schools, the National School of Charters, higher schools of trade and management and institutes of political studies;
3° Scientific preparatory classes, which include engineering schools, higher standard schools and national veterinary schools.
The preparatory classes for the major schools also prepare for the major schools under the competence of the Minister of Defence.
The preparatory classes for the major schools are organized in two years.
Can be organized in a year, by decrees of ministers responsible for higher education and agriculture, preparatory classes accessible to graduates obtained after two years of higher education.
The minister responsible for higher education, on the one hand, and the minister responsible for agriculture, on the other hand, define by order the regime of studies in these classes.
For each of the categories referred to in section D. 612-22, the Minister for Higher Education shall, after notice, define, on the one hand, the Minister for Agriculture and the Minister of Defence and, on the other, the National Council for Higher Education and Research and the Higher Council for Education, the national objectives related to the regulation and evolution of the input flows, the general capacities of the school map and the guidelines of the school board These provisions do not apply to preparatory classes for large schools established in high schools under the Minister of Defence.
Ministers responsible for education and agriculture and the Minister of Defence decide respectively on the creation and removal of divisions to accommodate students from preparatory classes in high schools under their jurisdiction.
For high schools within the competence of the Minister responsible for education, these decisions intervene on the proposal of academy rectors in view of the projects presented by the institutions after the advice of the regions, the academic technical committee and the academic council of national education.
For high schools within the competence of the Minister responsible for agriculture, these decisions intervene on the proposal of the Regional Directors of Food, Agriculture and Forestry in the light of the projects submitted by the institutions after the advice of the regions and the National Council of Agricultural Education.
For high schools within the competence of the Minister of Defence, these arrangements are made in accordance with the provisions of sections R. 425-1 to R. 425-13.
The list of preparatory class divisions for large schools in high schools is published annually.
On the proposal of the admission and evaluation commission provided for in Article D. 612-20 sitting under the evaluation, the head of institution shall issue to the students of the preparatory classes referred to in Article D. 612-23 at the end of each year of study, a descriptive certificate of the course followed by the student.
For students in the preparatory classes organized in two years, this certificate, based on a national reference grid, carries, at the end of the course, on the entire course of two years. It mentions for each component of the training course corresponding to acquisitions attested to by knowledge and aptitudes a value defined in European credits within the limit of 60 credits for the first year of study and 120 credits for the complete training course in the preparatory class.
The entry by contest in an establishment on a list fixed by decree takes the validation by the establishment of 60 European credits when the contest takes place at the end of the first year and 120 credits when it takes place at the end of a complete course.
In order to facilitate the continuation of studies of students from preparatory classes to major schools who wish to access a higher education provided by another type of institution, educational cooperation conventions have passed between high schools and educational institutions, French or foreign. These conventions specify, in particular, according to the type of studies envisaged by the student and the consistency of his or her training course, the modalities of validation, by the host institution, of the courses and credits mentioned in the descriptive attestation provided for in Article D. 612-25. For the examination of individual files, they provide for the organization of commissions involving representatives of the high school and the host institution, chaired by a teacher-researcher appointed by the head of the higher education institution.
In order to ensure that each student admitted in the second year of the preparatory class has the opportunity to continue their training, high schools with no corresponding preparatory class may enter into agreements with other schools.
The nature of the classes comprising the categories referred to in section D. 612-22 is defined by orders of the Minister for Higher Education after notice, if any, of the Minister for Agriculture and of the Minister of Defence.
The general organization of studies, training objectives, schedules and programs as well as the contents of the descriptive certificates referred to in section D. 612-25 are determined by orders of the Minister for Higher Education, after notice, if any, of the Minister for Agriculture and of the Minister of Defence.
The application of this subsection is the subject of a consultation and monitoring mechanism.
The provisions of this sub-section shall apply to preparatory classes for large schools organized in private establishments and placed under association contract.
The preparation of the higher technician's patent by way of school and by way of learning is open to candidates who:
1° Either they hold the Bachelor of Technology;
2° Either they have a general or professional bachelor's degree, a title or diploma classified in the national repertoire of professional certifications at level IV by the National Commission for Professional Certification, the degree of access to university studies or a diploma recognized jointly by France and a partner state;
3° Either completed the complete education leading to one of the above-mentioned grades, titles or diplomas and whose abilities have been recognized sufficient by the commission mentioned in article D. 612-31.
In addition, candidates who have completed training abroad other than those mentioned in the preceding paragraphs may be admitted by a decision of the academy rector made after the advice of the pedagogical team.
The admission to a section of senior technicians of public education is organized under the authority of the academy rector who defines, with the heads of reception establishments, the conditions for the establishment and conduct of the admission procedure.
It is pronounced by the head of the host institution, after a commission of admission formed mainly of the professors of the requested section has appreciated the application of each student applying.
The admission of technological students to a section of superior technicians is the subject of a priority examination. When the record of a technology bachelor is consistent with the requested specialty and has not been subject to an admission proposal, the rector may, at the request of the candidate, issue his assignment in the requested section or in another section of the same professional field or a neighbouring professional field.
The admission is in law for students and apprentices who, having previously made an application in the forms and deadlines provided by the rector, obtain in the same year a mention "very good" or "good" to the professional or technological bachelor whose field corresponds to that of the higher technicians section requested. For students or apprentices who obtain a "very good" or "good" statement to the professional or technological bachelor's degree and who have been previously enrolled in an additional list or refused in the requested section of senior technicians, the rector assigns the assignment in the requested section or in another section of the same professional field.
The admission of general students is subject to the application of the provisions of the preceding paragraphs.
Admission to the preparation of the university degree of technology is in law for students who, having previously made an application in the forms and deadlines provided, obtain in the same year a mention "good" or "very good" to the technological bachelor's degree whose professional field is consistent with the department of university institute of technology requested.
In addition, upon verification of the level of candidates, under conditions fixed by order of the Minister responsible for higher education after the advice of the National Council for Higher Education and Research, may be admitted:
1° Holders of the baccalaureate or equivalence or dispensation of this degree, as well as candidates received at a special entrance examination;
2° Students who have completed a two-year higher education that they wish to complete with short technological training;
3° After validation of their studies, professional or personal experiences, persons engaged or not in active life.
Diplomas sanctioning a second cycle of higher education lead to the award of master's degree in the conditions provided for in articles D. 612-34 to D. 612-36.
The master's degree is conferred on the holders in full right:
1° A master's degree;
2° A degree of in-depth studies or a specialized graduate degree;
3° From an engineering degree issued by an institution authorized under Article L. 642-1;
4° Diplomas issued:
(a) By the Institut d'études politiques de Paris, in application of theArticle 2 of Decree No. 85-497 of 10 May 1985 relating to the Institute of Political Studies of Paris;
(b) By political institutes, pursuant to Article D. 719-191.
(c) By the University Paris-Dauphine, in application ofArticle 3 of Decree No. 2004-186 of 26 February 2004 establishing the University of Technology in Organizational Sciences and the Paris-Dauphine decision and on a list of the Minister responsible for higher education.
These diplomas are subject to a periodic national assessment.
In addition, the Master's degree is also conferred on the holders of diplomas issued on behalf of the State, of a similar level, on a list established after a periodic national assessment of these diplomas, by order of the Minister responsible for higher education after a compliant opinion of the Minister(s) of the institutions concerned and after the advice of the National Council for Higher Education and Research.
The diplomas and titles mentioned in article D. 612-34 lead to conferring the master's degree, including when it was applied to the validation procedure of the acquired experience.
The master's degree is conferred by the presidents or directors of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character and, where applicable, other institutions of public higher education, authorized, alone or jointly with other French public higher education institutions or other foreign higher education institutions, to issue the diplomas and titles referred to in Article D. 612-34.
The master's degree is issued in the name of the State at the same time as the title or diploma that opens right there.
Universities and other public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character may award the title of Doctor Honoris causa to personalities of foreign nationality due to eminent services rendered to the arts, letters, sciences and techniques, to France or to the institution that awards the title.
The honorary doctor is conferred by the president of the university or by the director of the public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character, after the advice of the Minister of Foreign Affairs, on the proposal of the board of directors.
The board of directors of the establishments deliberates on the award of the honorary doctor's title causa. This deliberation shall be in favour of the board of the institute, or of the school, or of the competent training and research unit if the title is proposed for a person whose work or action enters the specific area of this component.
The councils sit in restricted training for teachers-researchers. The proceedings shall be taken by a two-thirds majority of the votes cast. The councils shall only deliberate validly if the majority of the members composing the restricted training is present.
The degree is established and signed by the university president or by the director of the scientific, cultural and professional public institution. It is provided to the licensee in the forms established by each institution.
The title of Honoris causa cannot confer on its holder the rights attached to the possession of the national doctor's degree.
Articles D. 612-43 to D. 612-47 of this Code set out the conditions in which doctoral schools propose thesis projects, below designated doctoral research projects, to the doctoral mecenat of enterprises in accordance with the provisions of the e bis of the 1 of Article 238 bis of the General Tax Code.
The doctoral research projects proposed to the doctoral mecenat of enterprises are selected and made public by the doctoral schools mentioned in the second paragraph of article L. 612-7.
The doctoral research projects carried out by persons who are regularly registered for the preparation of a doctorate in a higher education institution authorized to issue the national doctoral degree or associated with the doctoral school and prepared within a unit or research team recognized as a result of a national assessment, under the conditions set by the decree taken under article L12.
The company contributes to the financing of doctoral research by a payment made, on behalf of the doctoral school, either to the institution authorized to issue the national doctoral degree or to the institution associated with the doctoral school in which the doctoral student is enrolled, whose doctoral research project, chosen by the doctoral school, is the subject of the doctoral degree, or to the university foundation created within this institution.
The contribution paid by the company is exclusive to the realization of the doctoral research project.
The institution defines the terms and conditions for the use of the contribution paid by the company after the opinion of the thesis director, the person or persons responsible for the research units concerned, the doctoral school board and the doctoral student concerned.
The contribution of the company may constitute all or part of the remuneration received by the doctoral student under a contract with a public person or an institution associated with the doctoral school under the conditions established by the order made under article L. 612-7. The contract shall be paid within the term of the contract and shall not, in any case, exceed the duration of the above-mentioned order.
When the doctoral student receives income for the completion of his doctoral research project under a contract entered into under the conditions set out in the preceding paragraph, the contribution of the undertaking may, in addition, be used in the form of means available to him for the completion of his research work.
Educational institutions that provide a graduate or non-diplomante higher education, which students undertake, as a compulsory or optional course, internships under Article L. 612-8 shall, in consultation with interested companies, develop an internship agreement on the basis of a model agreement.
These courses are integrated into a curriculum under the following conditions:
1° Their purpose and terms are defined in the organization of the training;
2° They are the subject of a return from the student giving rise to an assessment by the institution.
Also included in a curriculum, as long as they meet the conditions set out in the third (1°) and fourth (2°) paragraphs of this article, the courses organized in the framework:
1° Trainings for reorientation and proposed to students, including guidance advice or guidance advice from a training team official in which the student initially undertook;
2° Complementary training to promote professional and validated integration projects as such by the person responsible for the training in which the student is enrolled;
3° Periods during which the student temporarily suspends his or her presence in the establishment in which he or she is registered to carry out other activities allowing him or her exclusively to acquire skills in coherence with his or her training. In this case, in addition to the internship agreement, the educational institution and the company enter into an educational contract.
Model conventions are approved by the competent authorities of the establishments and are made public. This advertisement can be used electronically on the website of the establishments.
Model conventions specify the clauses that are mandatory in the internship agreements, including:
1° The definition of activities entrusted to the trainee according to the training objectives;
2° Start and end dates of the internship;
3° The maximum weekly duration of the intern's presence in the company and its presence, if any, in the company at night, Sunday or a holiday;
4° The amount of the gratification paid to the trainee and the manner in which it was paid;
5° The list of benefits offered, if any, by the company to the trainee, including with respect to its restoration, accommodation or reimbursement of costs incurred by the trainee;
6° The social protection scheme benefiting the trainee, including protection in the event of a work accident in accordance with theArticle L. 412-8 of the Social Security Code, as well as, where applicable, the obligation of the trainee to justify insurance covering his or her civil liability;
7° The conditions under which the trainee, one representative the establishment, the other the company, provide the coaching of the trainee;
8° The conditions for the issuance of a "study certificate" and, if applicable, the terms and conditions for the validation of the course for the preparation of the diploma;
9° The procedure for suspension and termination of the internship;
10° The conditions under which the trainee is authorized to abstain, particularly in the context of obligations certified by the educational institution;
11° The terms of the company's rules of procedure applicable to the trainee, where applicable.
In the absence of a model convention, the internship agreements include the clauses listed in Article D. 612-50.
The internship agreement, to which is annexed the " charter of student internships in business" of April 26, 2006, is signed by:
1° The representative of the institution in which the trainee is registered. He mentions his quality, name and address of this establishment;
2° The company representative, who mentions its quality, name and address of the company;
3° The trainee, who mentions his address and the full title of his curriculum or training; if the intern is a minor, the agreement is also signed by its legal representative.
The company prepares and maintains the list of internship agreements it has entered into.
No internship agreement may be concluded to replace an employee in the event of absence, suspension of his or her employment contract or termination, to perform a regular task corresponding to a permanent job position, to face a temporary increase in the activity of the company or to occupy a seasonal job.
Where the duration of an internship within the meaning of Article L. 612-8 exceeds the period specified in Article L. 612-11, the trainee shall receive a gratuity in accordance with the terms specified in the second to sixth paragraphs of this Article and the amount indicated in the seventh paragraph of this Article.
The duration of the internship is appreciated in the light of the internship agreement and the possible participants who have the effect of extending the internship.
The award is payable to the trainee without prejudice to the reimbursement of the costs incurred to perform the internship and the benefits offered, if any, for the restoration, accommodation and transportation.
The graduate is due to the trainee from the first day of the first month of the internship.
The internship fee is paid monthly to the trainee.
In the event of suspension or termination of the internship agreement, the amount of the award due to the trainee is prorated based on the duration of the internship.
In the absence of a branch agreement or extended professional agreement, the hourly amount of the graduate due to the trainee is set at 12.5 per cent of the hourly ceiling of social security defined under theArticle L. 241-3 of the Social Security Code.
Pursuant to Article L. 612-8, the internships carried out in an association, a public enterprise or an industrial and commercial public establishment are subject to the provisions of this section.
Internships in government departments and public institutions of the State that do not have an industrial and commercial nature are the subject of a convention between the interns, the institution preparing a diploma of higher education and the administration or reception institution.
These courses have an initial or cumulative duration that may not exceed six months, with the exception of those who are integrated into a pedagogical curriculum providing for a higher internship period.
When the duration of the internship is greater than two consecutive months, the internship shall be rewarded under the conditions defined in section D. 612-60.
The internship agreement referred to in Article D. 612-56 includes:
1° The full title of the curriculum or training of the trainee and the objectives and purposes of the internship;
2° The activities entrusted to the trainee according to the training objectives;
3° The duration of the internship as provided for in article D. 612-56 as well as the start and end dates of the internship;
4° The weekly duration of the intern's presence in the public administration or reception facility;
5° The conditions under which the probation officers, one representative of the educational institution, the other the administration or public reception institution, provide the coaching of the trainee;
6° Where applicable, the amount of the gratification paid to the trainee and the terms and conditions of its payment;
7° The social protection scheme for the trainee, including protection in the event of a work accident in accordance with the b of 2° of Article L. 412-8 of the Social Security Code as well as, where applicable, the obligation of the intern to justify an insurance covering its civil liability;
8° The conditions under which the trainee is authorized to abstain, particularly in the context of obligations certified by the educational institution;
9° The procedure for suspension and termination of the internship agreement.
Travel by trainees between their home and their place of probation may be taken care of by the public administration or host institution under the conditions set by the Decree No. 2010-676 of 21 June 2010 providing partial support for the price of subscription securities corresponding to the travel by public officials between their usual residence and place of work.
The trainee who performs a mission in the course of the internship shall be entitled to the provisions of the Decree No. 2006-781 of 3 July 2006 setting out the conditions and procedures for the payment of costs incurred by temporary travel of civil personnel of the State.
The place of the internship specified in the internship agreement shall be considered as its administrative residence.
For the payment of the gratification referred to in Article D. 612-56 of this Code, the duration of the internship shall be assessed in the light of the internship agreement and the possible amendments that have the effect of prolonging the internship and the number of days of effective attendance during the internship period, which may not be less than 40.
Gratification is due to the trainee from the first day of the first month of probation.
It is based on the weekly duration of the trainee's attendance.
It is paid monthly.
It cannot be accumulated with remuneration paid by the public administration or reception institution during the internship period.
In the event of suspension or termination of the internship agreement, the amount of the award due to the trainee is prorated based on the duration of the internship.
The amount of the enrollment due to the trainee is 12.5 per cent of the hourly social security ceiling defined under theArticle L. 242-4-1 of the Social Security Codefor a period of time equal to the legal duration of work.
Degrees and academic titles sanction the various levels of higher education common to all areas of training.
The grades correspond to the main reference levels defined in the European Higher Education Area. The titles correspond to the intermediate levels.
Degrees and titles are conferred on holders of national degrees of higher education issued under the authority of the State according to the regulations specific to each of them.
National diplomas sanction each stage of graduate studies in a particular field of training mentioned in the title of the diploma. They confer the same rights on all licensees, regardless of the institutions that issued them and the modes of acquisition.
The grades are the bachelor's degree, the degree, the master's degree and the doctorate.
National diplomas conferring these grades are regulated. Only these national degrees can be named as a bachelor's, a bachelor's, a master's or a doctor's degree.
Institutions that enjoy educational and scientific autonomy, including public institutions of scientific cooperation mentioned inArticle L. 344-4 of the Research Code, are authorized to issue, on behalf of the State, national diplomas by an enabling decision taken under the conditions established by the regulations specific to each of them.
Except as specific regulatory provisions, these decisions are made for a limited period of time and following a national assessment of institutions and training and certification schemes. This national evaluation takes into account the results and quality of their projects.
As part of the provisions of sections D. 613-1 to D. 613-4, the Minister for Higher Education, in conjunction with the other relevant ministers responsible for higher education and certification, ensures consistency and readability, at the national and international levels, of the national level and title system and of the national degrees conferred on them.
Degrees or university titles in disciplines other than those of health are conferred by the following national degrees:
1° Certificate of law capacity;
2° Degree of access to university studies (DAEU);
3° Baccalaureate;
4° Patent of superior technician;
5° University degree in technology;
6° Diploma of scientific and technical academic studies;
7° Diploma in general university studies;
8° National degree of specialized technology;
9° License;
10° National diploma of national interpreter guide;
11° Mastery;
12° Master ;
13° Diploma in technological research;
14° Doctorate;
15° Enabling to conduct research.
University degrees or titles in health disciplines are conferred by the following national degrees:
1° Certificate of orthoptist capacity;
2° Certificate of orthophonist capacity;
3° State diploma of audioprothesist;
4° Graduate in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology;
5° Degree in general medical education;
6° Degree in general education in pharmaceuticals;
7° Degree in general education in odontological sciences;
8° Degree in general education in the Maieutic sciences;
9° Midwife State Diploma;
10° Diploma of the end of the second cycle of medical studies;
11° Graduate of the second cycle of pharmaceutical studies;
12° Diploma of the end of the second cycle of odontological studies;
13° Doctor of Medicine State Diploma;
14° State Diploma in Dental Surgery Doctor;
15° Doctor's State Diploma in Pharmacy;
16° Certificate of Advanced Dental Surgery Studies;
17° Certificate of Special Clinical Studies;
18° Graduate degree;
19° Certificate of in-depth studies in dental surgery;
20° Diploma of specialized studies;
21° Diploma of complementary specialized studies;
22° Medical capacity;
23° Doctorate.
National diplomas prepared in professional academic institutes are issued by public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature, authorized for this purpose by order of the minister responsible for higher education. Licensing is granted for a term of four years renewable, subject to the conditions set out in sections L. 613-1, L. 613-3 and L. 613-4, following the advice of a national commission made up of, inter alia, teachers and qualified personalities as a result of their professional activity.
Training in professional university institutes is organized in three years of study. The curriculum includes a basic training of a scientific and technical character in the speciality concerned, a complementary training prepared for professional life and courses in the corresponding sector of activity.
Students are admitted to a professional university institute, in the first year of studies of the institute, following an orientation procedure organized by the institution under the authority of the director of the professional university institute; However, some students may be admitted directly to the second year of study following an identical orientation procedure. An order of the Minister for Higher Education specifies the conditions for the application of this paragraph.
In continuing vocational training, candidates for admission to professional university institutes may be admitted under the conditions set out in subsection 3 of section 2 of this chapter.
National diplomas refer to the scientific, cultural and professional public institutions that have issued them.
Diplomas specific to universities and other public higher education institutions as well as diplomas issued by private higher education institutions may not be the same name as the diplomas listed in sections D. 613-6 and D. 613-7.
The general education diplomas in medical sciences, pharmaceuticals, odontological sciences and maïeutic sciences referred to in section D. 613-7 give their licensee the degree of licence.
This subparagraph does not include provisions made by decree.
Institutes for the preparation of the general administration contribute to the information, guidance, training and preparation of candidates for the access examinations to category A bodies of the public service of the State as well as to the initial and continuing general training of State officials.
They may also participate in the preparation of candidates for access to the territorial public service as well as the initial and continuing general training of territorial officials.
For the purpose of carrying out the tasks set out in Article D. 613-15, the institutes for the preparation of the general administration provide second-graduate courses for a year of study and sanctioned by national diplomas issued by the university of which they are part.
Certificates of special training may also be issued.
This subparagraph does not include provisions made by decree.
Diplomas referred to in sections D. 613-2 and D. 613-4 may be issued as part of international partnerships under the conditions set out in this subsection.
The international partnership is organized by a convention between one or more French higher education institutions and one or more foreign higher education institutions.
French institutions must have been empowered by the State to issue the diploma concerned by the international partnership. When the grant of this degree has been granted a joint authorization between several French institutions, the partnership agreement is concluded by each of these institutions.
The contracting foreign establishment(s) shall have the capacity to grant, at the same level and in the same field of training, a diploma recognized by the competent authorities of their country.
The agreement referred to in Article D. 613-18 defines, inter alia, the modalities of training, the formation of educational teams, the control of knowledge and skills and the modalities of certification, in accordance with the quality requirements required by the French accreditation procedure to issue the diploma concerned.
It sets out the terms and conditions for students to register. It specifies the conditions for the balanced alternation of training periods in the countries concerned. It determines how the jury is formed, the grant of European credits and the material, educational and linguistic support of students.
It is concluded for a maximum period commensurate with the remaining duration of the authorization referred to in the second paragraph of section D. 613-18.
As part of the international partnership, partner institutions can:
1° be issued jointly with the same degree;
2° At the same time, grant a degree specific to each of them.
The diploma issued jointly is recognized in full law in France provided that it is also recognized in the partner country(s). The agreement referred to in section D. 613-18 refers to the terms and conditions of such recognition.
French institutions receiving the authorization referred to in Article D. 613-18 may implement the international partnership defined in this subsection on declaration addressed to the Ministers concerned as well as to the competent assessment body for the diploma under international partnership.
In the periodic national assessment following the implementation of the international partnership, a report, addressed to the relevant ministers and to the competent assessment body, specifies the purpose of the agreements concluded, the adaptations of pedagogy carried out and the results obtained. The evaluation proceeding is based on this report on the continuation of the partnership. It issues recommendations taken into account by the renewal decision.
Orders specify, as appropriate, the conditions for the application of this subsection to certain specific degrees.
The provisions of this subsection apply to an international partnership with an organization established under an international agreement to which France is a party and with a higher education mission.
An assessment of the application of the provisions of this subsection is presented to the National Council for Higher Education and Research.
Candidates for examinations or examinations of higher education organized by the Minister for Higher Education or by the Minister for Culture who have a disability may benefit from arrangements for:
1° The conditions for the conduct of the tests, such as to enable them to benefit from the material conditions and the technical and human assistance appropriate to their situation;
2° An increase in time for one or more tests, which cannot exceed one third of the normal time for each of them. However, this increase may be extended, in the light of the exceptional situation of the candidate, on the basis of the physician's request and in the notice referred to in section D. 613-27;
3° The retention, for five years, of notes to tests or units obtained at the examination or examination, as well as, where applicable, the benefit of acquis obtained under the validation procedure for the acquired experience set out in section 2 of this chapter;
4° The spread over several sessions of the passing of the tests;
5° Adjustments or exemptions for testing, made necessary by certain disability situations, under the conditions prescribed by order of the Minister for Higher Education, the Minister for Culture or the President or Director of the Institution.
Candidates seeking an adjustment of the conditions of examination or examination shall apply to one of the physicians designated by the Commission on the Rights and Autonomy of Persons with Disabilities.
The doctor renders a notice, which is sent to the candidate and the competent administrative authority to organize the examination or examination, in which he proposes modifications. The administrative authority shall decide on the arrangements granted and notify the applicant of its decision.
The administrative authority referred to in section D. 613-27 shall ensure the accessibility to persons with disabilities of the premises provided for the conduct of the tests. It puts in place the authorized arrangements for each candidate.
The president or director of the higher education institution shall take all measures to enable students with disabilities, who are hospitalized at the time of the examination or examination sessions, to compose under conditions defined in agreement with the head of hospital activity to which the student depends.
The president of the jury of the examination or contest is informed by the organizer service of the latter of the modifications to which the candidates concerned have benefited, in accordance with the anonymity rule of the candidates. He shall inform, where appropriate, the members of the jury of the developments implemented.
The provisions on diplomas sanctioning vocational training are set out in the following texts:
1° Administrator, judicial agent and business diagnostic expert: Articles L. 811-1 to L. 811-5 and R. 811-1 to R. 811-39 of the Commercial Code for Judicial Directors, L. 812-1 to L. 812-8 and R. 812-1 to R. 812-20 of the same Code for Judicial Agents and L. 813-1 of the same Code for Business Diagnostic Experts;
2° Real estate agent : Decree No. 72-678 of 20 July 1972 setting the conditions for the application of Act No. 70-9 of 2 January 1970 regulating the operating conditions of certain transactions relating to buildings and trade funds;
3rd Lawyer: Decree No. 91-1197 of 27 November 1991 organizing the legal profession;
4th Preacher: Articles L. 321-4, R. 321-18 and R. 321-20 to R. 321-31 of the Commercial Code and Articles 2 and 4 to 6 of Decree No. 73-541 of 19 June 1973 concerning the professional training of judicial commissioners and the conditions of access to this profession;
5° External Auditor: Articles L. 822-1 to L. 822-5 and R. 822-1 to R. 822-31 of the Commercial Code;
6th Accountant: Articles 45 to 83 of Decree No. 2012-432 of 30 March 2012 the exercise of the accounting activity;
7° Automotive expert: Decree No. 95-493 of 25 April 1993 establishing and general regulation of the degree of automotive expert;
8° Geometer-expert: Decree No. 2010-1406 of 10 November 2010 on the Government ' s certificate of land survey;
9° Guide interpreter national : Articles D. 221-19 to D. 221-24 of the Tourism Code ;
10° Huissier de justice : Decree No. 75-770 of 14 August 1975 relating to the conditions of access to the profession of judicial officer as well as to the terms and conditions of the creations, transfers and deletions of judicial officer offices and of certain ministerial and judicial officers;
11° Note: Decree No. 73-609 of 5 July 1973 relating to vocational training in notariat and conditions of access to notary functions;
12° Oenologist: Decree of 5 June 2007 on the organization of studies for the national diploma of oenologist;
13° Psychologist: Decree No. 90-255 of 22 March 1990 fixing the list of diplomas to make professional use of the title of psychologist, Decree No. 2003-1073 of 14 November 2003 relating to conditions for the issuance of authorization to make professional use of the title of psychologist provided for in section 44-II of Act No. 85-772 of 25 July 1985 as amended, Decree No. 89-684 of 18 September 1989 creating the state diploma of school psychologist and Decree No. 91-291 of 20 March 1991 creating the state diploma of orientation counselor-psychologist.
Sections R. 613-33 to R. 613-37 establish, pursuant to sections L. 613-3 and L. 613-4, the conditions for the validation of previous graduate studies followed by a student or for the validation of the acquired experience of the individual for a diploma issued on behalf of the State by a higher education institution.
Any graduate studies conducted by the candidate in a public or private training institution or organization, in France or abroad, may be validated regardless of the terms and duration of the studies.
Can also be used to validate the acquired experience of the exercise, whether continuous or not, for a cumulative period of at least three years, of employee, non-employed or voluntary activities. These certificates justify, in whole or in part, the knowledge and skills required to graduate.
The application for validation is sent to the head of institution at the same time as the application for registration with the institution for the grant of the degree.
A candidate may only apply in the same calendar year and for the same degree only one application and may only enter one institution. The application specifies the degree applied. If he or she applies different degrees, the candidate may not file more than three applications for validation in the same calendar year. These obligations and the commitment on the candidate's honour to respect them are on each application form.
The application is accompanied by a file under the conditions set out in section R. 613-35.
The validation application file submitted by the explicit candidate by reference to the degree applied the knowledge, skills and abilities acquired during the studies or by the experience.
For the validation of the studies, the file includes diplomas, certificates and other documents allowing the validation jury to assess the nature and level of these studies. In particular, when the studies were followed within the framework defined by the European Union to promote mobility, in another European State, the dossier includes the descriptive schedule of the diploma and the certificates certifying the European credits obtained representative of the studies being carried out.
For the validation of the acquired experience, the file includes the documents reporting on this experience and the duration of the various activities in which the candidate acquired it and, where applicable, the certificates for the training and diplomas obtained previously.
The board of directors or the proceeding that takes place defines the common rules for the validation of the studies or the achievements of the experiment by the establishment and constitution of the validation panels and, where appropriate, the specific terms applicable to the various types of diplomas within the framework of the regulations specific to each of them.
For the validation of the studies, the jurys are either the jury of the diplomas concerned, or an emanation of them, under their control.
For the validation of the achievements of the experiment, the jury includes a majority of teachers and researchers as well as persons with a primary activity other than teaching and competent to assess the nature of the acquired, including professional, whose validation is sought.
When persons belonging to the company or organization in which the candidate has exercised his or her activity are members of the jury, they may not participate in the proceedings concerning that candidate.
The members of the jury are appointed by the head of institution in consideration of their skills, abilities and qualifications, in addition to ensuring a balanced representation between women and men.
The validation jury conducts the examination of the candidate's file and discusses with him in relation to this file. For the validation of the acquired experience and when the establishment has planned, a real or reconstituted job placement of the candidate is organized.
By its deliberation, the jury determines the knowledge and skills it declares acquired with respect to the requirements required to obtain the post-graduate degree and, where applicable, taking into account the specific conditions for graduation by special legislative or regulatory provisions. The jury may make recommendations or advice to the student in order to facilitate further training.
The President of the jury shall send a report to the Chief of Institution specifying the extent of the validation granted and, in the event of partial validation, the nature of the knowledge and abilities that the candidate must acquire or, where appropriate, those to be subject to further control.
The Chief of Institution shall notify the applicant of this decision.
Studies, professional experiences and personal gains may be validated for access to the various levels of post-baccalaurate training provided by an institution under the Minister of Higher Education, subject to the conditions set out in sections D. 613-39 to D. 613-50, subject to specific legislative or regulatory provisions.
The validation allows either direct access to a training provided by the institution and leads to the issuance of a national diploma or a title that is regulated by the State, or to make an application for the entrance examination in an institution. A candidate may only be admitted to the institution that has controlled, under the conditions provided for in section D. 613-44, his or her ability to attend any of the training he or she provides.
In training courses, whose number of students is limited by law or regulation, the validation cannot exempt candidates from meeting the tests organized to limit the number of students.
With the exception of high-level athletes, referred to in Article L. 611-4, candidates who have not completed the bachelor's degree or a qualifying degree must have interrupted their initial studies for at least two years and be at least twenty years of age at the scheduled date for the resumption of their studies.
Applicants, who have been enrolled in a training course and who would not have met the knowledge control tests to access the following study year, cannot apply for validation to be admitted in this study year before a three-year period. This period of time is not applicable to students in the preparatory classes who request the validation procedure defined in this subsection with a view to accessing undergraduate or undergraduate training.
Foreign holders of securities or diplomas may apply for validation under the terms and conditions set out in this subsection and in accordance with international agreements and the regulations in force, including those of sections D. 123-22 and D. 612-14 to D. 612-18.
Can be used for validation:
1° Any training done by the candidate in a public or private training institution or structure, regardless of the terms, duration and mode of sanction;
2° The professional experience gained during an employee or non-employed activity, or an internship;
3° Knowledge and skills acquired outside of any training system.
A validation application file is submitted by each applicant to the institution or institutions that provide the training they wish to attend.
The list of documents to be submitted and the deadline for the submission of applications shall be set annually, for each training or examination, by the establishment in such a way that the nominations of candidates, after validation of their acquisitions, may be made on normal dates.
The validation procedure allows to assess the candidate's knowledge, methods and know-how based on the training he wishes to follow.
When the application for validation is for direct admission to training, candidates may, after examination of their file, possibly with an interview, be allowed to pass the knowledge verification tests. As a derogatory, dispensations, total or partial, of these tests may be granted.
In the event of an application for a waiver of the titles required to apply for a contest, the validation procedure includes a review of the candidates' file, possibly with an interview.
The validation decision is made by the president of the university or the director of the institution on the proposal of an educational commission. The reasoned decision, including any proposals or advice, is forwarded to the candidate.
The president of the university or the director of the institution determines the number and modalities of operation of the pedagogical commissions, after notice of the board of studies and academic life or of the competent pedagogical body.
It sets out the composition of the educational commissions and designates the members, on a proposal, if any, of the director of the school or the institute who provides the training.
Each educational commission is presided over by a professor of universities, except as decided after the scientific council's advice. It includes at least two professor-researchers from the relevant training and one teacher-researcher with ongoing training activities. It may include professionals outside the institution. The participation of at least one of them is mandatory for access to training where they provide at least 30% of the teachings.
Candidates admitted to training may be required to follow additional lessons or to be taught from certain lessons.
In all cases, they carry out the normal registration formalities and receive a pedagogical follow-up provided by the teachers responsible for the training.
The Chairperson may, on the proposal of the Commission, direct a candidate who would not be allowed to attend the training requested:
1° To another training provided by the institution;
2° Either towards an upgrade sanctioned by a review when the candidate wishes to register in the first year of the first cycle.
When the application for validation is a waiver of the titles required to apply to a joint competition for several institutions, the validation decision is taken by the director of the institution responsible for the organization of the contest, on the proposal of a joint commission.
Each year, the establishments prepare an annual assessment of the number of applications reviewed, the number of requests that have given rise to a favourable decision and the proportion of students admitted by this procedure to the total number of students.
The provisions of this subsection apply to higher education provided by institutions under the Minister for Agriculture.
Studies for the specialized degree in medical biology last four years. They consist of two parties named at level 1 and level 2 respectively.
Level 1 corresponds to the first four semesters of the boarding school and level 2 to the other four semesters.
This degree is issued by the universities authorized for this purpose by order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health.
The degree has two options:
1° Multi-purpose biology;
2° Biology directed to a specialization.
Registered for the preparation of the specialized medical biology degree:
1° Internals in medicine and pharmacy ranked as useful in the competitions provided for in articles L. 632-2 and L. 633-2 respectively;
2° Internals in medicine and pharmacy ranked as useful in the competitions provided for in articles L. 632-12 and L. 633-4, organized for French doctors and pharmacists or nationals of another Member State of the European Union, another State party to the agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra;
3° Internals in medicine and pharmacy ranked in useful rank to the competitions organized for foreign students other than nationals of the Member States of the European Union, the Principality of Andorra, the States parties to the agreement on the European Economic Area or the Swiss Confederation, pursuant to articles L. 632-12 and L. 633-4;
4° The assistants of the armed hospitals received at the special examinations provided for in R. 632-48 and D. 633-23 and R. 633-25 respectively. For the purposes of the provisions of this section, interested persons are considered as internals.
Students mentioned in article D. 631-2 take an annual administrative registration with one of the universities in the interregion in which they are assigned to prepare the degree of specialized medical biology studies, according to the rules established jointly by the councils of the medical and pharmacy training units of the interregion and approved by the presidents of the universities concerned.
The preparation of the specialized medical biology degree is placed, in each interregion, under the responsibility of a teacher responsible for coordinating the organization of general training and practical training.
It is designated for a period of three years by the directors of the medical and pharmacy training and research unit (UFR) on the proposal of specialty teachers.
This responsibility is provided alternatively by a UFR medical teacher and a UFR pharmacy teacher.
The teacher responsible for the preparation of the degree of specialized medical biology is assisted by an interregional educational commission.
This commission, whose members are designated by the directors of the medical and pharmacy training and research units (UFR) in the interregion, after agreement of the university presidents, includes:
1° The teacher coordinator of the degree, president;
2° At least six teachers from different UFR in the interregion. Parity is ensured between UFR medical teachers and UFR pharmacy teachers.
A member of the commission, elected by the commission, shall serve as Vice-Chair; he is a doctor if the coordinator teacher is a pharmacist and vice versa.
The interregional educational commission meets at least twice a year on the convocation of the coordinator teacher.
It is consulted on all educational issues related to the application of this section, including the validation of level 1 and the professional project of each internal referred to in section D. 631-8. It directs the intern for validation of level 2 taking into account the professional project. She also heard, as an advisory capacity, a representative of the medical staff and a representative of the pharmacy staff preparing the degree of specialized medical biology in the interregion, appointed by the coordinator teacher on the proposal of representative trade union organizations.
During Level 1, the intern validates a semester in approved services for this level, in each of the following specialties:
1° Bacteriology and virology;
2° Biochemistry;
Hematology.
Another semester is validated either in immunology or in parasitology and mycology.
The courses are organized in each interregion and for each speciality according to the terms set by the councils of the medical and pharmacy training and research units of the interregion, on the proposal of the teacher coordinator, and approved by the university presidents concerned.
The validation of these trainings is carried out by the person responsible for the service in which the candidate was assigned. The decision is motivated and contains a document certifying that the intern has achieved the objectives of the specialty set out in the order mentioned in the first paragraph of Article D. 631-12.
At the end of the fourth semester, the intern presents to the interregional pedagogical commission mentioned in article D. 631-5 a professional project. He indicates his wish to focus either on multi-purpose biology or on specialized biology.
Based on this project, the Commission issues recommendations on the organization of level 2 to be validated. It is taken into account the follow-up of these recommendations for graduation.
During Level 2, the intern is directed either towards versatile biology or to specialized biology.
For validation in versatile biology, the four semesters are free. However, the intern cannot validate more than two semesters in the same specialty. One of these semesters can be validated in an approved clinical service. It also validates the teachings of quality assurance, organization, management and law applied to biology.
Training may also be carried out in approved services for a specialized degree or for a complementary degree in specialized studies in the event of registration to the latter or in an approved clinical service.
The intern in specialized biology opts for a specialized training corresponding to either one of the specialties mentioned in section D. 631-7, or another biological specialty in accordance with its professional project and in accordance with the terms defined by decree of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health.
The training is carried out in approved services for level 2, for a specialized degree or for a complementary specialized degree. A semester can be validated in an approved clinical service.
The intern can also follow a research-oriented curriculum in accordance with its professional project.
The educational objectives of this training and the list of biological specialties mentioned in section D. 631-11 are set by order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health.
Training of the specialized medical biology degree is followed in hospital, extra-hospital or research laboratories approved in accordance with the provisions of the Decree No. 2012-257 of 22 February 2012 relating to the inter-region commission of specialized pharmacy and medical biology studies.
The validation of the training is done at the end of each semester by the person responsible for the service in which the candidate was assigned. The decision is motivated and includes an assessment made on the basis of the report prepared by the candidate on his activities during the semester and a document attesting that the intern has acquired the speciality objectives set out in the order mentioned in the first paragraph of Article D. 631-12.
The decision for the validation or non-validation of the course is forwarded by the person responsible for the service, within one month, to the interregional coordinator provided for in section D. 631-4 and to the tuition service of the training and research unit in which the candidate is registered.
It is immediately communicated by the school service to the regional health agencies responsible for choice in the interregion.
Interns may, after the annual authorization of the commission under section D. 631-5, complete part of their training abroad, under the conditions set out in section R. 632-20 and section D. 633-15.
The specialized medical biology degree, including a multi-purpose biology option or a specialized biology option, is issued to the candidates referred to in Article D. 631-2 of this Code having:
1° Completed the total length of boarding or, for assistants in the hospitals of the armies, the total duration of attendance;
2° Completes and validates the training in accordance with the professional project;
3° Obtained for pharmacy internals, before the end of level 1, the certificates of capacity corresponding to the various sampling acts for biology analyses mentioned inarticle R. 6211-31 of the Public Health Code ;
4° Supported a brief before a jury composed of at least four members, including at least one medical professor and a pharmacy professor, appointed by the university president(s) on the proposal of the directors of the medical and pharmacy training and research units of the interregion and the commission referred to in article D. 631-5 of this Code.
This memory can take place, for all or part, of the thesis for the state diploma of doctor in medicine or the state diploma of doctor in pharmacy.
A person who requests the benefit of the provisions of sections L. 632-13 or L. 634-1 shall file an application file for the validation of his or her previous training and professional experience with the university of which the degree, certificate or title of specialist in medicine or dental surgery is attached.
This file includes, with the supporting documentation:
1° A list of diplomas, certificates or titles obtained;
2° A description of his professional experience;
3° A description of the complementary and ongoing training.
Upon receipt of the applicant's complete file, a receipt of the application is issued.
A jury is responsible for assessing the knowledge and skills acquired by the candidate.
In the event that the interested party wishes to continue a training leading to a degree from a medical practitioner, the jury is composed of members of the interregional commission for the coordination of the specialized degree or the degree of complementary study sought.
In the event that the interested party wishes to continue a training leading to a degree from a practitioner specializing in dental surgery, the jury is composed of the director of the training and research unit concerned, the head of the service welcoming students in clinical training and the head of the training sought.
The jury conducts the examination of the candidate's file, discusses with him and may submit it to a situation test.
At the end of this evaluation, the jury proposes to the president of the university in which the interested person is enrolled the content of the specialized training which the latter may be dispensed and the additional training to be completed for the desired degree.
The president of the university shall notify the applicant, by reason of a decision, of the exemptions from the studies he or she benefits, and of the duration and content of the additional training he or she has to do.
The President's decision takes place within four months of the date of filing the candidate's complete file with the university concerned. The silence held for more than four months is a decision to reject.
Training takes place under the conditions provided by the diploma regulations that the individual wishes to obtain. The degree is issued after validation of the additional training indicated in the decision referred to in R. 631-20.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
Access to the third cycle of medical studies:
1° Students who have validated the second cycle of medical studies in France;
2° Students who are nationals of the Member States of the European Union or other States Parties to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra having validated a basic medical training referred to in Article 24 of Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and the Council of Europe of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications. A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health determines the conditions under which these equivalences are appreciated.
Graduate students of medical studies register each year at a university with a medical training and research unit.
The third cycle of medical studies is organized in geographical districts called "inter-regions", including at least three university hospital centres (CHU).
The boarding subdivisions created within these interregions constitute a geographical space with one or more CHUs.
The list of interregions and boarding divisions is decided by the ministers responsible for higher education and health respectively.
All training is provided under the control of the subdivision's medical training and research unit(s).
For the purposes of this section, the Ile-de-France region, on the one hand, the department of Guadeloupe and the local authorities of Guyana and Martinique, on the other hand, are considered to be an interregion and subdivision.
The Indian Ocean Subdivision includes the Department of La Réunion and the Department of Mayotte. In the absence of CHU, it is attached to one or more metropolitan CHUs under the conditions defined by decree of ministers responsible for higher education, health and overseas.
Anonymous national classifying tests allow candidates mentioned in section R. 632-1 to obtain an intern assignment in medicine. They are organized simultaneously in all interregions.
They have several trials, at least one of which consists of a critical reading of one or more scientific articles.
A decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education sets out the program, organizational conditions, course, nature and weighting of the tests.
A medical scientific council, placed with the Minister for Higher Education, prepares and verifies records and questions that may be asked during the national classifying tests referred to in R. 632-4 and the competitions referred to in R. 632-53.
This council is composed of eight members, selected from the faculty of the incumbent universities belonging to the electoral colleges of the sections and medical sub-sections of the National Council of Universities appointed by decree of the Minister for Higher Education. He designates a president and a secretary general.
The Chair shall designate five experts for each specialty or group of specialties. They are responsible for proposing to the Scientific Council files that could be tested.
The subjects of the national classifying tests are drawn by lot by the president of the scientific council in medicine, from a bank of subjects constituted by this council.
An order of Ministers for Higher Education and Health specifies the modalities for the operation of the Scientific Council in Medicine.
The members of the jury of the national classifying examinations are designated by lot among the teachers of the university holders belonging to the electoral colleges of the sections and medical sub-sections of the National Council of Universities.
The conditions under which this draw takes place and the procedure for organizing the jury are defined by a decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
The list of disciplines and specialties of the third cycle of medical studies is determined by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health, taking into account the health needs of the population and the progress of research.
A discipline has one or more specialties. Each specialty is a specialized degree or a complementary specialized degree as provided for in articles R. 632-24 and R. 632-30.
Some disciplines and specialties may be common to medicine and pharmacy or medicine and odontology.
An order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health determines each year for a period of five years the number of interns in medicine to be trained by speciality and subdivision as provided for in section R. 632-3, taking into account the situation of medical demography in the various specialties and its evolution with regard to the needs of specialized care.
An order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health determines the number of interns offered each year by discipline or specialty and by university hospital centre. The choice made by each student is subject to the ranking of the national classifying tests referred to in R. 632-4.
Students who have signed a public service contract, as defined in section L. 632-6, elect, according to their rank of classification, an intern position within an established list, by specialty and subdivision, depending on the situation of medical demography, by order of the minister responsible for higher education and the minister responsible for health.
The national procedure for the choice of medical discipline and the university referral hospital is organized according to the rank of ranking obtained by the candidate according to the terms fixed by decrees of the ministers responsible for health and higher education.
During this procedure, students perform a pre-choice that determines, within a discipline, the specialty they wish to prepare within the limit of the number of interns to be trained under the second paragraph of Article L. 632-2.
The assignments on a subdivision and discipline or specialty following the national procedure of choice are made by order of the Director General of the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Hospitaller Public Service Staff published in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
The classification rank obtained by the candidate at the end of the examinations is taken into account in the procedure for selecting the courses.
With a view to finalizing the degree under the conditions set out in Article R. 632-24, the internals confirm or modify their pre-choice, prior to the validation of the fourth semester, in terms defined by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
Semi-annual assignments are issued by order of the Director General of the Regional Health Agency.
Candidates may not present themselves to the national classifying tests referred to in R. 632-4 and make the choice provided for in R. 632-9, unless otherwise provided in R. 632-11, only twice:
(a) The first time during the academic year in which they meet the conditions set out in article R. 632-1, which are appreciated by the date of the jury's deliberation of national classifying trials;
(b) The second time of the following academic year, in the following cases and conditions:
1° The intern who obtained a first assignment and wishes to benefit from a second choice must have exercised his duties in the discipline acquired after the first choice.
In order to be registered for the second time in the national classifying tests, the intern, before the end of the first semester of duties, has made known to its training and research unit (UFR) and its university hospital centre to link its intention to give up the benefit of the first national classifying tests. The intern cannot continue its duties as part of its first assignment.
As part of this second and final assignment, the courses carried out during the first year may be validated under the new training chosen, in accordance with the terms set by the relevant medical UFR councils, on the proposal of the interregional coordinator teacher, referred to in article R. 632-25. The intern is then deemed to have an increased seniority in the number of semesters validated.
2° The candidate who has presented himself to the national classifying examinations may, as a derogatory and exceptional and for duly justified serious reasons, request to renounce the national procedure of choice provided for in article R. 632-10 and, once again, to present himself to these tests the following academic year.
He addresses his application for this purpose to the Director of the Medical UFR. A commission, brought together by the director of the medical UFR, decides on this application. It also decides on the practical trainings to which the candidate must participate and on the theoretical teachings that he or she is authorized to follow as an auditor within the meaning of Article L. 811-1, for that second and final attempt. The composition and modalities of the commission and the maximum number of students who may benefit from the derogation are determined by a decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
In all cases, the results obtained during the second attempt are substituted for those obtained during the first attempt.
The candidate's right to make twice the choice provided for in section R. 632-9 is maintained in the event of a failure to participate in the national classifying examinations resulting from maternity, paternity or adoption leave, a force majeure case or for duly justified medical reasons.
If, in the course of the election procedure, the candidate is unable to express his or her will for reasons of force majeure or for a duly justified medical reason, he or she participates in the procedure of choice, in accordance with the terms set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
After the discipline selection procedure, the medical officers, attached to a regional hospital centre, are responsible for their educational training, in accordance with the terms determined by the unit or the medical training and research units (UFR) of the subdivision and after approval of the university presidents concerned, of the UFR Medical University where they take their annual registration.
In the course of their training, medical officers can benefit, taking into account the quality of their research project, from a research year whose organizational terms and the number of positions offered each year are determined by decree of ministers responsible for the budget, higher education and health.
Internships carried out during a research year are not taken into account in the practical training obligations provided for each specialized degree and each complementary specialized degree.
Interns in medicine receive full-time theoretical and practical training from three to five years according to the degree of specialized study envisaged.
For each specialized degree, the preparation time, the curriculum of the teachings, the duration and the nature of the practical functions that must be performed in hospital or extra-hospital courses, including the number of semesters to be validated by speciality, as well as the applicable validation rules are the training model. These models are set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Practical training of medical practitioners is carried out in places of internships or with practitioners known as accredited practitioners-teachers of colleges. In order to accommodate in-houses, these internships and practitioners must be approved, on the one hand, under one or more of the disciplines mentioned in the first paragraph of article R. 632-7, on the other, under one or more of the specialties mentioned in the second paragraph of article R. 632-7.
The terms and conditions for the accreditation of the places of internships and practitioners set out in Article L. 632-5 are determined by order of the ministers responsible for higher education and health.
For disciplines and specialties common to medicine and odontology or medicine and pharmacy, the modalities for the accreditation of internships or internship practitioners are fixed by the Decree No. 2011-957 of 10 August 2011 relating to the long-term third-cycle inter-regional commission of odontological studies and the modalities for the accreditation of internships and the Decree No. 2012-257 of 22 February 2012 relating to the inter-region commission of specialized pharmacy and medical biology studies.
Internships in medicine are trained one or more semesters at accredited internship sites or with accredited practitioners-teachers of university internships, determined for each degree of specialized studies and each degree of complementary specialized studies in training models.
General medical practitioners are trained at least one semester of training in the premises of courses in the CHU licensed under general medical discipline. However, the local coordinator of the specialised degree in general medicine may, after the advice of the Director of the training and research unit, dispense the intern of this course, in the event that the training capacity of the subdivision within which it reports is insufficient.
Interns other than those who receive specialized training in general or common medicine in medicine and odontology carry out their duties for at least two semesters at approved courses of health institutions other than CHU, or with accredited practitioners-teachers from universities. However, the teacher coordinator of the special education degree may, depending on the requirements of the training and the training capacities of the sub-division within the sub-division, limit the duration to one semester.
The practical training provided for in R. 632-15 includes hospital and extra-hospital functions.
The hospital functions are performed in the premises of accredited internships of the university hospital centres (CHU) and other health institutions, which are linked by agreement to these centres.
Extra-hospital functions are carried out either from accredited practitioners-teachers at universities, or at placement sites approved by extra-hospital organizations, research laboratories, health centres or alternative care facilities for hospitalization, bound by a convention at the CHU.
The intern in medicine is placed under the authority of the medical officer of the place of approved internship in which it is assigned or of the accredited teacher-training practitioner of universities.
An order of Ministers responsible for higher education and health specifies the conditions for organizing these courses and the contents of the conventions provided for in the preceding paragraphs.
Each practical training course is subject to validation under conditions established by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
No one can pursue the third cycle of medical studies as long as he has not validated his semesters of training within a period of two times the prescribed duration of the training model, whether it is a training course within the framework of a specialized degree or a complementary specialized degree. However, an exceptional derogation, due to the particular situation of the intern, may be granted by the president of the university after notice of the director of the training and research unit.
Internships at licensed internship sites for their training or with accredited university professors are offered every six months to medical practitioners. The duration of each internship is one semester.
The choice of internals is made by oldness of validated functions for an entire number of semesters. At the same time, the choice is made according to the ranking.
The intern in a state of medically recognized pregnancy, which takes part in the procedure of choice of the internship, may request to carry out the internship. In this case, the validation of the internship is subject to provisions of Article R. 6153-20 of the Public Health Code. Alternatively, it may, by derogation from the provisions of the preceding paragraph, opt for an over-numbered course chosen independently of its ranking. This course cannot be validated regardless of its duration.
The choice of courses is organized within the framework of each subdivision by the Director General of the Regional Health Agency, in accordance with the terms specified by decree of Ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Ministers responsible for higher education and health shall, by order, establish the conditions under which medical officers may be authorized:
1° To carry out semi-annual internships at accredited internship sites or with accredited practitioners-teachers at universities for a different discipline from their assignment discipline;
2° To do internships either on a subdivision other than that in which they were assigned, either abroad or at the School of High Studies in Public Health.
Pursuant to the sixth preambular paragraph of section L. 632-2, medical officers may apply before the end of the fourth semester of boarding school to change discipline on the subdivision in which they are assigned, under the conditions set out in section R. 632-9. This possibility can only be exercised once, and is offered only to the extent that their initial classification rank has located them, in the discipline for which they wish to opt, at least equal to that of the last candidate from the same national classifying tests and assigned to that discipline at the subdivision level.
By derogation from the first paragraph, those who have signed a public service contract pursuant to Article L. 632-6 may request, before the end of the fourth semester of boarding school, to change specialty within the subdivision in which they are assigned and among the specialties offered under the academic year during which they were assigned as interns. This possibility can only be exercised once, and is offered only to the extent that their initial classification rank has placed them at least equal to that of the last candidate from the same national classifying tests, assigned to that speciality at the subdivision level and having signed a public service contract.
The thesis leading to the state degree of doctor in medicine is supported before a jury presided over by a professor of the universities of the medical disciplines and composed of at least four members, including three teachers holding the medical disciplines designated by the president of the university on the proposal of the director of the medical training and research unit (UFR) concerned.
The support of this thesis may intervene, at the earliest, upon the validation of the third semester of training and at the latest, three years after the graduation of specialized studies in France or the title sanctioning the specialized medical training mentioned in article 25 of the European directive referred to in article R. 632-1 and obtained in one of the States mentioned in the same article. If the thesis could not be supported within the time limit, duly justified waivers may be granted by the president of the university on the proposal of the director of the UFR.
As a derogatory, holders of a specialized degree, obtained in accordance with the provisions of section 4 of this chapter, who meet the conditions for enrolling in the third cycle of medical studies, may support their thesis as soon as they are enrolled in this cycle.
The doctor's state diploma in medicine can only be issued to candidates who have successfully supported their thesis and obtained the specialized degree mentioned in article R. 632-24, issued by the universities authorized for this purpose.
Nationals of one of the States mentioned in article R. 632-1, having validated in France the second cycle of medical studies and enrolled in one of these States in a specialized medical training mentioned in article 25 of the European directive mentioned in this same article, may be granted the state diploma of doctor in medicine after having successfully supported their thesis, under the conditions provided for in article R. 632-22, and obtained the title of doctor.
The validation of the third cycle of medical studies is attested by the issuance of a specialized degree, mentioning the qualification obtained.
The final entry to a specialized degree is taken at the earliest of the third validated semester and at the latest at the end of the fourth semester completed after appointment as an intern, after notice of the coordinator mentioned in article R. 632-25.
In order to be able to enrol in the specialized degree of their choice corresponding to their assignment discipline, the medical staff must have validated at least one particular semester of the specialty in an approved internship place or with an accredited university teacher in the course of this degree and be able to meet the requirements of the specialized degree program they choose.
This choice is made according to the rank of the intern in the tests provided for in R. 632-4.
The terms and conditions under which the candidate can choose the degree of specialized studies are determined by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
In each of the interregions, the coordination of teachings and knowledge control of each degree in specialized medical studies and each degree in complementary specialized medical studies is ensured by:
1° The College of Directors of Training and Research Units (UFR) in Interregional Medicine.
For medical biology, this college also includes UFR directors of pharmacy.
2° The Interregional Diploma Coordination Commission.
(a) The Commission is chaired by an interregional coordinator. Article D. 631-4 sets out the terms and conditions for the designation of the teacher responsible for the coordination of the teaching of the degree of specialized medical biology;
(b) The Interregional Diploma Coordination Commission includes local coordinators, who are appointed on each subdivision. They shall, with the assistance of a training department established pursuant to Article L. 713-3 or a particular commission, advise the Director of UFR on the conduct of the studies leading to the diploma concerned. They are teachers of the specialty of the degree of specialized studies or the degree of complementary studies concerned.
The Interregional Diploma Coordination Commission prepares proposals for the organization of teachings and knowledge control of each degree of specialized medical studies and each degree of complementary specialized medical studies. These proposals are forwarded for advice to the College of Directors and submitted to the Council of the relevant training and research units (UFR). Each UFR Medical Council shall deliberate under the conditions set out in section L. 713-4.
The interregional coordinator develops proposals to define the criteria, particularly in terms of supervision and activity, and the terms of reference for the accreditation of the internship premises and the agreement of the persons referred to in Article R. 632-18. After receiving the advice of the Interregional Diploma Coordination Commission, the Interregional Coordinator transmits these proposals to the College of Directors who stop them.
The director of the medical training and research unit concerned and the director general of the regional health agency check each year that the placement sites and accredited practitioners correspond to the number of medical interns to be trained by specialty and subdivision.
The provisions of articles R. 632-25 and R. 632-26 are not applicable to disciplines and specialties common to medicine and odontology. They are also not applicable to medical biology, with the exception of 1° (second and third paragraphs) of Article R. 632-25.
With regard to medical studies, orders of ministers responsible for higher education and health specify the modalities for the application of articles R. 632-25, R. 632-26 and R. 632-27.
With regard to the disciplines and specialties common to medicine and odontology, the decree of 10 August 2011 referred to in article R. 632-16 specifies the terms and conditions for the application of article R. 632-27.
The preparation time, the curriculum of the teachings, the duration and nature of the practical functions as well as the rules of validation of the training are set out in articles D. 631-1 to D. 631-16 for the degree of specialized medical biology and by order for the courses common to medicine and odontology.
A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out the list of complementary specialized degrees of certain medical disciplines or specialties.
These degrees are two types:
1° Group I diplomas, prepared in two years;
2° Group II diplomas, prepared in three years, are entitled to the qualification of a specialist for the title of the diploma.
Training for complementary specialized medical degrees is provided on a full-time basis. It includes theoretical education and practical training in accredited internships or accredited practitioners-teachers from universities under the same conditions as those that apply to training for specialized medical degrees.
For each complementary specialized degree, the preparation time, the curriculum of teachings, the duration and the nature of the practical functions to be performed in hospital or extra-hospital courses, including the number of semesters to be validated by speciality, are the training model. These models are set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The provisions of sections R. 632-14 and R. 632-18 are applicable to complementary specialized diplomas.
In order to be able to register for the preparation of a group II complementary specialized medical degree, the internals must have completed, no later than the end of the fifth semester of the boarding school, a particular semester of the degree.
To obtain a complementary specialized medical degree, candidates must:
1° Be holders of a degree in specialized medical studies giving access to the postulated diploma of complementary specialized studies;
2° Having met the conditions required for the validation of complementary specialized diplomas as set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health;
3° Have completed during the boarding school:
(a) Two semesters of functions, unless duly justified derogation granted by the coordinator, are required for the complementary specialized studies of Group I;
(b) For the complementary specialized degrees of Group II, four semesters of functions.
Diplomas of specialized medical studies as well as diplomas of complementary specialized medical studies are issued by the universities authorized for this purpose by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The list of accredited internship sites and licensed practitioners-teachers of universities for practical training courses in the third cycle of medicine, excluding medical biology and trainings common to medicine and odontology as well as the distribution of interns positions are stopped on each subdivision by the Director General of the regional health agency, after notice of a subdivision commission that formulates its proposals no later than one week before the date of the selection of internal procedures
The Subdivision Committee meeting is preceded by the meeting of a training needs assessment board. This commission is responsible for giving advice to the Director General of the Regional Health Agency on the minimum number of posts to be opened, each semester, by speciality for the internals of each discipline.
The composition of these commissions, the procedure for appointing their members and the duration of their duties shall be determined by order of the Minister of Defence and ministers responsible for health and higher education.
For training courses common to medicine and pharmacy or medicine and odontology, the modalities for the distribution of interns are set by the decrees mentioned in article R. 632-16.
When the choice of internal posts in medicine is made within the interregion Provence-Alpes-Côte d'Azur-Corse and the interregion of the Antilles-Guyane, the responsibilities entrusted by this section to the directors general of the regional health agencies are exercised jointly by the director general of the regional health agency Provence-Alpes-Côte d'Azur and by the director general of the regional health agency
The provisions of sections R. 632-1 to R. 632-36 apply to the internals of the hospitals of the armed forces, except those of section R. 632-14 and subject to the special provisions of this subsection.
In order to obtain the state degree of doctor in medicine provided for in article R. 632-23, the internals of the hospitals of the armed forces that meet the conditions set out in the second paragraph of article R. 632-1 shall carry out the third cycle of medical studies under the conditions fixed by this subsection.
The internals of the hospitals of the armed forces exercise the choice of medical speciality and the university hospital centre (CHU) of connection within the list agreed by the Minister of Defence and the ministers responsible for higher education and health, according to their rank of ranking in the tests referred to in R. 632-4.
The attachment CHU on the list referred to in the first paragraph shall be chosen from among those with which the hospitals of the armed forces are established.
The hospitals of the armies are considered to be part of the boarding division attached to each of the CHU listed above.
Internships of military hospitals and extra-hospital military institutions, approved for the training of medical interns, are for all medical training and research units at universities where the internals of the military hospitals take their annual registration.
The courses provided for in section R. 632-19 are proposed by the directors general of the regional health agency, to which the university hospital centres referred to in section R. 632-39 are located and nominated, every six months, to the internals of the military hospitals by the Minister of Defence.
A teacher, a member of the corps of the armed physicians, designated for this purpose by the Minister of Defence, is responsible for following up the preparation of each intern of the armed hospitals enrolled in the preparation of a specialized medical degree, in connection with the teacher-coordinator referred to in R. 632-25.
Internships with accredited practitioners-teachers of the universities, referred to in article R. 632-18, are carried out by the internals of the armed hospitals in the medical services of the administrative units of the Ministry of Defence.
For the duration of their training, the internals of the military hospitals remain subject to their military status, without prejudice to the disciplinary power of the academic courts under their supervision of their access to the third cycle of medical studies.
The possibility of a change of discipline, provided for in section R. 632-21, is subject to authorization from the Minister of Defence.
The provisions of articles R. 632-37 to R. 632-45 and those relating to the consideration of acquired competences shall apply to assistants of the hospitals of the armed forces, subject to the special provisions of this subsection.
Medical personnel who have been employed for at least three years may, under the conditions set out in this subsection, have access to a postgraduate course of medical studies different from their initial training.
The provisions of Article R. 632-53 shall not apply to them.
A competition from the armies' hospitals is organized annually in each of the disciplines that meet the needs of the armies.
A decree of the Minister of Defence and Ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out the composition of the jury, the nature, duration and the respective coefficients of the examinations.
The number of positions offered at the aid examinations of the hospitals of the armies as well as their distribution by speciality and by university hospital centre (CHU) of connection are fixed annually by decree of the ministers mentioned in article R. 632-48. These posts are in addition to those open for election under articles R. 632-9 and R. 632-39.
Candidates received from these contests shall, according to their ranks, choose the CHU mentioned in the first paragraph of this article under conditions fixed by decree of the ministers mentioned in article R. 632-48.
In the Caribbean-Guyane interregion, the functions entrusted to the Director General of the Regional Health Agency by articles R. 632-9 and R. 632-19 are carried out jointly by the Directors General of the Regional Health Agencies of Guyane and Martinique and the Agency of Guadeloupe, Saint-Barthélemy and Saint-Martin.
For the purposes of the provisions set out in the last paragraph of section R. 632-20, general medical officers may perform internships in the Caribbean-Guyane interregion and in the Indian Ocean Subdivision. The duration of the internships may not be less than two semesters.
For the purposes of these provisions, interns other than general medicine may perform internships in this interregion and subdivision. The duration of the internships may not be more than two semesters.
For the Subdivision of the Caribbean-Guyane Interregion and the Subdivision of the Indian Ocean, the composition of the Subdivision Committee provided for in Article R. 632-35 is determined by order of Ministers responsible for higher education, health and overseas.
French doctors or nationals of another Member State of the European Union, another State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra may, pursuant to the 2nd of Article L. 632-12, access the third cycle of medical studies:
1° After having successfully undergone the tests of a special competition called a European boarding competition, covering the same programme as that defined in article R. 632-4;
2° After successfully completing the examinations of a special examination of access to the degree of specialized study of work medicine whose program is different from that defined in article R. 632-4.
Applicants to the contests mentioned in article R. 632-53 make known before the competitions the choice of the specialized medical degree they wish to prepare. In the event of failure, they can only once again compete for the same degree in specialized studies or for another degree in specialized studies.
Organizational and registration procedures, the program, the course, the nature, the weighting of the tests and the assignment procedures are determined by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The number of competitive positions and their distribution by speciality and by university hospital centre are determined annually by decree of these ministers.
Internals in medicine appointed pursuant to this subsection are subject to the educational provisions set out in this section.
Accepted candidates are subject to the same provisions as those applicable to other internal staff.
It is taken into account the skills acquired and the already completed post-graduate functions as well as the training already carried out in the context of ongoing medical training according to the rules established by the councils of the inter-region medical training and research units, after approval by university presidents.
For the duration of their practical training, the provisions of the third paragraph of this section shall be deemed to have an increase in the number of semesters admitted in equivalence.
A national medical boarding competition is organized each year, by discipline, abroad. This competition is open to foreign candidates other than nationals of the Member States of the European Union, other States parties to the agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra and holders of a doctor's degree allowing them to practise in the country of origin or the country of issue.
However, the holders of an interuniversity specialization diploma issued by France or an equivalent title issued by another Member State of the European Union, the Principality of Andorra, another State Party to the European Economic Area or the Swiss Confederation are not allowed to register for this contest.
No candidate for the competition under this section may compete for more than two years. The contests organized under section R. 632-8 to which a candidate has presented himself, if any, are taken into account in assessing the rights to compete.
Candidates make known, upon registration, the discipline and medical specialty for which they compete.
The Director General of the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management Personnel of the Hospital Public Service Decree No. 2007-704 of 4 May 2007 the organization and operation of the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Hospitaller Public Service Staff and amending the Public Health Code (regulatory part):
1° Assure the organisation and the course of the competition tests;
2° Implement the national procedure for selecting the subdivision, discipline and medical specialty.
An order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health shall, each year, establish the number of positions offered to the contest and their distribution by discipline and specialty for each of the subdivisions referred to in section R. 632-3. The Ile-de-France region is considered a third-cycle interregion and a boarding division for the purposes of this section.
However, within the limits of the positions offered, only candidates whose grade is at least equal to the minimum grade set by the jury may be declared to the contest.
The jury of the contest consists of sections corresponding to each of the medical disciplines in which positions are open to the contest.
The jury shall establish, by discipline and by speciality, a classification of candidates admitted, within the limits of the number of positions offered under section R. 632-58. However, where the number of candidates admitted is less than the number of positions offered in a discipline, the jury may, within half of the positions offered under this discipline, defer positions not filled to one or more other disciplines.
An Order of Ministers for Higher Education and Health and the Minister for Foreign Affairs sets out the rules for organizing the competition, including the list of disciplines or for which positions are open the terms of registration, programs, duration, nature and rating of the examinations, the composition and operation of the jury.
Following the proclamation of the results, the classified candidates make known, in order of preference, the choice of interregions and boarding divisions in medicine where they wish to be assigned as well as university hospital centres to which they wish to be attached.
A national procedure allows candidates to be assigned to the contest in the inter-regions, depending on their rank of ranking in the discipline and specialty for which they registered, and in accordance with the distribution of the positions fixed by the order set out in article R. 632-58.
Once the operations are carried out in the preceding paragraphs, the directors general of the regional health agencies shall distribute and affect the internals on the boarding subdivisions referred to in article R. 632-3, according to the wishes expressed by the concerned, their ranking in the discipline and specialty and available positions.
The medical staff recruited under this section shall choose their position in the approved internship sites for the training of interns in accordance with the terms set out in the first, third, fourth and sixth paragraphs of R. 632-9 and R. 632-19. Having been equal with that of the internals from the competitions organized under articles R. 632-1 to R. 632-36 and R. 632-53 to R. 632-55, this choice comes after that of the internals from these competitions.
During the course of the medical boarding school, staff recruited under this section receive full-time training and prepare the specialized degree for which they enrolled in the competition. They take a university registration to one of the training and research units of the subdivision where they are assigned.
The provisions of the first, third, fourth and sixth preambular paragraphs of R. 632-9 and R. 632-12, R. 632-13, R. 632-15 to R. 632-20 and R. 632-22 to R. 632-36 apply to medical interns recruited under this section.
Internals appointed pursuant to this section may not, as a result of this appointment, be eligible for the issuance of a doctor's degree in medicine.
Former medical officers who have completed their internship under the conditions set out in this section may be admitted to applying for a complementary specialized medical degree under the conditions set out in R. 632-33. The provisions of Article R. 632-40 are then applicable to them.
Foreign military doctors other than nationals of the Member States of the European Union, the Principality of Andorra, the States parties to the agreement on the European Economic Area or the Swiss Confederation may, after undergoing the examinations of the aid of the hospitals of the armies organized pursuant to Article R. 632-48, access to the preparation of a diploma of specialized medical studies.
The number of foreign positions offered at the aid of the military hospitals is fixed each year by specialised degree or grouping of specialised studies diplomas and by university hospital center of connection by decree of the Minister of Defence and ministers responsible for higher education and health, according to the needs expressed by the States of membership of the candidates. These positions come in addition to those opened under the competition under section R. 632-56 and those opened under section R. 632-49.
The contract of public service undertaking referred to in Article L. 632-6 is open, under the conditions specified in Articles R. 632-67 to R. 632-74 and Articles 4 to 10 and 12 of Decree No. 2010-735 of 29 June 2010 relating to the contract of public service undertaking during medical studies:
1° Students who are admitted to continuing medical studies following the completion of the first year or later classification tests during these studies;
2° Internals under section 3 of this chapter.
For each academic year, the Order of Ministers for Health and Social Security mentioned in the first paragraph of Article L. 632-6 is published in the Official Journal of the French Republic by 30 June. This order is countersigned by the minister responsible for higher education.
For each medical training and research unit, this order determines the number of students and the number of interns who can sign a public service contract in the year with the national management centre mentioned in theArticle 116 of Act No. 86-33 of 9 January 1986 with statutory provisions relating to the hospital public service.
Contracts not entered into on a date fixed annually by this Order may be relocated between medical training and research units, by order of Ministers responsible for health and social security. This order is countersigned by the minister responsible for higher education.
In each medical training and research unit, a selection commission for candidates for a public service contract, chaired by the unit director or his representative, includes:
1° The Director General of the Regional Health Agency or his representative;
2° The president of the Regional Council for the Order of Physicians or his representative;
3° The president of the regional union of competent health professionals for the liberal doctors or his representative;
4° A director of a public health institution in the region designated by the Hospital Federation of France;
5° An intern in medicine designated by the director of the unit on the proposal of representative trade union organizations;
6° A medical student appointed by the director of the unit on the proposal of representative trade union organizations.
The commission referred to in section R. 632-68 shall, each academic year, elect students and interns who have made an application for the signing of a public service contract with the director of the medical training and research unit to which they fall, by reference to the order mentioned in section R. 632-67 and by the filing of a file with a cover letter. Its members are bound to respect the confidentiality of the information provided in this procedure.
The commission referred to in article R. 632-68 proceeds with a first case review. Applicants selected after this examination are convened for an individual interview to assess their professional project.
The Commission shall decide on the basis of academic results and professional projects. According to these criteria, it ranks students and interns in two separate lists, each with a main list and a supplementary list, with a maximum number of enrollers three times the number of contracts opened for the academic year for the medical training and research unit (UFR). These lists are communicated to the National Management Centre referred to in R. 632-67 and posted by the Director of the UFR of Medicine no later than 30 November. They are valid during the academic year for which they were established.
An Order of Ministers for Health and Higher Education specifies the composition of the application file and the procedural rules referred to in Articles R. 632-69 and R. 632-70.
At each academic year, the Director of the Medical Training and Research Unit, who is dependent on the student or the intern signatory of a public service contract, declares his administrative registration to the national management centre referred to in R. 632-67.
At the end of the studies, the date of graduation of the specialized degree in medicine prepared is communicated by the Director of the medical training and research unit at the national management centre referred to in R. 632-67. Payment of the allowance ceases and the professional exercise is considered to be beginning from that same date.
Upon graduation from a specialized medical degree, by derogation from the provisions of section R. 632-73, the Director General of the Regional Health Agency may, after a reasoned opinion of the Director of the Medical Training and Research Unit, grant the intern a postponement of the installation or taking of functions when the application is justified by the applicant's professional or academic project. Any deferral granted extends the public service contract of a duration equivalent to that of the deferral. The Director General of the Regional Health Agency shall inform the National Management Centre referred to in R. 632-67 of its decision.
Ministers in charge of higher education and health shall, by order, establish a list of complementary specialization diplomas in medicine that do not lead to the exclusive exercise of the specialty and that may obtain doctors authorized to practise in the national territory when they justify a period of professional exercise corresponding to the duration of the training leading to the specialized degree in which they exercise.
A decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education determines each year, for each region, and by speciality, in view of the needs of the population, the maximum number of complementary specialized diplomas mentioned in article R. 632-75 that may be issued by recognition of the professional experience.
The application for the issuance of a complementary specialized degree by validation of the professional experience shall be filed, before 1 March of each year, by any means, including electronic, to determine the date of sending or deposit, to the designated university, in each of the interregions referred to in Article R. 632-3, by order of the ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Each candidate may only apply to the university referred to in the first paragraph of this section, designated for the region in which he or she exercises.
The application file mentions the degree to which the grant is requested and, where applicable, the option of this degree, the qualifications, knowledge and abilities of the candidate.
It includes any documents that report on its experience, the domain and the duration of its professional activity, the certificates for the training and the copy of the diplomas obtained or the corresponding certificates.
Orders of Ministers for Higher Education and Health designate members of the jury to consider applications. Juries are appointed for a period of three years, for each specialized medical degree, to the university mentioned in article R. 632-77.
Each jury includes members and alternates in equal numbers, appointed as follows:
1° On the proposal of the College of Directors of the Inter-region Medical Training and Research Units, three members of the staff of teachers and hospital staff of the hospital and university centres (CHU) and three alternates;
2° On the proposal of the National Council for the Order of Physicians:
(a) A doctor justifying a title or diploma from the relevant specialized training and an alternate;
(b) Three representatives of the Medical Order Council, including one member of one of the CHU's teachers and hospital staff and three alternates.
The jury chair is provided by the interregional professor coordinator of the diploma, who has a leading voice in the event of a vote-sharing.
In the event of an incapacity, the President shall be replaced by one of the local coordinators of the specialty referred to in R. 632-25, designated by the President of the University of the Interregion referred to in R. 632-77. A member of the prevented jury is replaced for the entire session by an alternate.
A member of the jury, holder or alternate, who, during his term of office, dies, resigns or loses the quality for which he has been designated, shall be replaced, for the duration of the remaining term, by a person designated under the same conditions.
Each jury meets on the convocation of its president, provoked in the light of the files filed with him.
He examines all files received before March 1 of each year and, on this basis, determines the list of candidates he is hearing.
Within the limits of the number of diplomas that may be issued pursuant to the decrees referred to in R. 632-76, he shall, by 31 December of each year, determine the list of candidates whose professional experience he validates.
Diplomas are issued by the president of the university mentioned in article R. 632-77.
This section does not include provisions made by decree
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
Can access the third specialised cycle of pharmaceutical studies, with a view to obtaining a specialized degree of study, subject to successful examinations of a national pharmacy internship competition:
1° Students who have validated the first five years of pharmaceutical studies in France;
2° Nationals of a Member State of the European Union or of another State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra, having validated a pharmacist's training as defined in 2 and 3 of Article 44 of Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 7 September 2005 on recognition of professional qualifications.
A scientific pharmacy council, placed with the minister responsible for higher education, prepares and verifies subjects that may be subject to the examination of the boarding school contest referred to in section D. 633-1. It is composed of eight members, selected from the university professors under the group of pharmaceutical disciplines of the National Council of Universities for Medical, Odonological and Pharmaceutical disciplines and appointed by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health. He designates a president and a secretary general.
The Chair designates experts to propose these topics to the Scientific Council.
The subjects of the trials are drawn by lot by the president of the scientific council in pharmacy, from a bank of subjects constituted by this council.
A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health specifies the modalities of operation of the scientific council in pharmacy.
A decree of the ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out the program, the organisation and registration procedures, the course, nature and weighting of the trials of the pharmacy boarding competition, and the rules of the jury's organization composed of professors who are holders of the pharmaceutical disciplines of the National Council of Universities for medical, odontological and pharmaceutical disciplines.
The third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies is organized in geographical districts called "inter-regions" whose list is defined by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
The number of positions placed in the pharmacy boarding school, as well as their distribution by specialty, inter-region and university hospital centre, are set annually by order of ministers responsible for health and higher education, taking into account the needs and capacities of training.
The pharmacy boarding competition is organized at the national level by the Director General of the National Centre for Hospital Practitioners and Management of the Hospital Public Service.
An order setting the opening of the tests is taken annually by the Minister for Health.
Candidates may compete for two years between the three years following the one in which they have successfully undergone the tests sanctioning either the fourth year of pharmaceutical studies in France, or the training of pharmacist mentioned in the third paragraph of article D. 633-1.
However, in the event of a failure to participate in the trials resulting from maternity, paternity, adoption or individual or collective force majeure, or because of a duly justified medical reason, the period during which the right to compete may be exercised is extended by the duration necessary to preserve the right of candidates.
A candidate received at the pharmacy boarding competition may only be appointed in-house if he has fully validated the hospital-university year provided for in Article L. 633-2.
At the end of the pharmacy boarding competition, the national procedure for the choice of specialty, interregion and university hospital centre (CHU) is organized by the Director General of the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management of the Hospital Public Service.
The winners are asked to make their choices, according to their ranks and within the limits of the number of positions open to the competition, under conditions set by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
At the end of the national selection process, the list of recipients, including assignments in a specialty, inter-region and a related CHU, is published by order of the Director General of the National Centre for Hospital Practitioners Management and Hospital Public Service Management.
The intern having obtained a first assignment and wishing to receive a second choice of assignment must have exercised his duties in the discipline acquired after the first choice. In order to be registered for a second time in the competition, the interne, in writing, before the end of the first semester of functions, has its training and research unit (UFR), its attachment CHU and the regional health agency, which it notes its intention to renounce the benefit of the first competition. The results obtained during the second attempt were then substituted for those obtained during the first and in no case the intern could continue its duties as part of its first assignment.
The internal functions validated as a result of a previous competition are taken into account, in the event of a successful new competition, according to the terms set by the UFR councils.
Diplomas of specialized studies of the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies are issued by universities authorized for this purpose by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The list of specialized diplomas in the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies is set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The specialized medical biology degree is governed by articles D. 631-1 to D. 631-16.
Students, appointed internally after the examinations of the contest provided for in Article D. 633-6, take an annual administrative registration with the university bound by agreement with their university hospital center of connection. They report to the university for their educational training, whose terms are defined by the pharmacy training and research unit and approved by the university president.
The pharmacy internals receive full-time theoretical and practical training. A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out, for each specialised degree, the duration of studies, the curriculum of teachings, the duration and nature of the practical functions that are carried out in hospital or extra-hospital services, as well as the applicable validation rules.
The preparation of each specialized degree is placed, in each interregion, under the responsibility of a teacher-researcher to coordinate the organization of theoretical teaching and practical training. This co-ordinator is designated, for a period of three years renewable once, by the directors of the inter-region pharmacy training and research unit.
During the course of their training, pharmacy workers can benefit from a research year whose organizational terms are fixed by order of ministers responsible for the budget, higher education and health. A decree of these ministers sets out the number of positions offered each year.
The research year is allocated taking into account the quality of the research project of the intern.
During the research year, the pharmacy internals remain subject to their applicable status.
Internships carried out during the research year are not taken into account in the practical training obligations provided for obtaining the specialized degree or the complementary specialized degree.
Interns in pharmacy carry out their practical training in accredited training places, according to the terms provided by the Decree No. 2012-257 of 22 February 2012 relating to the inter-region commission of specialized pharmaceutical studies and medical biology, in university hospital centres and other health institutions, extra-hospital organizations and research laboratories, bound by convention to these centres.
Internships, lasting one semester, are offered every six months at the choice of pharmacy interns. Internals choose by length of validated functions for an entire number of semesters. At the same time, the choice is made according to the ranking in the competition.
The Director-General of the regional health agency in which the internal health agency is responsible shall carry out the semi-annual assignments under the conditions established by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
The industrial laboratories and laboratories approved for the research year are excluded from this distribution. The list of positions actually accessible to internals for a semi-annual internship is determined based on the predictable number of interns to choose, deducted from those who, performing an internship in an industrial laboratory or a research year, warned the competent authorities at least two months in advance.
Interns in pharmacy may, in accordance with the terms set by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health, carry out, subject to the agreement of the relevant academic and hospital authorities, three semesters of training in an approved internship place of another interregion or abroad. The number of internships abroad cannot exceed two.
Internships in industrial laboratories are offered at the choice of internals of all interregions. They must obtain the written agreement of the internship manager prior to the selection operations. They may, upon request, perform two consecutive semesters in the same industrial laboratory.
No one can pursue the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies as soon as he has not validated his semesters of training within a time limit corresponding to twice the regulatory duration provided by the model of the postulated specialized degree. However, an exceptional derogation, due to the particular situation of the intern, may be granted by the president of the university after notice of the director of the training and research unit.
The intern in pharmacy in medically recognized pregnancy, which takes part in the procedure of choice of the internship, may request to carry out the internship. In this case, the validation of the internship is subject to provisions of Article R. 6153-20 of the Public Health Code.
Alternatively, the intern may, by derogation from the provisions of the preceding paragraph, opt for an over-numbered internship chosen independently of its ranking. This course cannot be validated, regardless of its duration.
Internal staff members who have interrupted their training and have resumed their training for more than two months after a semi-annual selection of posts are in the choice following their reappointment and are, in the meantime, overcrowded on an approved position in their interregion.
Any pharmacy officer enrolled in a specialized degree may, before the end of the fourth semester of boarding school, request a change of direction in the interregion where he was assigned. He can then only enrol at a specialized degree to which his ranking in the boarding school competition would have allowed him to access his initial choice.
The applicant shall file a request for a change of direction with the Director General of the Regional Health Agency, to which he or she reports, at least two months before the date of selection of the positions.
This possibility of change can only be exercised once.
During the change of direction, the internships already carried out within the context of the first assignment may be validated under the new training chosen according to the terms fixed by the advice of the relevant pharmacy training and research units, on the proposal of the teacher coordinator of the specialized degree to which the intern is enrolled. The intern is then deemed to have an increased seniority in the number of semesters validated.
The specialized pharmacy degree is issued to internals with:
1° Perform the total length of boarding;
2° Satisfies the control of theoretical knowledge;
3° Completion and validation of practical training;
4° Supported, starting in the fifth semester of boarding school, a jury composed of at least four members appointed by the university president on the proposal of the directors of the pharmaceutical training and research units (UFR) of the interregion. This jury includes at least two professors who hold the group of pharmaceutical disciplines of the National Council of Universities for medical, odontological and pharmaceutical disciplines belonging to different pharmacy UFRs and two members who do not perform their duties in a pharmacy UFR, including at least one pharmacist hospital practitioner or a resident pharmacist.
The list of complementary specialist pharmacy degrees is set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
For each complementary specialized degree, the preparation time, the curriculum of the teachings, the duration and the nature of the practical functions, including the number of semesters to be validated by specialty as well as the list of specialized degrees to be accessed are the training model. These models are set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Training for complementary specialized pharmacy degrees is provided on a full-time basis. It consists of theoretical education and practical training carried out in places of internship approved under the same conditions as those that apply to training for specialized degrees.
The provisions of Article D. 633-13 are applicable to complementary specialized diplomas.
In order to be able to register for the preparation of a complementary specialized pharmacy degree, the former internals must:
1° Be holders of a specialised degree giving access to the postulated specialised degree;
2° Have performed four semesters of duties at accredited internship sites for the preparation of the complementary specialized degree, including two in the course of the boarding school, with the exception granted by the diploma coordinator;
3° Having met all the conditions set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The pharmacists of the armed forces have access to the preparation of a specialized pharmacy degree in the conditions set out in articles R. 633-24 to R. 633-27, after having successfully undergone the examinations of the aid of the military hospitals.
The pharmacists of the armed forces who have engaged in their work for at least three years may, under the conditions set out in articles R. 633-25 to R. 633-27, have access to a postgraduate training in pharmaceutical studies different from their initial training.
A competition from the armies' hospitals is organized annually in each of the disciplines that meet the needs of the armies.
A decree of the Minister of Defence and Ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out the composition of the jury, the nature, duration and the respective coefficients of the competition.
The number of positions offered at the aid examinations of the military hospitals and their distribution by speciality and by connecting university are set annually by decree of ministers responsible for defence, higher education and health. These positions are in addition to those opened under section L. 633-3.
Candidates received from this competition choose, according to their ranking, their university of connection, under conditions fixed by order of the Minister of Defence and ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Candidates appointed assistants at the end of this competition are subject to the provisions of sections D. 633-9 to D. 633-16, with the exception of article D. 633-13, articles D. 633-19, D. 633-20 to D. 633-22 and D. 633-23 to D. 633-31 of this Code as well as to theArticle R. 6153-45 of the Public Health Code. The provisions of Articles R. 633-35 to R. 633-39, R. 633-17 and R. 633-18 of this Code shall not apply to them.
Foreign military pharmacists other than nationals of the Member States of the European Union, another State party to the agreement on the European Economic Area, the Principality of Andorra or the Swiss Confederation can access the preparation of a specialised degree of study, after having undergone the examinations of the aid of the hospitals of the armed forces organized under articles R. 633-24 to R. 633-27.
The number of foreign positions offered at the aid of the military hospitals is fixed annually, by diploma of specialized studies or grouping of specialized diplomas and by university of connection, by decree of the Minister of Defence and ministers responsible for higher education and health according to the needs expressed by the States of membership of the candidates.
For the duration of their training, the assistants of the military hospitals remain subject to their military status, without prejudice to the disciplinary power of the academic courts under their supervision of their access to the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies.
Internships under section D. 633-15 are proposed by the Director General of the Regional Health Agency, each of which is administered by the universities and appointed by the Minister of Defence every six months to the Assistants of the Armed Hospitals.
A teacher, a member of the armed pharmacists' body, is responsible for following up the preparation of each assistant in the armed hospitals enrolled in the preparation of a specialized pharmacy degree, in conjunction with the teacher-coordinator mentioned in article D. 633-12.
For the purposes of the fourth paragraph of Article D. 633-15, the courses completed before 5 February 2012 are taken into account.
Interregional coordinators serving on 5 February 2012 complete the mandate for which they were appointed. Their mandate may be renewed, if any, under the conditions of Article D. 633-12.
Orders taken under articles D. 633-1 to D. 633-16, D. 633-19 to D. 633-23 and D. 633-29 to D. 633-33 are published in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
French pharmacists or nationals of another Member State of the European Union or another State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area as well as Swiss and Andorran pharmacists, holders of a diploma that opens up the right to the exercise of the pharmacy, can access one of the courses of the third specialized cycle of pharmaceutical studies, different from their initial training, if they have satisfied the tests of a special contest called "European internship competition".
Candidates in this competition justify at least three years of professional activity as a pharmacist in one of the States mentioned in the first paragraph of this article.
The provisions of articles D. 633-2, D. 633-3 and D. 633-8 are applicable to the competition of the pharmacy boarding school in European capacity.
The European boarding competition is organized by the Director General of the National Centre for Hospital Practitioners and Management of the Hospital Public Service.
An order setting the opening of the tests is taken annually by the Minister for Health.
Candidates can compete twice in this contest.
The number of positions placed in support of the pharmacy boarding school in a European capacity as well as their distribution by speciality, by interregion and by university hospital centre are set annually by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
Applicants appointed internally at the end of this competition are subject to the provisions of sections D. 633-9 to D. 633-22 of this Code and to articles R. 6153-41 to R. 6153-44 of the Public Health Code. The provisions of Articles R. 633-17 and R. 633-18 of this Code shall not apply to them.
During the course of the post-graduate training, it is taken into account the skills acquired, the already completed post-graduate functions, and the training already carried out in the context of ongoing pharmaceutical training by the internal staff, in accordance with the terms determined by the pharmacy training and research unit that is internally dependent and approved by the university president. Internals who benefit from a reduction in the duration of their training are deemed to have an increase in the number of semesters taken into account.
A foreign pharmacy boarding contest is organized each year. This competition, known as "foreign boarding", is open to foreigners other than nationals of member states of the European Union, another State party to the agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra, holders of a pharmacist's degree allowing the exercise of the pharmacy in the country of obtaining or origin.
Candidates can present themselves twice to the foreign pharmacy boarding competition. The candidate's presentation(s) at the competition sessions organized under sections D. 633-1 to D. 633-7 are, if applicable, taken into account in the assessment of the rights to be used.
The foreign pharmacy boarding competition is organized by the Director General of the National Hospital Practitioners Management Centre and the management staff of the hospital public service.
An Order of Ministers for Higher Education and Health sets out, each year, the number of positions offered to the competition and their distribution, by degree of specialized studies, interregion and university hospital center.
Section D. 633-3 is applicable to the foreign pharmacy boarding competition.
A Minister's Order for Health and Higher Education specifies the specific documents on the registration file.
After the publication of the results of the foreign pharmacy internship competition by the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management Personnel of the Hospital Public Service, the listed candidates communicate in writing to this centre the list, in a preferential order, of the interregions, specialties and university hospitable centres that they wish to choose.
Depending on their classification status and given the possibility of hosting in each interregion and specialty, the internals are assigned, according to their wishes and in accordance with the distribution of the positions fixed by the order set out in R. 633-42.
The National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Hospitaller Public Service Executives informs each individual of their assignment.
The ranking rank obtained by the candidate at the end of the tests is also taken into account for the selection of courses. The pharmacy internals recruited under this subsection are interclassified with the internals resulting from the examinations conducted pursuant to articles D. 633-1 to D. 633-7 and R. 633-35 to R. 633-39 and without the chosen internship being removed from the open choice to the internals then classified. However, there may not be more than one intern appointed pursuant to the provisions of this subsection in the same approved place of probation.
The provisions set out in sections D. 633-9 to D. 633-16, with the exception of section D. 633-13, sections D. 633-19, D. 633-20 to D. 633-22 and D. 633-23 to D. 633-31 of this Code and to D. 633-31 of this Code articles R. 6153-41 to R. 6153-44 of the Public Health Code are applicable to internal staff recruited under this subsection.
Internals appointed pursuant to this subsection shall not be entitled to the issuance of a doctor's state diploma in pharmacy.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
Can access the long third cycle of odontological studies, with a view to qualifying training, subject to successful examinations of a national competition for boarding in odontology:
1° Students who have validated the second cycle of odontological studies in France;
2° Nationals of a Member State of the European Union or another State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, the Swiss Confederation or the Principality of Andorra having validated a basic training of dental practitioner as defined in 2 and 3 of Article 34 of Directive 2005/36/EC of the European Parliament and the Council of 7 September 2005 on the recognition of professional qualifications.
A scientific council for studies in odontology, placed with the minister responsible for higher education, prepares and verifies subjects that may be subject to the examinations of the boarding competitions referred to in sections R. 634-1 and R. 634-19. It is composed of eight members, chosen from among teachers and hospital staff who hold hospital and university centres and appointed by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health. He designates a president and a secretary general.
The Chair designates experts to propose these topics to the Scientific Council.
The subjects of the tests are drawn by lot by the president of the scientific council in odontology, from a bank of subjects constituted by this council.
A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health specifies the modalities for the functioning of the scientific council in odontology.
A decree of the ministers responsible for health and higher education sets out the program, the organisation and registration procedures, the course, nature, the weighting of the tests and the rules of organisation of the jury composed of professors from the universities-patients and lecturers of the hospitals-practice universities under the group of odontological disciplines of the National Council of Universities for medical, odontological and pharmaceutical disciplines.
The long third cycle of odontological studies is organized in geographical districts called "interregions" whose list is defined by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
The number of competitive positions and their distribution by speciality, inter-region and university hospital centres are set annually by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education, taking into account the needs and capacities of training.
The odontology boarding competition is organized at the national level by the Director General of the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management of the Hospital Public Service.
An order setting the opening of the tests is taken annually by the Minister for Health.
Students can attend the boarding competition twice:
1° The first time in the academic year after which they meet the conditions set out in article R. 634-1;
2° The second time in the following academic year.
However, in the event of an incapacity to participate in the trials resulting from maternity, paternity, adoption, individual or collective force majeure or for duly justified medical reasons, the period during which the right to compete may be exercised is extended by the duration necessary to preserve the right of candidates.
At the end of the competition, the national procedure for the choice of specialty, inter-region and the university hospital centre of connection is organized by the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management Personnel of the Hospital Public Service.
The winners are asked to make their choices, according to their ranks and within the limits of the number of positions open to the competition, under conditions set by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
At the end of the national selection process, the list of recipients, including assignments in a specialty, inter-region and a university referral hospital, is published by order of the Director General of the National Centre for Hospital Practitioners Management and Management of the Hospital Public Service.
A candidate may waive the contest. It shall inform the National Management Centre, in writing, within fifteen days of notification of its assignment. On this condition, he retains the right to run for a second time in the competition.
The list of qualifying courses of the long third cycle of odontological studies is determined by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health. Some courses may be common to medicine and odontology.
Students appointed internally after the examinations of the contest provided for in Article R. 634-6 take an annual administrative registration with the university bound by agreement with their university hospital center of connection. They report to the university for their educational training, the terms of which are determined by the board of directors of the university, on the proposal of the board of studies and university life and after advice from the board of the training and research unit of odontology.
Internals receive full-time theoretical and practical training. A decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health sets out, for each qualifying training, the duration of the studies, the curriculum of the teachings, the duration and nature of the practical functions that are carried out during hospital or extra-hospital courses and the applicable validation rules.
For each qualifying training, the organization of theoretical teachings and practical training is placed, in each interregion, under the responsibility of a co-ordinating teacher, designated for a period of four years by the directors of the inter-region odontology training and research unit (UFR).
For courses common to medicine and odontology, the co-ordinating teacher is designated by UFR's directors of medicine and odontology in the interregion. This responsibility is provided alternatively by a UFR medical teacher and a UFR odontology teacher.
During the course of their training, Odontology internals can benefit from a year-research whose organizational terms are fixed by decree of ministers responsible for budget, higher education and health. A decree of these ministers sets out the number of positions offered each year. The research year is allocated taking into account the quality of the research project of the intern.
During the search year, the internals in odontology remain subject to the applicable status.
Internships carried out during the research year are not taken into account in the practical training obligations provided for obtaining the degree applied in the internship.
Internal staff are engaged in practical training in accredited internships in university hospital centres and health institutions linked by agreement with their university-based hospital centre, in accordance with the terms provided by decree. They can also perform part of this training with an accredited teacher-training practitioner. They are placed under the authority of the medical officer or the licensed practitioner-teacher of the internship site where they are assigned.
Internships, lasting one semester, are offered every six months at the choice of interns. Internals choose by age of validated functions for an entire number of semesters; to equal length, the choice is made according to the ranking in the competition.
The Director General of the Regional Health Agency shall carry out the biannual assignments under the conditions established by decree of Ministers responsible for health and higher education.
Internals in odontology may, in accordance with the terms set by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health, carry out, subject to the agreement of the relevant academic and hospital authorities, semesters of training at an approved internship site of another interregion or abroad, within three semesters.
No one can pursue the long third cycle of odontological studies as long as he has not validated his semesters of training within a period of two times the prescribed duration of the post-graduate model. However, an exceptional derogation, due to the particular situation of the intern, may be granted by the president of the university after notice of the director of the training and research unit.
Internals who have validated the whole of the theoretical and practical training obtain, at the end of their boarding school, a specialized degree corresponding to the training followed.
This degree is issued by universities empowered to do so by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
For the internals who have completed the second cycle of studies in France, the thesis leading to the state diploma of doctor in dental surgery is supported before a jury appointed by the university president on the proposal of the director of the training and research unit. This jury includes at least four members:
1° A professor at universities-practor hospital in dental care, teaching and research centres, president;
2° Three other members, at least two of whom are teachers and hospital staff with dental care, education and research centres; one of these members may be a university hospital assistant.
The thesis can be supported after validation of the second semester in the internal functions and until the end of the calendar year following that during which they obtain their degree in specialized studies.
The issuance of a doctor's degree in dental surgery can only take place at the end of the total validation of the long third cycle, together with the degree of specialized studies obtained.
French practitioners or nationals of another Member State of the European Union or another State Party to the Agreement on the European Economic Area, as well as Swiss or Andorran practitioners, who have a degree to be eligible for the exercise of dental surgery, can access the long third cycle of odontological studies after having met the tests of a special competition called "European internship competition".
In order to be able to compete, candidates must justify at least three years of professional activity as a surgeon-dentist in one of the States mentioned in the first paragraph of this article.
The provisions of articles R. 634-2, R. 634-3, R. 634-4 and R. 634-8 are applicable to the boarding competition on a European basis.
The competition is organized by the National Centre for the Management of Hospital Practitioners and Management Personnel of the Hospital Public Service. An order of the Minister for Health sets the date of the opening of the tests.
Candidates can compete twice in this contest.
The number of positions placed in the boarding school in a European capacity as well as their distribution by speciality, by inter-region and by university-based hospital-houses are determined by decree of ministers responsible for health and higher education.
Interns appointed at the end of the European boarding competition are subject to the educational provisions set out in this subsection and to all provisions applicable to interns in odontology.
It is taken into account the skills acquired, the post-graduate functions already completed, and the training already carried out in the context of ongoing odontological training, in accordance with the terms determined by the Board of Directors of the University, on the proposal of the Board of Studies and University Life and after advice from the board of the training and odontology research unit.
For the duration of their practical training, the provisions of the second paragraph of this section shall be deemed to have an increase in the number of semesters admitted in equivalence.
Orders made pursuant to this subsection are published in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
Students appointed internally prior to the year 2011-2012 continue their training, as part of the plan set out in sections R. 634-25 to R. 634-31, for the certification of in-depth studies in dental surgery.
No one can continue his or her studies for the certification of in-depth studies in dental surgery as he has not validated his or her semesters within six years.
The training of interns in odontology includes:
1° A theoretical education organized, dispensed and controlled by the training and research units (UFR) of odontology, according to the modalities defined by the board of directors of the university on the proposal of the board of studies and academic life and after advice from the council of the UFR of odontology. This teaching can be common to several UFR of odontology;
2° Clinical training, provided in the odontology services of dental care, teaching and research centres or in the odontology services of health facilities, linked by convention to a university hospital in application of theArticle L. 6142-5 of the Public Health Code and approved as trainers by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health, after the advice of a national commission of approval. The role and composition of the commission are defined by decree of these ministers.
The list of trainers, the number and distribution of positions in these services are determined annually by order of the same ministers, after notice of the accreditation committee mentioned above.
The clinical training referred to in the 2nd of Article R. 634-25 consists of six hospital courses of one semester each during which the interns in odontology receive in-depth training corresponding to the various clinical orientations defined by decree of the ministers responsible for higher education and health.
These internships are conducted under the authority of the head of the activity centre in which the intern is affected.
At the end of each semester, the head of activity centre that hosted an intern in odontology communicates its appreciation to the director general of the assignment institution, to the director general of the university hospital center of connection and to the director of the training and research unit where the intern is registered.
If this assessment is not favourable, the semester carried out by the intern is not validated.
Internals in odontology may be allowed to conduct a year-research whose conditions of access and organization are fixed by order of ministers responsible for higher education, research, budget and health. When performing the year-research, the internals are placed in the situation provided for in theArticle R. 6153-11 of the Public Health Code. Internships carried out during the research year are not taken into account as part of the clinical training obligations to obtain the certificate of in-depth studies in dental surgery.
Interns in odontology may, in accordance with the terms set by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health, carry out, after agreement of the relevant academic and hospital authorities, two semesters at most of the training in another dental care, education and research centre, or abroad.
The Certificate of In-depth Studies in Dental Surgery is issued by the University to Internal Odontology who:
1° Satisfied with the control of knowledge in the field of theoretical teaching mentioned at the 1st of Article R. 634-25;
2° Completed and validated the clinical training mentioned in 2° of the same article.
The State Diploma in Dental Surgery is issued by the university to the internals in odontology who have obtained the certificate of in-depth studies in dental surgery, after a thesis is held before a jury whose composition is fixed by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
The thesis can be supported after validation of the second semester in the internal functions.
The state diploma of midwife is issued by the universities authorized for this purpose, after the advice of the National Council of Higher Education and Research, by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health, to the students who have validated all the theoretical, clinical and practical training corresponding to the two training cycles.
Enabling the midwife state diploma granted before September 29, 1985 remains valid.
Students wishing to attend midwife studies are enrolled in a common first year in health studies at a university organizing the initial training of midwives within the university or bound by a convention with a midwives school under the auspices of the universityArticle L. 4151-7 of the Public Health Code.
In order to be allowed to pursue midwife studies, students must be placed in a useful rank on the classification list established by the medical training and research unit (UFR) concerned after the classification tests organized at the end of the first year common to health studies.
The number of candidates to be admitted to midwives schools or allowed to continue their studies at universities organizing the initial training of midwives as well as the distribution of places between universities and, where appropriate, between medical UFRs is set annually by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
In the event of a convention between a university with one or more medical training and research units and several midwives schools, students who register in the first year common to health studies are divided among the different schools according to the terms set by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Each midwives school or university that organizes the initial training of midwives provides coverage of the training needs of several departments. An order determines the list.
The amount of the annual registration fees required of candidates for the midwife state diploma is fixed by decree of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
Students pursuing their studies in midwives schools are only enrolled in university for examinations.
The conditions of pay for midwives students are set by order of ministers responsible for budget, higher education and health.
The rules relating to the accreditation and appointment of certain directors of midwives schools as well as the appointment of technical directors of teaching are set by the Articles R. 4151-9 to R. 4151-13 of the Public Health Code.
Public higher education institutions empowered to issue the state diploma of audioprothesist are designated, after the advice of the National Council of Higher Education and Research, by order of ministers responsible for higher education and health.
These decrees mention, if any, the training and research unit responsible for the authorized preparation, in the light of a file specifying the terms and conditions for the organization of the diploma.
Enabling may be withdrawn according to the same procedure.
Studies for the State degree of audioprothesist are open to holders of the Bachelor's degree of second-degree education or a title admitted to the dispensation or equivalence of the bachelor's degree in order to pursue studies in universities, provided they are declared received at an admission examination.
The examination of admission to audio-prosthetic studies is organized annually by the training and research unit responsible for the training. It has three written tests and an oral examination.
Written examinations shall include:
1° Physics (duration: two hours); coefficient 2);
2° Mathematics (duration: one hour; coefficient 1);
3° Biology (duration: two hours); coefficient 2).
The subjects are designed on the basis of the programs taught in high school scientific terminal classes.
Only candidates who have obtained a general average of 8 out of 20 in the written examinations may run the oral examination. This includes an assessment of general knowledge and psychotechnical skills of candidates. It is affected by coefficient 5.
All these trials are judged by a jury appointed by the president of the university, on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training of audioprosthetics.
No person may be allowed to take more than three admission examinations, unless the president of the university has granted an exemption on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training. Only candidates received for this examination are allowed to register in the first year for the state of audioprothesist degree.
Studies for the state diploma of audioprothesist have a duration of three years. They include theoretical teachings, directed teachings, practical teachings, internships and the support of a research memory.
The thematic orientations and the hourly volumes of theoretical and practical teachings are fixed in accordance with theAnnex to Decree No. 2001-620 of 10 July 2001 relating to the teaching programme, the organization of the audioprosthesis course and the examination tests for the state diploma of audioprothesist published in the Official Bulletin of the Ministry of Higher Education and Research.
Audioprosthetics professionals participate in the teaching as needed.
Each of the three years of audioprosthesis studies is the subject of a terminal examination covering all the subjects taught in the year. A single session is organized annually.
Achieving an average grade equal to or greater than 10 out of 20 for all practical work and internships requires each year the authorization to run for examinations.
The examination referred to in Article D. 636-5 includes written examinations and practical work as well as, in the third year, an oral examination. Any rating less than or equal to 5 out of 20 is eliminated. Students must have obtained a general average of 10 out of 20 without an elimatory grade to pass in the upper year or be admitted to the third year oral exam. The nature and duration of the tests and the coefficients attributed to them are determined annually by the board of the training and research unit, on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training.
The oral admission test covers all the teachings of the three years of study. Students who have obtained at least 10 out of 20 at this test are declared eligible.
No student can redouble more than two of the three years of study. No one may be allowed to triple a year of study, except for exceptional authorization granted by the president of the university on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training.
The jurys of the terminal examinations of each of the three years of audio-prosthetic studies are appointed by the president of the university, after the advice of the director of the training and research unit, on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training. Each includes five members, including at least two teachers and an audio-prothesist who participated in the teaching. They are chaired by the teacher responsible for the training.
The audiology courses are carried out in hospitals of oto-rhino-laryngology or in establishments approved by the board of the training and research unit (UFR), on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training of audioprothesist.
Audioprosthesis courses are performed with internship masters, in the audioprosthetic laboratories approved by the UFR Council, on the proposal of the teacher responsible for the training.
The students in audioprosthesis perform their practical internship with an audioprothesist, known as an internship master.
When this course is carried out in a health facility, it is carried out under the responsibility of the head of the activity centre or the president of the medical commission of the institution in which the master of the internship exercises.
Each course is noted on 20 by the teacher responsible for the training, on the proposal of the internship master.
The internship master has been required to work for at least three years and to be approved by an accreditation commission chaired by the Director of the Training and Research Unit (UFR) under the supervision of the student, in accordance with the terms defined by an order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Health.
The director of the UFR draws up the list of internship masters and assigns the students.
The maximum number of trainees that the internship master can accommodate cannot exceed three. It is fixed by agreement between the internship master and the official of the teaching of the state diploma of audioprothesist and, if applicable, the head of activity pole or the president of the medical commission of establishment.
The trainee, after consent of the patient, attends the activities of the internshipmaster and participates, under the responsibility and in the presence of the internshipmaster, in the professional acts that the internshipmaster usually performs.
The student may not receive compensation from his or her internship teacher or patients for his or her internship activities.
The director of the training and research unit may terminate the internship or suspend it on his or her own initiative or on the application either of the internship master or of the student, or, where applicable, of the head of activity pole or of the president of the medical establishment commission. The intern is provided, if any, with another assignment.
The internship results in an internship report prepared by the trainee as well as a report sent by the trainee to the Director of the Training and Research Unit (UFR) on the course and skills of the trainee.
The validation of the course is given, in the light of these reports, by the director of the UFR who reports to the student.
The internship with an audio-prothesist is the subject of a convention between the director of the training and research unit of which the student, the internship master and, if applicable, the director of the institution.
This agreement sets out the terms of the internship and the conditions for repair and insurance of any damage caused by the trainee or suffered by the trainee during the course.
The support of the research memory can only take place after the validation of the third year of study. She's public. The president of the jury prepares a report of defence against all members of the jury.
The jury, chaired by the teacher responsible for the training, is designated under the conditions set out in article D. 636-7. It includes at least:
1° An oto-rhino-laryngologist (professor of universities-practor-hospital or lecturer at universities-practor-hospitalier);
2° A physicist (teacher or teacher-researcher);
3° An audioprothesist (teacher or internship teacher).
Students can register for an additional year to support their research memory. They can't present it more than twice.
The State Audioprothesist Diploma is issued to students who have successfully completed the examinations of the end of the first, second and third years and successfully supported their research memory.
The amount of the annual fees required of candidates for the state audio-prothesist diploma is fixed by order of the minister responsible for higher education.
The graduate degree in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology is a national diploma in higher education. It attests to scientific and professional skills to carry out the activities of the medical electroradiology manipulator profession.
The training courses preparing for the diploma of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology are part of the European architecture of studies defined by article D. 123-13.
An order issued by the Minister for Higher Education in the Official Journal of the French Republic establishes the references to professional activities, skills and training.
The graduate degree in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology is prepared:
1° By school, in public and private schools under contract;
2° Through continuing vocational training, in vocational training centres declared in accordance with the provisions of Book III of Part VI of the Labour Code;
3° By means of learning defined in Book II of Part VI of the same code.
In order to be enrolled in the training leading to the diploma of superior technician in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology, students must justify:
1° either of the Bachelor's degree or a French or foreign degree admitted in the dispensation or equivalence of the Bachelor's degree, in accordance with national regulations;
2° Either the technical patent;
3° Either a degree classified at level IV of the national directory of professional certifications;
4° Either the conditions set out in section D. 613-40.
Admissions to training are organized, under the responsibility of the academy rector, by the head of institution. They are pronounced by the latter on the advice of an admission commission which it constitutes and presides.
The duration of the training is three years, six semesters.
A pedagogical commission of the training is placed with the head of institution.
It is consulted on the organization of training, student evaluation modalities, validation of teaching units and internships. Decisions relating to the passing of students in the upper year, repetition, exclusions and educational dispensations are also submitted for advice.
Its members and its president are appointed by the rector. It includes, in addition to the Chief of Institution:
1° At least one teacher-researcher who chairs it;
2° An academy inspector-regional educational inspector;
3° Teachers involved in training;
4° At least one student following the training;
5° Two professional representatives.
The second year passage is law for students who validated the first two semesters.
After consultation with the pedagogical commission referred to in Article D. 636-54, the head of institution shall pronounce, for students who have validated between 48 and 59 European credits, the repetition or the passage in the upper year. In the latter case, unvalidated education units in the first year can be prepared the following year.
The head of the institution, after consultation with the pedagogical commission, pronounces, for students who have validated less than 48 credits, either the repetition or the exclusion of the training. Students authorized to redouble retain the benefit of the validated teaching units.
The third year passage is in law for students who have validated the first four semesters.
After consultation with the pedagogical commission referred to in Article D. 636-54, the head of institution shall pronounce, for students who have validated between 108 and 119 European credits, either the repetition or the passage in the upper year. In the latter case, unvalidated teaching units can be prepared the following year.
The head of institution, after consultation with the pedagogical commission, pronounces, for students who have validated less than 108 credits, either the repetition or the exclusion of the training. Students authorized to redouble retain the benefit of the validated teaching units.
The head of institution, after consultation with the pedagogical commission referred to in Article D. 636-54, may authorize redoubled students who, at the end of the third year, have not graduated. These only prepare missing teaching units.
Each student has a personalized follow-up. Accompaniment actions and, where appropriate, support may also be implemented.
The Chief of Institution shall issue to any non-graduate student who requests a descriptive certificate of the training course, specifying the European credits corresponding to the validated education units.
Periods of study may be carried out abroad, under conditions defined by agreement between the student's original institution and the host institution, in particular with regard to the mutual recognition of the acquired knowledge and skills and their validation.
The evaluation of knowledge and skills occurs at the end of each semester either through continuous and regular monitoring, or through a terminal examination, or through these two combined control modes.
Continuous control procedures provide for the regular communication of notes and results to the student.
The jury, provided for in article D. 636-66, decides on the validation of each semester.
The control procedures are stopped at the beginning of the training year by the head of institution. Students are informed of this.
The validation of several teaching units can be organized during the same test provided that the notes corresponding to each teaching unit are identifiable.
The number of European credits allocated to each teaching unit is used as a coefficient for calculating the general averages at the end of each semester.
The acquisition of teaching units is carried out by capitalization and compensation. The teaching units are permanently acquired and capitalizable as long as the student has obtained the average for each of them, or by applying the compensation terms set out below.
The compensation of the notes is applied between two teaching units of the same semester, taking into account the coefficients attributed to the units, subject to having obtained at least 8 out of 20 at each unit. The education units that give the right to compensation between them are defined by order of the minister responsible for higher education.
The Master's degree in medical imaging and therapeutic radiology is issued by the rector after the jury's deliberation under article D. 636-66. It punishes a level corresponding to obtaining 180 European credits, based on 30 credits per semester validated.
The jury is appointed by the rector. It is chaired by a teacher-researcher.
The jury also includes its president:
1° The head of institution or his representative;
2° An academy inspector-regional educational inspector;
3° A representative of the regional health agency;
4° At least two teachers, including a teacher-researcher and a teacher, from the institution;
5° A care director or a health framework with a degree authorizing the practice of medical electroradiology manipulator;
6° At least one medical electroradiology manipulator in practice for at least three years;
7° At least one doctor.
The jury shall verify the acquisition of all the competencies mentioned in the order provided for in Article D. 636-49 and shall decide on the following elements:
1° Constitutive teaching units of the training repository;
2° Skills in situation;
3° The actual or simulated acts, activities or techniques.
Each jurisdiction is obtained by validation:
1° Of all teaching units in relation to competence;
2° Of all the elements of competence evaluated during the courses;
3° Conduct, activities and techniques of care assessed either on probation or in training.
The rules for training in the following health disciplines are set:
1° For the state diploma of nurse or nurse, by the articles D. 4311-16 to D. 4311-23 of the Public Health Code ;
2° For the state diploma of a nurse or a nurse of an operating block, articles D. 4311-42 to D. 4311-44 of the same code;
3° For the state diploma of anaesthesist nurse, articles D. 4311-45 to D. 4311-48 of the same code;
4° For the State Diploma of Pericult or Periculator, articles D. 4311-49 to D. 4311-51 of the same Code;
5° For the state diploma of masseur-kinesitherapist, articles D. 4321-14 to R. 4321-26 of the same code;
6° For the State degree of pedicure-podologist, by articles D. 4322-2 to R. 4322-13 of the same code;
7° For the State degree of occupational therapist, articles D. 4331-2 to R. 4331-8 of the same code;
8° For the state diploma of psychomotrician, by articles D. 4332-2 to R. 4332-8 of the same code;
9° For the state diploma of medical electroradiology manipulator, by articles D. 4351-7 to R. 4351-13 of the same code;
10° For the state diploma of medical laboratory technician, by articles D. 4352-1 to D. 4352-6 of the same code;
11° For the state diplomas of orthoprothesist, podo-orthesist, ocularist, epithesist and orthopaedist-orthesist, by articles D. 4364-7 to D. 4364-10 of the same code.
The degree of licence is granted in full right to the holders of the titles or diplomas under Book III of Part IV of the Public Health Code issued on behalf of the State and whose list is as follows:
1° Nurse State Diploma (a provision applicable to students who have completed their studies in accordance with the rules governing the graduation of the nursing State from the beginning of September 2009);
2° A diploma in the state of occupational therapist (a provision applicable to students who started their studies from the beginning of September 2011).
The body responsible for providing training to the titles or diplomas referred to in Article D. 636-69, or a legal person mandated by it to that effect, concludes a convention with one or more academy universities and the region.
When there is only one university in the academy, the agreement is signed with this university.
When there are several universities in the academy, the agreement is signed by the universities called for training, coordinated by a university with a health training component.
This agreement specifies, inter alia, the conditions under which the university(s) contribute to the teachings delivered in the training structures and the modalities for the participation of teachers-researchers in the examination panels. It also determines the conditions for the participation of the university(s) in the internal assessment mechanisms conducted by the body responsible for ensuring the training and the forming of a joint body responsible for monitoring the application of the convention.
The courses leading to the titles or diplomas referred to in Article D. 636-69 are subject to a periodic national assessment on the occasion of the evaluation by the Research and Higher Education Evaluation Agency of the university having signed the convention.
The degree of licence is conferred on the name of the State by the rector, Chancellor of the academy universities in the jurisdiction of which the title or diploma is granted, concurrently with this grant.
The authorization to issue the title of a graduate engineer shall be granted for a maximum period of six years, by order of the Minister responsible for higher education and, if applicable, of the minister(s) concerned, after evaluation of the trainings with a notice of the commission of engineering titles.
The courses for which an authorization to issue a graduate engineer's title has been granted without limitation of duration are evaluated by the engineering title commission.
At the end of the evaluation procedure, the authorization to issue the title of a graduate engineer is the subject of a decision under the conditions set out in section D. 642-1.
The list of schools authorized to issue a graduate engineering title is published once a year in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
The graduate engineer's title is designated in whole or using officially admitted abbreviations.
The commission of engineering titles consists of thirty-two members:
1° Four members selected from the staff of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character under the Minister for Higher Education and in which the title of a graduate engineer is issued, by two representatives of universities, including a representative of national polytechnic institutes, a representative of institutes and schools outside universities and a representative of major institutions;
2° Four members selected in the staff of schools and institutes under the Minister for Higher Education and delivering the title of a graduate engineer;
3° Eight members chosen because of their scientific and technical competence, of which at least five members were employed in the staff of the establishments that issued the title of a graduate engineer other than public institutions under the Minister for Higher Education;
4° Eight members selected by the most representative employer organizations;
5° Eight members selected by the associations and professional organizations of the most representative engineers.
The members of the commission referred to in 1° shall be selected by the Minister responsible for higher education on a list proposed by the Conference of Heads of Institutions of Higher Education referred to in Article L. 233-1, sitting in restricted training to heads of institutions who are authorized to issue the title of a graduate engineer. This list must contain twice as many names as members to be designated for each of the types of public establishments mentioned in the 1st.
The members of the commission referred to in 2° and 3° are appointed by the minister responsible for higher education.
An order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Labour sets out the number of seats allocated to each of the organizations and associations mentioned in the 4th and 5th.
The Director General for Higher Education and Vocational Inclusion at the Ministry of Higher Education and Research or his alternate attends the sessions of the Commission with an advisory vote, except in the event that he performs the duties assigned to him by section R. 642-10.
The members of the engineering commission are appointed by order of the minister responsible for higher education for a period of four years.
They are renewable by half every two years.
No one can be a member of the commission for more than eight consecutive years.
Any member of the engineering commission ceases to be a member of the commission if he loses the quality because of which he was called.
In the event of a vacancy, for any cause, the Minister for Higher Education shall, within three months and in accordance with the terms and conditions set out in R. 642-5, appoint a member for the remainder of the term of office.
The commission of the titles of engineer, convened under the presidency of the Dean of Age, elects among its members a president and two vice-presidents.
The President, in the event of an incapacity, is replaced by one of the Vice-Presidents.
The President and Vice-Presidents shall be elected by an absolute majority in the first two rounds, with a relative majority in the third round. If, in the third round, there is equal sharing of votes, the oldest of the candidates is considered elected. The vote is on secret ballots.
The President and Vice-Presidents are elected for two years. They are eligible for re-election.
A clerk with the commission is appointed by the Director General for Higher Education and Professional Inclusion to the Ministry of Higher Education and Research among the officials of the central administration.
When exercising advisory competence, the engineering board shall perform its functions under the conditions provided by the Decree No. 2006-672 of 8 June 2006 the establishment, composition and functioning of the Advisory Administrative Committees and the second and third paragraphs of this article.
The proceedings shall be taken by an absolute majority of the voting. In the event of a vote-sharing, the President's voice is preponderant.
Any member of the commission prevented from attending any or part of a session may give in writing power to another member. The power of attorney is handed over to the clerk of the commission before the first vote for which it takes effect. No one can hold more power of attorney.
When the engineering board exercises administrative or judicial decision-making power, it can only deliberate if the number of the present exceeds half of its members. The proceedings shall be taken by an absolute majority of the voting. No member can vote by proxy. In the event of a vote-sharing, the President's voice is preponderant.
When the commission performs the judicial functions that it holds articles L. 642-4 and L. 642-6, it shall rule on the report of one of the members designated by the Chairperson, after having heard the comments of the Director General for higher education and professional insertion or his deputy and those of the parties or their agent. The report consists of an objective statement of facts and means.
The commission's decision is motivated. It is read in public session, transcribed on the minutes of the proceedings and signed by the president, the rapporteur and the secretary-greffier. Reference is made in the decision of the members who deliberated.
The engineering degree issued pursuant to Article L. 642-9 confers on its holders the title of an engineer graduated by the State.
He mentions a specialty.
Candidates as a state graduate must:
1° Justify five years of professional practice in functions commonly entrusted to engineers;
2° Have met the events organized in accordance with Article D. 642-13.
The trials are organized by the institutions authorized to issue a graduate engineer's title, which are authorized under the terms fixed by order of the minister responsible for higher education, after the advice of the engineering commission.
The list of specialties in which the title of a qualified engineer by the State may be issued and the terms and conditions of the examination leading to the issuance of this title shall be determined by order of the same Minister, after notice of the commission mentioned in the first paragraph of this article.
The higher degree of applied arts is a professional finality diploma issued on behalf of the State. He mentions a specialty.
It certifies that its licensee masters the technological, artistic and general know-how, the techniques and know-how relevant to the specialty and allowing to perform functions requiring a high degree of design competence.
The courses prepared for the higher degree of applied arts are part of the European architecture of studies defined by Article D. 123-13.
The higher degree of applied arts is enrolled at level I in the interdepartmental nomenclature of training levels.
A decree of the Minister for Higher Education, published in the Official Journal of the French Republic, establishes, for each specialty, the repository of professional activities, the repository of skills, abilities and knowledge and their level of requirement, defines the areas of training and the units of education that constitute them. It also sets the duration and purpose of the internship in a professional setting.
Each specialty has at least one general education area, an artistic training area and a vocational training area. Each training area consists of at least two teaching units. Some teaching units can be common to several specialties.
This order sets out the duration and order of acquisition of the teaching units and their value in European credits in accordance with the educational provisions defined in articles D. 611-1 and D. 611-2.
Training leading to the higher degree of applied arts is the subject of an opening authorization by the minister responsible for higher education.
The opening authorization is granted or renewed for a period of four years.
The presentation procedure and description of the opening application file are established by the Minister responsible for higher education.
The higher degree of applied arts is obtained:
1° Through school in a two-year cycle of study;
2° Through learning;
3° Through continuing vocational training;
4° Or for the validation of the acquired experience.
By way of school and by way of learning, may apply for the preparation of the higher degree of applied arts:
1° Holders of a patent as a senior technician in the design and applied arts sector;
2° Holders of a certification in the same sector as the specialty of the higher degree of applied arts posted and enrolled at least at level III in the national directory of professional certifications;
3° Holders of a degree in art trades;
4° Candidates who have completed complete tuition leading to one of the above-mentioned diplomas;
5° Candidates justifying professional experience and personal acquis to prepare the higher degree of applied arts.
Candidates on the path of continuing vocational training can also apply for the preparation of the higher degree of applied arts if they justify three years of effective professional exercise in a job of level at least equal to that occupied by a graduate of applied arts and in an area of activity corresponding to the graduated degree.
Admission to the training leading to the higher degree of applied arts is organized by the academy rector who defines, with the heads of host institutions, the conditions for the establishment and conduct of the admission procedure.
It is pronounced by the head of institution, on the proposal of a commission which it constitutes and presides, formed of teachers in the study cycle and at least one professional. The Commission shall take into account the elements in the application file completed by a work file and, possibly, by an interview.
The second year is acquired when the student has obtained, at the end of the first year, both an average of 10 out of 20 at each training area and a grade of 8 out of 20 at each of the knowledge modules that constitute it. A student who does not meet these conditions may be authorized by the head of institution, in accordance with the limits prescribed by the order referred to in section D. 642-15 and after the advice of the class council, to continue in the second year. The student must then present the checks for the missing knowledge modules in accordance with the terms set out in the above-mentioned order.
The student may be allowed to redouble the first or second year, by decision of the head of institution after notice of the class council.
This possibility of repetition is valid only once during the course of the training, except for cases of force majeure duly justified and appreciated by the chief of establishment.
The decision refusing to allow repetition is motivated and has guidance.
In each academy, a board of appeal is organized, under the authority of the rector or his representative to whom students not admitted in the second year may appeal the repetition decision. This commission includes at least one head of institution as well as a teacher of the specialty of the graduate degree applied prepared by the student. On the proposal of this commission, the rector confirms, if necessary, by supplementing it, or invalidates the decision of the head of establishment.
Subject to the provisions of Article D. 642-23, the hourly volume of the training leading to the higher degree of applied arts shall be as follows:
1° For the school track, by the decree provided for in Article D. 642-15;
2° For the course of learning, at least 1 350 hours;
3° On-going training, at least 1,350 hours, taking into account the training courses provided for in Article D. 642-15.
Exemptions of units may be granted by the commission referred to in Article D. 642-19 of this Code to candidates justifying titles or diplomas or higher education exceeding the level required for registration.
In the case of unit dispensations, the duration of training may be reduced by a decision of the rector on the proposal of the commission referred to above.
For apprentices, the reduction in the duration of the apprenticeship contract is fixed in accordance with provisions of Article L. 6222-8 of the Labour Code. In the case of a one-year reduction, this training period cannot be less than 675 hours.
The procedure for reducing the duration of training and the duration of training courses is provided by the order referred to in Article D. 642-15 of this Code.
Applicants to graduate from the higher degree of applied arts register with the academic service responsible for organizing the examination.
The units sanction the knowledge, skills and abilities evaluated in the form of either a control in the course of training, or a one-time terminal control, or both of these combined control modes.
The higher degree of applied arts is awarded to candidates with an average of 10 out of 20 for each training area and a grade of 8 out of 20 for each unit.
The diploma is issued by the academy rector after the jury's deliberation under article D. 642-27.
It punishes a level corresponding to obtaining 120 European credits.
The jury is appointed by the academy rector for each session and each speciality of the higher degree of applied arts. It is chaired by an academy inspector- regional pedagogical inspector of industrial sciences and techniques in the "applied arts" sector or a teacher-researcher.
It is composed, in addition to its president, of a maximum of ten persons divided by gender:
1° Teachers in the speciality of the higher degree of applied arts;
2° And members of the profession concerned.
The jury may join two qualified persons, of whom he proposes the appointment to the rector.
The jury meets twice during the study cycle to validate the achievements of each candidate.
The Chief of Institution delivers to students, after consulting the school board, a descriptive certificate of the course they have followed and the knowledge and skills they have acquired. This certificate is issued in accordance with the speciality of the diploma. When one or more units constitutive of the degree were validated without the degree obtained, the descriptive certificate mentions for each unit the corresponding credits in the referential.
The continuation of studies and the orientation of students in another higher education training is facilitated by educational cooperation agreements between institutions preparing the higher degree of applied arts and institutions, French or foreign, providing this training.
These conventions specify on the basis of the descriptive attestation provided for in the first paragraph of this article and according to the various types of studies to which students from the courses leading to the higher degree of applied arts can apply the conditions for the validation of the acquisitions of these students as part of the training curriculum of the host institution.
For the examination of individual files, they provide for the organization of commissions involving representatives of the institution of origin and the institution of reception and presided over by the head of the institution of higher reception or a teacher-researcher he designates.
The benefit of a rating equal to or greater than 10 out of 20 obtained at a unit or field of training may be retained for five years from the date of obtaining. This validity period may, however, be modified in the event of renovation or deletion of the specialty.
These units may result in the issuance of certificates of success valid for five years from their date of receipt.
The Minister for Higher Education designates a Inspector General of National Education to ensure, on a pedagogical basis, the proper conduct of the session and to ensure the coordination of the action of the various panels.
Candidates who have not obtained the higher degree of applied arts governed by the Decree No. 83-913 of 14 October 1983 establishing and fixing the conditions for the issuance of the higher degrees of applied arts present the units not obtained under the conditions defined by the order referred to in Article D. 642-15.
Institutions providing training leading to the higher degree of applied arts under Article 2 of Decree No. 83-913 of 14 October 1983 establishing and fixing the conditions for the issuance of the higher degrees of applied arts shall be granted the opening authorization referred to in Article R. 642-16 for a maximum period of two years from the beginning of 2011.
During this period, these establishments submit an application file for opening authorization under the conditions set out in section R. 642-16.
Orders made pursuant to Article 8 of Decree No. 83-913 of 14 October 1983 establishing and fixing the conditions for the issuance of the higher degrees of applied arts are deemed to be taken under Article D. 642-15.
The higher technician's patent is a national diploma of higher education that confers on its holders the title of a patented superior technician.
Training courses prepared for the higher technician's patent are part of the European architecture of the studies defined by Article D. 123-13.
It certifies that its holders have acquired a professional qualification, are able to hold the positions of superior technician in the industrial and commercial professions, in the service activities or those of the applied arts and capable of mobilizing their knowledge and skills to improve and adapt during their professional life and to value and validate their achievements for prosecutions or possible studies.
The higher technician's patent is granted under a professional specialty.
The specialties of the higher technician's patent are created by decree of the minister responsible for higher education, after the advice of the competent professional advisory committees.
For each specialty, this Order sets out the certification repository and the specific regulations that set the conditions for the grant of this degree.
The certification repository for each specialty lists the abilities, know-how, professional, technological and general skills and knowledge that the graduate holders must possess and determine the required levels of requirement for graduation.
The certification repository is organized in units made up of a set, consistent with the purpose of the degree, abilities, know-how, skills and knowledge. Some units may be common to several degrees. The certification repository may include units, within the limit of three, which are optional.
Training in the preparation of the higher technician's patent includes, pursuant to Article L. 331-4, training courses organized under the responsibility of training institutions.
The terms and conditions for the organization of training and vocational training are specified by order of the Minister for Higher Education.
The certificate of superior technician is prepared:
1° By school, high schools and private technical schools mentioned in articles L. 443-2 and R. 443-1 of this Code;
2° By way of learning defined in Book II of Part VI of the Labour Code;
3° Through continuing professional training, defined in Book III of Part VI of the same Code.
The higher technician's patent may also be prepared by remote educational institutions under the conditions established by a decree of the minister responsible for higher education.
The training provided for the preparation of the higher technician's patent through the school is organized in a study cycle, within the meaning of Article L. 612-2, for a period of two years. The second year student's transition is delivered by the Chief of Institution after the advice of the Class Council.
In each academy, under the authority of the rector or his representative, a board of appeal is organized to which students not admitted in the second year may appeal the repetition decision. This commission includes at least one head of institution as well as a speciality teacher or a speciality close to the higher technician's patent prepared by the student. According to the Commission's opinion, the rector confirms, if necessary, by supplementing it, or invalidates the decision of the head of establishment.
As a derogatory, the duration and organization of this two-year training cycle may be modified by order of the Minister responsible for higher education, for candidates justifying certain titles or diplomas or following higher education, as well as for certain higher technicians' patents.
For each higher technician's patent, a decree sets the weekly duration of the initial training courses under school status.
Applicants, who have completed a first cycle of higher education or preparatory classes for large schools, may, depending on their achievements and the advanced technician's patent, access to well-trained courses.
Candidates' access to these training courses is decided by the academy rector after reviewing their file and advice from the school's educational team.
This decision cannot reduce the duration of the training to less than one school year.
The duration of the training provided in the apprenticeship training centre or in the learning section, necessary for the preparation of the higher technician's patent through learning, is at least 1 350 hours. This period may be reduced or extended under the conditions provided for by the Labour code. In the event of a reduction in the duration of the apprenticeship contract to one year, this training period cannot be less than 675 hours.
The duration of the preparation of the higher technician's patent by means of the continuing professional training defined in Article D. 643-5 shall be determined, not taking into account the training courses provided for in Article D. 643-4, as follows:
1° For candidates with a title or degree classified at level III in the national directory of professional certifications or who have completed the complete education leading to: 600 hours minimum;
2° For candidates with a title or diploma ranked at level IV in the National Register of Professional Certifications or who have completed the complete tuition leading to a minimum of 1,100 hours;
3° For candidates justifying a professional experience of at least three years: at least 1,100 hours;
4° For candidates not justifying any of the conditions specified above: at least 1,500 hours.
However, the duration of training required for each class of candidates may be reduced by a positioning decision, in accordance with the provisions of sections D. 643-10 to D. 643-12, provided that they justify, in addition to the conditions specified above, studies or professional activities, or dispensations of tests or units constitutive of the degree. No minimum training period is required in the event of a positioning for candidates under the 1st of this article.
The positioning decision sets the duration of the training required during graduation. It is pronounced by the academy rector, at the request of the candidate, after his admission to an institution and according to the terms fixed by order of the minister responsible for higher education.
It is taken under the higher technician's patent that the candidate wishes to prepare and is valid until the diploma is obtained.
The positioning decision takes into account the studies carried out in France or abroad by the candidate, the French or foreign titles or diplomas possessed, the professional skills that he or she can apply, as well as the exemptions of tests or units that he or she enjoys under article D. 643-17 or as part of the validation of the acquired experience.
The positioning decision may reduce, depending on the job situation of the candidate, the duration of the training courses under the conditions laid down by the special regulation of the degree.
The higher technician's patent is granted in the light of the results obtained at a review sanctioning the acquisition by the candidate of the capacity, skills and know-how and the constituent know-how of the units provided by the certification repository of each degree specialty.
A candidate may make an optional presentation of one or two units selected from the proposed ones, if any, by the repository.
The examination leading to graduation may take two forms:
1° An overall form in which the candidate presents all the constitutive units of the degree during the same session, subject to the provisions of the first paragraph of Article D. 643-23.
2° A progressive form, by which the candidate passes the examination by capitalizable units, under the conditions set out in the second paragraph of article D. 643-22; in this case, he chooses to present only certain units constitutive of the diploma during the same session. The special regulation of the degree may provide for an order of presentation or of obtaining units.
The examination consists of not more than six mandatory tests; it is organized either in "point trials", under the conditions set out in article D. 643-19, or in the form of capitalizable units, under the conditions set out in articles D. 643-20 and D. 643-23.
Obtaining a rating greater than or equal to 10 of 20 at a test of the examination results in the issuance of one or more units. The corresponding notes and units are valid for five years from their date of receipt. They may give rise to the issuance by the academy rector of certificates of success valid for this period.
For the examination, candidates must:
1° either having completed the preparation of the degree through school, apprenticeship or continuing vocational training, the duration of which is fixed in accordance with the provisions of articles D. 643-5 to D. 643-12;
2° Either having completed three years of effective professional activities in a level job at least equal to that of technician and in a professional field in relation to the purpose of the postulated diploma.
They must also be registered for graduation.
The candidates mentioned in the 1° who, during their preparation for the diploma, have changed the course of preparation are enrolled in the examination under the one in which they complete their training.
The academy rector, depending on the exceptional personal situation of a candidate resulting in, inter alia, incomplete training due to force majeure, illness, accident or maternity, may grant an exemption to the conditions of training set out in 1°.
The conditions of title or professional exercise are payable on the date on which the candidate presents himself to the last unit that is entitled to the graduation or to the degree as a whole.
Under the conditions set by order of the Minister for Higher Education, candidates holding certain French titles or diplomas may be exempted from obtaining one or more constitutive units of a higher technician's patent. This order may also provide that a waiver may be granted to candidates justifying the obtaining of certain units or the benefit of certain diploma tests within the limits of their validity.
Upon a decision of the Minister under conditions fixed by order, exemptions from units may also be granted to candidates with foreign degrees.
When a candidate justifies exemptions for the validation of the acquired experience set out in sections R. 335-5 and R. 613-33 to R. 613-38, the assessment of the validation jury of these certificates is forwarded to the graduation jury.
Pass the examination in the form of at least three point tests and, where applicable, tests that can be validated completely or partially by in-training control, under the conditions set out in the specific regulation of the degree:
1° Applicants who have prepared the certificate of superior technician by way of school in a public or private institution under contract;
2° Those who have prepared it through continuing professional training in an authorized public institution;
3° Those who have prepared it through learning in an authorized apprenticeship training centre or an authorized learning section.
Pass the examination in the form of one-off tests, under the conditions established by the special regulation of the diploma:
1° Candidates who have prepared a higher technician's certificate by way of school in a private non-contracting institution;
2° Those who have prepared it through continuing professional training in an unlicensed institution;
3° Those who have prepared it through learning in an unlicensed apprenticeship training centre or an unlicensed learning section;
4° Candidates who have been prepared by way of distance education, regardless of their status, as well as candidates who are present under their professional experience pursuant to the third paragraph (2°) of Article D. 643-16.
Candidates who have prepared the degree through continuing professional training in a qualified public institution may pass the examination, under the conditions set out in the special regulation of the degree, in the form of capitalizable units assessed during the course of training and validated by the jury. The application specifies the conditions of this evaluation. This authorization shall be deemed to be acquired if, within three months, no decision of refusal has been notified to the interested parties.
The conditions relating to the granting and withdrawal of the authorization of apprenticeship training centres and learning sections to exercise the ongoing control of training provided for in section D. 643-19 are specified by order of the Minister responsible for higher education.
Enabling is deemed to be acquired if, within three months, no decision to refuse has been notified to the institutions concerned.
Applicants who have prepared the certificate of superior technician through the school or through the course of learning must submit the examination in the overall form following their training, except as may be granted by the rector of academy for candidates receiving the provisions of the third paragraph of Article D. 643-6, Article D. 643-7 or Article D. 643-8.
Candidates who have prepared the certificate of superior technician by means of continuous vocational training, those who have undergone a preparation by way of distance education, regardless of their status, as well as those who present themselves under their professional experience pursuant to the third paragraph (2°) of Article D. 643-16, opt, at the time of their registration, either for the overall form or for the progressive form, subject to the provisions of Article 643-20. The choice for either of these terms is final.
The degree is issued to candidates who have obtained a general average of 10 out of 20 to all the affected evaluations of their coefficient.
Notes to the optional tests shall be taken into account only for their part exceeding note 10 of 20. The additional points are added to the total points obtained from the mandatory exams for graduation.
The adjourned candidates, having submitted the examination in the overall form, shall, at their request and under the conditions specified in article D. 643-15, retain the benefit of the grades obtained when they are greater than or equal to 10 of 20 and then present all non-custodial units.
Applicants who have opted for the progressive form shall, at their request and under the conditions specified in article D. 643-15, retain the benefit of the grades greater than or equal to 10 of 20 for subsequent sessions.
Applicants who have opted for the phased form may keep and postpone, within five years of their graduation, the grades below 10 of 20 or submit to a new evaluation. In the latter case, it is the last note that is taken into account.
The calculation of the general average is based on the notes retained and the notes obtained from the re-expended assessments of their coefficient.
When a candidate is declared absent at a mandatory test, the degree may not be issued.
However, the absence of a candidate for a trial for a duly recognized cause of force majeure is sanctioned by Note Zero.
The specific regulation of each higher technician's patent specialty sets out the list, the nature and the coefficient of the evaluations sanctioning the acquisition of the units and, for the ad hoc tests, their duration. It shall, where applicable, set the test(s) totally or partially evaluated by in-training control for the candidates mentioned in the first paragraph of Article D. 643-19. It specifies the terms and conditions of the examination when it is organized in the form of validation of capitalizable units provided for in Article D. 643-20 and the duration of the training courses required to be examined.
The final results of the evaluations result from the sovereign deliberation of the jury.
No candidate who provided a school booklet or training booklet may be adjourned without the jury having examined it. The mention of this examination is given to the school booklet or training under the signature of the jury president.
The Minister for Higher Education designates, for each specialty of the higher technician's patent, a general inspector of national education responsible for ensuring, on a pedagogical basis, the proper conduct of the examination and the harmonization of the jury's deliberations.
At least one review session is organized each academic year as part of an academy or academy grouping, in accordance with the terms and conditions established by a decree of the Minister responsible for higher education.
At each session, candidates can only register for a single specialty of the higher technician's patent.
The subjects of the trials are chosen by the minister responsible for higher education or, by delegation of the minister, by the academy rectors.
The higher technician's patent is issued after deliberation of a jury.
The jury is appointed, for each session, by order of the academy rector. It is presided over by a teacher-researcher or by an academy inspector-regional pedagogical inspector of the degree specialty.
It is composed equally:
1° Teachers from public education, including a teacher-researcher, and, where appropriate, teachers from private education under contract or in the apprenticeship training centre or in the learning section, teachers from public education to represent the majority of teachers;
2° Members of the profession interested in the degree, employers and employees.
If parity is not reached due to the defection of one or more members before the beginning of his work, the jury may nevertheless deliberately.
The jury thus constituted may join one or two foreign qualified persons who have participated in the training he proposes to the rector.
If the number of candidates who have composed in the academy or academy group constituted to organize the examination justifies it, the rector may form several panels. In this case, the presidency of these panels can be ensured by the same person. Teachers or members of the profession may participate in a number of panels.
The diploma of the higher technician's patent is issued by the academy rector on the jury's proposal.
The obtaining of the higher technician's patent will take the acquisition of 120 European credits.
When the Senior Technician Section is located in a public or private establishment under contract, the Chief of Institution shall issue to the students, after consultation with the Class Council, a descriptive certificate of the course they have followed and the knowledge and skills they have acquired.
The descriptive certificate shall be established in accordance with the speciality certification framework referred to in Article D. 643-3, in accordance with the conditions provided for the description of the training courses in the implementation of the European credit system defined in Article D. 611-2.
In addition, where one or more constitutive units of the certification repository have been validated in a point-of-charge form or by ongoing testing, the descriptive attestation mentions for each test the credits defined according to their coefficient to the examination.
In order to facilitate the continuation of studies and the orientation of students in another course of higher education, educational cooperation agreements have been passed between institutions preparing for the patent of superior technicians and institutions, French or foreign, providing this training. These conventions specify, on the basis of the descriptive attestation provided for in Article D. 643-34 and according to the various types of studies to which students from the sections of the higher technicians can apply, the conditions for the validation of the acquisitions of these students as part of the training curriculum of the host institution. For the examination of individual files, they provide for the organization of commissions involving representatives of the high school and the host institution, chaired by a teacher-researcher appointed by the head of the higher education institution.
The national diploma in the art professions, bearing the mention of a specialty, attests that its holder masters the technological, artistic and general knowledge, the techniques and know-how relevant to the specialty and is able to perform technical and professional supervision functions.
The courses preparing for the diploma of the art professions are part of the European architecture of the studies defined by article D. 123-13 and based mainly on the three degrees of diploma, master and doctorate, in studies leading to the degree of licence.
This degree is listed at level III in the national directory of professional certifications.
For each speciality of the art trades degree, an order of the Minister responsible for higher education establishes the repository of professional activities, the repertoire of capacities, knowledge and know-how and their level of requirement, defines the areas of training and the units of education that constitute them and their order of acquisition and sets the duration and purposes of the internship in a professional setting.
Each teaching unit has a value in European credits defined in accordance with the conditions laid down in Article D. 611-2. This Order provides, where applicable, the teaching units common to several degrees.
Each speciality in art professions has at least three areas of training: a general education area, an artistic training area and a professional training area. Each training area consists of at least two teaching units.
Training courses leading to the degree of art are provided by institutions authorized by the Minister responsible for higher education.
Enabling is granted or renewed for up to four years.
The authorization provided for in the first paragraph of this section shall be deemed to be acquired if, after a two-month period, no decision of refusal has been notified to the institutions concerned.
The presentation procedure and file description are defined by the Minister responsible for higher education.
The degree of art professions is prepared:
1° Through the school system;
2° Through learning;
3° Through continuing vocational training;
4° As part of the validation of the acquired experience.
Can apply for the preparation of the art trades diploma through the school and through learning:
1° Holders of an art trades patent;
2° Holders of the Bachelor of Technology Science and Industrial Technologies, Applied Arts Speciality;
3° Holders of a technical patent in a speciality in the applied arts sector;
4° Students from the applied arts upgrade classes;
5° Holders of an art, professional or technological degree in the same sector as the specialty of the postulated art professions diploma and enrolled at least level IV in the national directory of professional certifications;
6° Candidates who have completed complete tuition leading to one of the diplomas cited at 1°, 2°, 3° and 5° of this article.
The preparation of the diploma of art professions through continuing professional training is open:
1° To the holders of a degree in the same sector as the specialty of the postulated art professions and enrolled at least at level IV in the national directory of professional certifications or having completed the complete education leading to it;
2° Candidates justifying three years of professional exercise in the field of activity corresponding to the postgraduate degree.
Admission to a degree section of the public education professions is organized by the rector of the academy in which the requested institution has its seat. The rector, in consultation with the heads of host establishments, defines the modalities for the establishment and conduct of the procedure.
The applicant for admission shall file a file with the institution in which he wishes to register with the justification of one of the conditions referred to in sections D. 643-40 and D. 643-41 and personal work. This file can be completed by an interview.
The file is subject to the assessment of a commission chaired by the head of the institution or its representative and composed of teachers in this cycle of studies and one or more professionals.
The admission decision is pronounced by the head of host institution on the Commission's proposal.
Candidates justifying professional experience, personal acquittals or having completed training in France or abroad in relation to the speciality of the postulated art professions diploma may be allowed to prepare the art trades by decision of the academy rector after notice of the commission defined in article D. 643-42.
Training leading to the graduation of art professions through the school is organized in a two-year cycle of studies following the high school terminal cycle.
The second year of transition is in law when the student obtained, at the end of the first year, both an average of 10 out of 20 at each training area and a grade equal to or greater than 8 out of 20 at each of the teaching units that constitute it. However, a student who does not meet these conditions may be authorized by the head of institution, in accordance with the limits prescribed by the order referred to in section D. 643-37 and after the advice of the class council, to continue in the second year. In this case, the student submits the controls related to the teaching units that he has not obtained in accordance with the terms provided for in the above-mentioned order.
The student may be allowed to redouble the first or second year, by decision of the head of institution after notice of the class council.
This possibility of repetition is valid only once during the course of the training, except for cases of force majeure duly justified and appreciated by the chief of establishment.
The decision refusing to allow repetition is motivated and has guidance.
In each academy, a board of appeal is organized, under the authority of the rector or his representative, to whom students not admitted in the second year may appeal the repetition decision. This commission includes at least one head of institution as well as a teacher of the specialty of the art professions diploma prepared by the student. After notice of this commission, the rector confirms, if necessary, by supplementing it, or invalidates the decision of the head of establishment.
The weekly duration of teaching by way of school is determined by the order provided for in Article D. 643-37 subject to the provisions of Article D. 643-50.
The duration of training by means of learning is at least 1,350 hours, subject to the provisions of Article D. 643-50.
The duration of the continuing training shall be determined, without taking into account the training courses provided for in article D. 643-37, at least 1,350 hours, subject to the provisions of article D. 643-50.
Exemptions of units may be granted to candidates justifying certain French or foreign titles or diplomas or higher education in France or abroad. These exemptions are granted by the commission referred to in Article D. 643-42 of this Code.
In the case of unit exemptions, the duration of the training referred to in articles D. 643-47 and D. 643-49 of this code may be reduced by a decision of the academy rector following the advice of the above-mentioned commission.
In the case of unit exemptions for the validation of the acquired experience, the duration of the training may be reduced under the same conditions.
For candidates referred to in Article D. 643-48 of this Code, the reduction of the duration of the apprenticeship contract shall be determined in accordance with provisions of articles L. 6222-2 and L. 6222-7 to L. 6222-10 of the Labour Code. In the case of a one-year reduction, this training period cannot be less than 675 hours.
In the case of a reduction in the duration of training, the duration of the training courses may be reduced under the conditions specified in the order mentioned in article D. 643-37.
Education units sanction:
1° On the one hand, the knowledge and know-how evaluated either by means of the ongoing control of training or by means of one-time control;
2° On the other hand, the presentation before the jury of a project with a significant synthesis of the project approach, characteristic of the vocation of the art professions.
The candidate registers with the department responsible for the organization of the examination by specifying the teaching unit(s) he wishes to validate.
The conditions of title or professional exercise referred to in sections D. 643-40, D. 643-41 and D. 643-43 are payable on the date on which the candidate is present at the last education unit that is entitled to the issuance of the diploma.
The degree of art trades is awarded to candidates who have obtained an average of 10 out of 20 for each field of training and a rating equal to or greater than 8 out of 20 for each unit of education. The final notes result from the jury's deliberation.
The diploma is issued by the academy rector after jury deliberation.
The graduation of art trades takes the acquisition of 120 European credits.
The Chief of Institution delivers to students, after consulting the school board, a descriptive certificate of the course they have followed and the knowledge and skills they have acquired. This certificate is issued in accordance with the speciality of the diploma. When one or more educational units constitutive of the degree were validated without the degree being obtained, the descriptive certificate mentions for each unit the corresponding credits in the reference.
The benefit of a grade equal to or greater than 10 out of 20 obtained at a teaching unit or a training field may be retained for five years from the date of obtaining. This validity period may, however, be changed in the case of the renovation or removal of the specialty.
Education units whose grade is 10 out of 20 or more may result in the issuance of certificates of achievement valid for five years from the date they obtain.
The jury is appointed by the academy rector for each session and each speciality in art skills. It is presided over by a research teacher or by an academy inspector- regional education inspector in industrial sciences and techniques in the "applied arts" sector.
It is composed equally:
1° Teachers of the public education teaching in the context of the speciality of the diploma of the professions of art under consideration and, where appropriate, teachers from the private teaching under contract or exercising in the training center of apprentices or in the learning section as well as, where applicable, teachers of applied arts in diplomas of the same field of specialty enrolled at least level III in the national repertoire of professional certifications. Teachers from public education represent the majority of teachers;
2° Members of the profession concerned.
If parity is not respected due to the defection of one or more members before the beginning of his work, the jury may nevertheless deliberately.
The jury thus constituted may join two qualified persons, of whom he proposes the appointment to the rector.
The jury meets twice during the study cycle to validate the achievements of each candidate. It is also responsible for validating the choice of project themes under Article D. 643-52.
Members of the jury may be associated with knowledge and know-how controls and the choice of project themes.
The Minister for Higher Education designates a Inspector General of National Education to ensure, on a pedagogical basis, the proper conduct of the session and to ensure the coordination of the action of the various panels.
The Minister responsible for higher education defines the territorial framework in which operations related to the organization of the evaluation of a speciality in art trades are carried out. This framework may be limited to an academy or group several academies under the direction of one of them designated by the Minister for Higher Education.
University institutes of technology provide in initial and continuing vocational training higher education to prepare for technical and professional supervision functions in certain sectors of production, applied research and services.
An Order of the Minister for Higher Education, after the advice of the National Advisory Commission of University Institutes of Technology and Professionalized University Institutes, subcommission on University Institutes of Technology, National Educational Commissions and the National Council of Higher Education and Research, the specialties taught in the academic institutes of technology and the options to which they can take place.
The duration of the studies is four full-time semesters for students mentioned in the third paragraph (1°) of article D. 612-32, one full-time year for those mentioned in the fourth paragraph (2°) of the same article. For those mentioned in the fifth paragraph (3°) of the same article, the training is organized full-time, part-time or alternating.
In all three cases, the training is sanctioned by a national degree called a university degree in technology, mentioning the corresponding specialty and, if applicable, the option followed.
The organization of studies is set by order of the minister responsible for higher education, after the advice of the National Council for Higher Education and Research.
The training provisions of institutes and schools outside universities are set by:
1° The Decree No. 93-1144 of 29 September 1993 relating to the Central School of Lille;
2° The Decree No. 92-378 of 1 April 1992 relating to the Central School of Lyon;
3° The Decree No. 2003-929 of 29 September 2003 relating to the Central School of Marseille;
4° The Decree No. 93-1143 of 29 September 1993 relating to the Central School of Nantes;
5° Articles R. 715-4 and R. 715-6 relating to national institutes of applied sciences;
6° The Decree No. 99-24 of 14 January 1999 creating the University of Technology of Belfort-Montbéliard;
7° The Decree No. 89-442 of 28 June 1989 relating to Compiègne University of Technology;
8° The Decree No. 94-800 of 14 September 1994 relating to the University of Technology of Troyes;
9° The Decree No. 90-928 of 10 October 1990 relating to the Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris;
10° Decree No. 2003-1089 of 13 November 2003 relating to the National School of Textile Arts and Industries;
11° Le Decree No. 2009-1513 of 7 December 2009 relating to the Saint-Etienne National School of Engineers;
12° Decree No. 2006-1545 of 7 December 2006 relating to the National School of Public Works of the State.
The provisions relating to the schooling of pupils in higher normal schools are set by:
1° The Decree No. 87-695 of 26 August 1987 relative to the upper normal school;
2° The Decree No. 2011-21 of 5 January 2011 relating to the Cachan Superior Normal School;
3° The Decree No. 2012-715 of 7 May 2012 setting the rules for the organization and operation of the Ecole Normale Supérieure de Lyon.
The provisions for training in major institutions are set by:
1° The Decree No. 90-909 of 5 October 1990 organizing the College of France;
2° Decree No. 88-413 of 2 April 1988 on the National Conservatory of Arts and Crafts;
3° The Decree No. 90-361 of 20 April 1990 organizing the Central School of Arts and Manufactures;
4° The Decree No. 2006-1546 of 7 December 2006 relating to the School of High Studies in Public Health;
5° The Decree No. 85-427 of 12 April 1985 relating to the School of High Studies in Social Sciences;
6° The Decree No. 87-832 of 8 October 1987 relating to the National School of Charters;
7° The Decree No. 93-1289 of 8 December 1993 relating to the National School of Bridges and Roadways;
8° The Decree No. 2012-1223 of 2 November 2012 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure d'arts et métiers;
9° The Decree No. 92-25 of 9 January 1992 relating to the organization of the National School of Information Sciences and Libraries;
10° Decree No. 2005-1444 of 245 November 2005 on the Practical School of High Studies;
11° Le Decree No. 85-497 of 10 May 1985 relating to the Institute of Political Studies of Paris;
12° Decree No. 2001-621 of 12 July 2001 creating the National Institute of Art History;
13° Le Decree No. 90-414 of 14 May 1990 relating to the National Institute of Oriental Languages and Civilizations;
14° Thearticle R. 211-2 of the Sport Code with regard to the National Institute of Sport, Expertise and Performance;
15° Le Decree No. 90-269 of 21 March 1990 relating to the Institut de physique du Globe de Paris;
16° Le Decree No. 2009-329 of 25 March 2009 creating the Polytechnic Institute of Bordeaux;
17° Le Decree No. 2007-317 of 8 March 2007 relating to the Polytechnic Institute of Grenoble;
18° Le Decree No. 2001-916 of 3 October 2001 relating to the National Museum of Natural History;
19° Decree No. 85-715 of 10 July 1985 relating to the Paris Observatory;
20° Decree No. 2004-186 of 26 February 2004 creating the University of Technology in Organization Science and the Paris-Dauphine decision.
The rules relating to the training of agricultural superior technicians and the training of public agricultural and veterinary higher education are respectively set out in articles D. 811-137 to D. 811-143, R. 812-25 and D. 812-27 to R. 812-56 of the rural code and the marine fisheries.
The teaching of architecture in France meets the requirements of general interest, defined in particular to theArticle 1 of Act No. 77-2 of 3 January 1977 on architecture. He prepares the architect for the exercise of his role in society, in his various areas of competence.
This teaching contributes to the diversification of the professional practices of architects, including in their scientific and research dimensions.
The teaching of the project is at the heart of training and integrates the contribution of other disciplines that contribute to its realization.
Within the framework of the European Area of Higher Education, the teaching of architecture promotes mobility and cooperation programmes of the higher national schools of architecture with other French and foreign higher education institutions.
It allows students and architects to develop a personal training course that meets their aspirations and abilities.
Sections L. 612-1 and L. 612-2, the first paragraph and the first two sentences of the second paragraph of section L. 612-3, sections L. 612-5, L. 612-6, L. 612-7, L. 613-1, L. 613-2 and L. 613-5 are applicable to architectural studies subject to the modifications set out in this section.
For the purposes of this section, the organization and content of architectural studies in initial training and continuing vocational training within the meaning of the provisions of Article R. 672-10, as well as the conditions for obtaining the different degrees to which they are conducting, are fixed by decree of ministers responsible for architecture and higher education. The conditions for obtaining the authorization of the state-owned architect to the exercise of the mastery of work in his own name are fixed by decree of the minister responsible for architecture.
Architecture studies lead to national higher education diplomas called a degree in architecture and a state degree in architecture, conferring respectively the degrees of licence and master's degree, as well as the authorization of the state-owned architect to the exercise of master's degree in his own name.
They may also conduct specialization and deepening degrees in architecture in institutions empowered to do so.
Architecture studies may also include training courses leading to other national degrees of higher education in architecture or in areas close to architecture, under the conditions defined by the regulations specific to these degrees.
Architecture studies are organized in the higher national architectural schools under the supervision of the Minister of Architecture and, where applicable, in other public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character, empowered, alone or jointly, to issue diplomas. This authorization is pronounced after a periodic national assessment, as part of a contract with the State.
Diplomas issued by the National Institute of Applied Sciences of Strasbourg and by the Special School of Architecture may be recognized under the conditions set out in article R. 672-14.
The specialization and deepening diplomas in architecture referred to in Article R. 672-5 may be issued by the City of Architecture and Heritage, authorized for this purpose under the conditions set out in the second paragraph of Article R. 672-14.
In order to prepare the degree of architecture, the state diploma of architect, the authorization of the state-certified architect to the exercise of the master's work in his own name, and the diplomas of specialization and deepening in architecture, any student or architect fulfilling the required conditions may register in the establishment of his choice, within the limits of the capacity of the minister's office,
As part of the validation of the acquired, the registration of the continuing professional training cycles leading to the degree of architecture and the state diploma of architect is subject to a period of prior professional activity in the fields of architecture, construction or development of space, to a professional activity carried out during the training under the authority of an architect or an office of architects and candidates to evaluate the success of the courses
Architecture studies include doctoral training. Graduate national schools of architecture and other public institutions mentioned in article R. 672-7, which are members of doctoral schools accredited to this effect, may be authorized to grant the doctorate in architecture.
The doctoral registration is decided by the director of the Ecole Nationale Supérieure d'architecture or the official of the institution entitled, on the proposal of the director of the doctoral school, after the opinion of the thesis director, in accordance with the provisions regulating doctoral studies.
The authorisation proposals relating to the diplomas referred to in articles R. 672-5 and R. 672-6 and the authorisation proposals relating to the diploma referred to in Article R. 672-11 are submitted for advice to the National Council of Higher Education and Research, with the exception of those relating to the empowerment of the State graduate architect to the exercise of the master's degree in his own name.
Enabling decisions relating to diplomas referred to in the first paragraph of Article R. 672-5 shall be taken by order of Ministers responsible for architecture and higher education, with the exception of those relating to the authorization of the State architect to the exercise of master's work in his own name, which are taken by decree of the Minister responsible for architecture.
Enabling decisions relating to diplomas referred to in the second paragraph of section R. 672-5 shall be taken by order of the Minister responsible for Architecture after notice of the Minister responsible for higher education.
Enabling decisions relating to diplomas referred to in section R. 672-6 and approval decisions relating to the degree referred to in section R. 672-11 shall be taken by order of the Minister responsible for higher education after the Minister's notice of the architecture.
The recognition of the different degrees, defined in the first paragraph of Article R. 672-8, is instructed and decided according to the same procedure as the corresponding authorizations.
Studies, professional experiences or personal achievements can be validated for access at the beginning or in the course of the training cycles leading to the degree in architecture, the state diploma of architect, the ability of the state-owned architect to exercise the master's degree in his own name, as well as to the specialization and deepening diplomas in architecture, under the conditions fixed.
The validation procedure allows to assess the candidate's knowledge, methods and know-how based on the study cycle he wishes to follow in the National Higher School of Architecture.
A candidate can only be admitted to the National Higher School of Architecture which has controlled his ability to follow one of the architectural studies that he or she provides.
With the exception of high-level sportsmen, mentioned to Articles L. 221-3 and L. 221-5 of the Sport Code, candidates who have not completed the baccalaureate or an Equivalence degree must have interrupted their initial studies for at least two years and must be at least twenty years of age at the scheduled date for the resumption of their studies.
Applicants who have been enrolled in an architectural study cycle and who would not have met the knowledge control tests to access the following study year may not apply for validation to be admitted in this study year before a three-year period.
Applicants who hold foreign titles or diplomas may apply for a validation in accordance with the terms and conditions set out in this section and in accordance with international agreements and the provisions relating to the conditions and terms and conditions of registration of students in the higher national architectural schools established by an order of the Minister for Architecture.
Can be used for validation:
1° Any training done by the candidate in a public or private training institution or structure, regardless of the terms, duration and mode of sanction;
2° The professional experience gained during an employee or non-employed activity, or an internship;
3° Knowledge and skills acquired outside of any training system.
The commission for the validation of the studies, professional experiences or personal acquireds existing within each national architecture school is composed of at least five teachers, appointed for two years by the teaching college and researcher of the board of directors and, when the commission decides on the admissions to the various levels of the continuing education in architecture, an equivalent number of professionals outside the institution.
An application for validation may be filed by a candidate with one or more higher national architectural schools. In the latter case, the candidate attached to his or her file a statement on honour stating his or her multiple entries with their order of priority.
The candidate provides a personal file whose content is fixed by the validation commission of studies, professional experiences or acquired personal. It may also be subject to maintenance and knowledge verification tests.
The deadline for submission of applications is set annually by the establishment, so that the registrations of candidates after validation of their acquisitions can be entered on normal dates.
The validation decision is taken by the director of the school on the proposal of the validation commission of studies, professional experiences or personal acquired. The reasoned decision, together with any proposals or advice, is forwarded to the candidate.
Candidates admitted to training may be required to follow additional lessons or to be taught from certain lessons. In all cases, they must proceed with normal registration procedures.
Graduate national schools of architecture prepare an annual report indicating, by training, the number of applications examined, the number of applications that gave rise to a favourable decision, the origin of students and the level of training they were admitted or the reason for the unfavourable decision.
This report is communicated to the Minister for Architecture.
The teaching provisions in national mine schools are set by:
1° The Decree No. 91-1033 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Paris (Mines ParisTech);
2° The Decree No. 91-1034 of 8 October 1991 relating to the École nationale supérieure des mines de Saint-Etienne (Mines Saint-Etienne) ;
3° The Decree No. 91-1035 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines d'Alès (Mines Alès);
4° The Decree No. 91-1036 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Douai (Mines Douai) ;
5° The Decree No. 91-1037 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Nantes (Mines Nantes) ;
6° The Decree No. 93-38 of 11 January 1993 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines d'Albi-Carmaux (Mines Albi-Carmaux);
7° The Decree No. 2012-279 of 28 February 2012 relating to the Mines-Télécom Institute.
For the fulfilment of its mission as defined in Article L. 675-1, the Polytechnic School provides the following higher education:
1° Polytechnical training, which is the subject of articles D. 675-3 to D. 675-18;
2° Training through research, organized by the Polytechnical School alone or in partnership with other French or foreign higher education institutions, to train researchers from the public and private sectors and to give future managers a research experience;
3° Specialized post-graduate training courses, organized by the Polytechnical School alone or in partnership with other French or foreign higher education institutions.
The Polytechnic School welcomes trainings from French and foreign students.
Among these students are qualified as students:
1° Officer students of the Polytechnic School recruited through the competition defined at theArticle 2 of Decree No. 95-728 of 9 May 1995 the conditions for admission to the Polytechnic School;
2° Foreign students admitted to school under the particular category pursuant to Article 5 of the same decree.
Students who follow only part of a graduate cycle are qualified as external free listeners.
The provisions of this section apply only to students of the Polytechnic School.
The training of students admitted to the Polytechnic School consists of two continuous phases:
1° The first phase, common to all students, corresponds to a two-year generalist training involving military training, training in the exercise of responsibilities and multidisciplinary scientific training;
2° The second phase begins with a period of scientific and technical deepening and initiation to the professional life of one year, common to all students. It continues under the conditions defined in articles D. 675-4 and D. 675-5.
Students admitted to a civil or military body of the State complete their education at the Polytechnic School after the year of scientific and technical deepening and initiation to the professional life of the second phase of the training. The duration of their schooling is three years.
Their training is supplemented, if any, by specialized training in professional purpose organized by the State under the conditions defined by the regulations governing each of the relevant civil servants or career officers.
Students who do not integrate the civil and military bodies of the State continue the second phase of the training by a specialization course in scientific, technical and economic sciences, taking one of the following forms:
1° A graduate training specific to the Polytechnic School or organized in bilateral agreements with partner organizations;
2° A graduate degree from French or foreign university or school giving at least the degree of master or its foreign equivalent;
3° A graduate training through research.
The terms and conditions for the execution of the various training courses are defined by the Board of Directors of the Polytechnic School.
The duration of schooling at the Polytechnic School of these students is four years.
Nevertheless, they can be allowed to continue the second phase beyond the duration of the school as a student in order to complete the graduate course in which they are enrolled. French students cannot benefit from an extension of their special commitment as a student officer of the Polytechnic School for such training supplement.
The diplomas that are issued to the students of the Polytechnical School sanction all or part of the curriculum of the polytechnical education:
1° The title of a graduate of the Polytechnical School is issued after the third year of schooling to students who successfully completed the first three years of polytechnical training. Under certain conditions, fixed by the board of directors, students who would not have followed all or part of the first year of schooling may be assigned the title of a graduate engineer of the Polytechnic School;
2° A degree sanctioning the end of the polytechnical training is issued to students who successfully completed the two phases of schooling and who have graduated from the vocational training chosen in accordance with articles D. 675-4 and D. 675-5. The titles corresponding to this degree are defined by the Board of Directors of the Polytechnic School.
The list of graduate engineers from the Polytechnic School and the list of graduate students after the polytechnical training are published in the Official Journal of the French Republic.
A third year pass jury punishes the studies of the first phase of polytechnical training. This jury delibrates all the results obtained by students in each course or type of activity of this first phase.
He decided to include on the list of students admitted in the third year of the polytechnical training those whose results were deemed sufficient.
A fourth year pass jury delibrates all the results obtained by students in each teaching or type of activity since the beginning of their schooling at the Polytechnic School.
He sets out the list of students who applied for admission to a civil or military body of the State, including those whose results are deemed sufficient.
He decides to admit in the fourth year of polytechnical training students whose results are deemed to be sufficient and who are enrolled in one of the graduate courses defined in article D. 675-5.
He sets out the list of graduate engineers from the Polytechnic School.
A student whose results have not been deemed sufficient to continue his or her education may be allowed to redouble a year of study by the Minister of Defence, upon the proposal of the jury concerned, in particular if the insufficient results are attributable to health reasons.
For each student authorized to redouble, the repetition year program is set, according to the recommendations of the jury, by the Director General of the Polytechnical School on the proposal of the Assistant Director General for Education. The jury concerned shall review at the end of the school year the results obtained by the student as part of the program that was set for him. After deliberation, it decides on the basis of these results whether or not to register it on the pass list.
The authorization for repetition of a student in the fourth year of schooling is granted by the Minister of Defence on the proposal of the Director General of the Polytechnic School.
Unless the lack of results is due to health reasons, the authorization to redouble a school year can only be granted once for all polytechnical training.
Students whose results would not have been deemed sufficient to continue schooling and who are not allowed to redouble are removed from the lists of the Polytechnic by decision of the Minister of Defence.
They can only be re-administered in polytechnical training through the competition, subject to the conditions required for admission.
A polytechnical validation jury sets out a list of students or former students to whom the terminal diploma defined in article D. 675-6 is issued, given the documents attesting to each student or former student the success of the vocational training he has chosen.
The composition and procedure of the jury under sections D. 675-8, D. 675-9 and D. 675-14 shall be determined by order of the Minister of Defence.
Students of the Polytechnic School who are candidates for admission to a civil or military body of the State after the third year of schooling are registered in the exit classification table provided for in thearticle 2 of Order No. 58-1136 of 28 November 1958 Act on appointments to civil and military jobs of the State. The classification of students in this table is based on the results obtained during the first three years of their polytechnical training.
Among the examinations of the knowledge of the students during their polytechnical training and the training notes for the exercise of responsibilities and military and sport training, certain tests or grades, known as classification, are used to determine the classification defined in Article D. 675-16. The disciplines giving rise to these tests and notes and the coefficients assigned to each of them are determined by the Minister of Defence on the proposal of the Board of Directors of the Polytechnic School.
In the event of equality in the total points, the student having obtained the best total in the affected disciplines of the highest coefficient is ranked first. If there is still equality, and as many times as necessary, the classification is fixed according to the points obtained in the assigned disciplines of the immediately lower coefficient.
For students who have been allowed to redouble, the results obtained during the unredoubled years and the results obtained during the year that resulted in repetition are taken into account.
If the repetition has been decided for health reasons, then the results obtained during the redoubled year are taken into account.
The diploma of the Inter-Military Military School issued on behalf of the State, sanctioning a undergraduate training in higher education, confers, in full right, on its holders the degree of licence under the conditions laid down in article D. 675-20.
The Inter-Military Military School diploma is subject to a periodic national assessment.
An order of the Minister for Higher Education, made after the Minister of Defence's notice and after the advice of the National Council for Higher Education and Research, sets out the duration during which the degree of licence is awarded.
The provisions for training in other military higher schools are set by:
1° Articles R. 3411-1 to R. 3411-3 and R. 3411-5 of the Defence Code with respect to the Higher Institute of Aeronautics and Space;
2° Articles R. 3411-29 to R. 3411-31 of the same code with respect to the National School of Advanced Techniques;
3° Articles R. 3411-57 to R. 3411-59 of the same code with respect to the Ecole nationale supérieure de techniques avancée Bretagne;
4° The Decree No. 2008-429 of 2 May 2008 on schools and training of the military health service.
The rules relating to training leading to the State degree of social engineering, the State diploma of specialized educator, the State diploma of specialized technical educator and the State diploma of advisor in family social economy, issued by the rectors of academy, are respectively fixed by articles D. 451-17 to D. 451-19-1, D. 451-41 to D. 451-551-5152
R. 451-51-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29, D. 451-29
The rules relating to training leading to the certificate of fitness for the functions of director of institution or social intervention service, issued by the director of the School of High Studies in Public Health on behalf of the State, are fixed by articles D. 451-11 to D. 451-16 of the same code.
The provisions relating to teaching in the schools of the Merchant Navy are fixed by the Decree No. 2010-1129 of 28 September 2010 creating the National Higher Maritime School.
R. 631-17 to R. 631-21, R. 632-1 to R. 632-79, R. 633-17, R. 633-18, R. 633-24 to R. 633-16, R. 633-18, R. 633-18, R. 633-24 to R. 633-18 to R.
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-16, D. 633-24, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D.
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
For the purposes of sections D. 612-24, D. 612-30, D. 612-31, D. 643-6, D. 643-7, D. 643-10, D. 643-15, D. 643-16, D. 643-22 and D. 643-30 to D. 643-32 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, the words "academic rector" are replaced by the words:
For the purposes of the third paragraph of Article D. 612-10, the third and fourth paragraphs of Article D. 612-24 and Articles D. 643-6, D. 643-28 and D. 643-31, the words "academic", "areas, academic technical committee and academic council of national education", "every academy" and "the framework of academy or community"
For the purposes of the fourth paragraph of Article D. 612-24, the words: "Regional Directors of Food, Agriculture and Forestry" are replaced by the words: "Director of Agriculture and Forestry".
Section R. 642-16 is not applicable to Mayotte.
The first paragraph of article D. 612-10 and articles D. 642-14, D. 642-15, D. 642-17 to D. 642-33, D. 643-36 to D. 643-58, D. 651-1, D. 652-1, D. 653-1, D. 674-1, D. 675-1 to D. 675-21 and D. 677-1 are not applicable to May
For the purposes of sections D. 612-24, D. 612-30, D. 612-31, D. 643-6, D. 643-7, D. 643-10, D. 643-15, D. 643-16, D. 643-22 and D. 643-30 in Mayotte, the words "academic rector" and "academic rector" are replaced
For the purposes of the third paragraph of article D. 612-10 and articles D. 643-6, D. 643-28 and D. 643-31, the words "academic", "each academy" and "the framework of an academy or academy group" are replaced by the words "the department".
For the purposes of the third and fourth paragraphs of Article D. 612-24, the words: "areas" and "the Academic Technical Committee and the Academic Council of National Education" are replaced by the words: "the department" and "the Mayotte National Education Council".
For the purposes of the fourth paragraph of Article D. 612-24, the words: "Regional Directors of Food, Agriculture and Forestry" are replaced by the words: "Departmental Director of Agriculture and Forestry".
R. 633-2835, R. 632-79, R. 633-17, R. 633-18, R. 633-24 to R. 633-2835, R. 633-18, R. 633-24 to R. 633-2835, R. 633-18, R. 633-2835
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 631-16, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 612-19, D. 612-42, D. 612-60
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
For the purposes of sections D. 612-30, D. 612-31, D. 643-15, D. 643-16, D. 643-22 and D. 643-30 to D. 643-32 in French Polynesia, the words "academic rector" are replaced by the words "Minister in charge of higher education".
For the purposes of the third paragraph of article D. 612-10 and articles D. 643-28 and D. 643-31, the words "academic" and "academic or academy group" are replaced by the words "community".
The agreement provided for in Article L. 683-3 sets out, inter alia, the rules for the selection of approved internship sites and accredited practice-teachers of universities offered to internal staff and the terms and conditions of their assignment.
Sections D. 636-69 to D. 636-72 are applicable in French Polynesia, subject to the following modifications:
1° The convention provided for in Article D. 636-70 is concluded with the university located in the territory of French Polynesia by the competent authorities of that community;
2° The degree of licence is conferred on behalf of the State by the minister responsible for higher education, who may delegate his signature to the vice-rector.
R. 631-17 to R. 631-21, R. 632-1 to R. 632-79, R. 633-17, R. 633-18, R. 633-18, R. 633-18, R. 633-18, R. 633-2833-24 to R. 632-79, R. 633-18, R. 633-24 to R.
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-16, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-1, D. 633-60
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
For the purposes of sections D. 612-24, D. 612-30, D. 612-31, D. 643-6, D. 643-7, D. 643-10, D. 643-15, D. 643-16, D. 643-22 and D. 643-30 to D. 643-32 in New Caledonia, the words "academic rector" are replaced by the words:
For the purposes of the third paragraph of Article D. 612-10, the third and fourth paragraphs of Article D. 612-24 and Articles D. 643-6, D. 643-28 and D. 643-31, the words "academic", "areas", "of the academic technical committee and the academic council of national education", "every academy" and "the framework of an academy or community"
For the purposes of the fourth paragraph of Article D. 612-24, the words: "Regional Directors of Food, Agriculture and Forestry" are replaced by the words "of the Director of Agriculture and Forestry".
The agreement provided for in Article L. 684-3 sets out, inter alia, the rules for the selection of accredited internship sites and accredited practice-teachers of universities offered to internal staff and the terms and conditions of their assignment.
Sections D. 636-69 to D. 636-72 are applicable in New Caledonia, subject to the following modifications:
1° The agreement under Article D. 636-70 is concluded with the university located in the territory of New Caledonia by the competent authorities of that community;
2° The degree of licence is conferred on behalf of the State by the minister responsible for higher education, who may delegate his signature to the vice-rector.
The university status set out in sections L. 712-1 to L. 712-10 applies to the following scientific, cultural and professional public institutions:
I. ― Universities:
1° Aix-Marseille;
2° Amiens ;
3° Angers ;
4° Antilles and Guyana;
5° Artois;
6° Avignon;
7° Besançon ;
8° Bordeaux-I ;
9° Bordeaux-II ;
10° Bordeaux-III ;
11° Bordeaux-IV ;
12° Brest;
13° Bretagne-Sud ;
14° Caen;
15° Cergy-Pontoise ;
16° Chambéry;
17° Clermont-Ferrand-I;
18° Clermont-Ferrand-II;
19° Corsica ;
20° Dijon;
21° Evry-Val d'Essonne ;
22° Grenoble-I ;
23° Grenoble-II;
24° Grenoble-III ;
25th Meeting;
26° La Rochelle ;
27° Le Havre ;
28° Le Mans ;
29° Lille-I;
30° Lille-II;
31° Lille-III ;
32° Limoges;
33° Littoral;
34° Lyon-I ;
35° Lyon-II ;
36° Lyon-III ;
37° Marne-la-Vallée ;
38° Montpellier-I ;
39° Montpellier-II ;
40° Montpellier-III ;
41° Mulhouse;
42° Nantes ;
43° Nice ;
44° Nîmes ;
45° New Caledonia;
46° Orleans;
47° Paris-I;
48° Paris-II ;
49° Paris-III ;
50° Paris-IV ;
51° Paris-V;
52° Paris-VI;
53° Paris-VII ;
54° Paris-VIII ;
55° Paris-X ;
56° Paris-XI;
57° Paris-XII;
58° Paris-XIII ;
59° Pau;
60° Perpignan ;
61° Poitiers;
62° French Polynesia;
63° Reims ;
64° Rennes-I ;
65° Rennes-II;
66° Rouen ;
67° Saint-Etienne;
68° Strasbourg;
69° Toulon;
70° Toulouse-I;
71° Toulouse-II;
72° Toulouse-III ;
73° Tours;
74° Valenciennes ;
75° Versailles - Saint-Quentin-en-Yvelines.
II. • National polytechnic institutes:
1° Toulouse.
The status of institute and school outside the universities established by articles L. 715-1, L. 715-2 and L. 715-3 applies to the following scientific, cultural and professional public institutions:
1° Ecole Centrale de Lille ;
2° Ecole Centrale de Lyon ;
3° Central School of Marseille;
4° Ecole Centrale de Nantes ;
5° National School of Public Works of the State;
6° Saint-Etienne National Engineering School;
7° École nationale supérieure des arts et industries textiles ;
8° Institut national des sciences applied de Lyon ;
9° Institut national des sciences applied de Rennes ;
10° Institut national des sciences applied de Toulouse ;
11° Institut national des sciences appliqué de Rouen ;
12° Institut national des sciences applied de Strasbourg ;
13° Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris ;
14° Compiègne University of Technology;
15° Université de technologie de Belfort-Montbéliard ;
16° University of Technology of Troyes.
The status of a large institution established by section L. 717-1 applies to the following scientific, cultural and professional public institutions:
1° International Centre for Graduate Studies in Agricultural Sciences;
2nd College of France;
3° National Conservatory of Arts and Crafts;
4° Central School of Arts and Manufactures;
5° High School of Public Health Studies;
6° Graduate School of Social Sciences;
7° National School of Charters;
8° National School of Bridges and Roadways;
9° École nationale supérieure d'arts et métiers ;
10° Ecole nationale supérieure des sciences de l'information et des bibliothèques ;
11° National Maritime Superior School;
12° National veterinary, food and food school, Nantes-Atlantique;
13° High school practice;
14° Group of National Schools of Economics and Statistics;
15° Institute of Higher Education and Research in Food, Animal Health, Agricultural Sciences and the Environment;
16° Institut de physique du Globe de Paris ;
17° Institut des sciences et industries du vivre et de l'environnement ;
18° Institut d'études politiques de Paris ;
19° Institut Mines-Télécom ;
20° Institut national des langues et civilisations orientales ;
21° National Institute of Art History;
22° National Institute of Sport, Expertise and Performance;
23° National Institute of Agricultural Sciences, Food and the Environment;
24° Institut polytechnique de Bordeaux ;
25° Institut polytechnique de Grenoble ;
26° Institut supérieur de l'aéronautique et de l'espace ;
27° Institut supérieur des sciences agronomiques, agroalimentaires, horticoles et du paysage ;
28° National Museum of Natural History;
29° Observatoire de Paris ;
30° University of Lorraine;
31° Université de technologie en sciences des organisations et de la décision de Paris-Dauphine.
The status of French foreign school established by section L. 718-1 applies to the following scientific, cultural and professional public institutions:
1° Casa de Velázquez de Madrid;
2° French School of Athens;
3° French School of Far East;
4° French School of Rome;
5° Institut français d'archéologie orientale du Caire.
The upper normal school status set out in section L. 716-1 applies to the following scientific, cultural and professional public institutions:
1° Superior normal school;
2° Cachan College;
3° Ecole Normale Supérieure de Lyon.
Administrative public institutions carrying out higher education and research missions, including public institutions of scientific cooperation, may, by deliberation of their boards of directors adopted under the conditions laid down in Article L. 711-7, request to benefit from the broad responsibilities and competences in budgetary matters and human resources management referred to in Articles L. 712-9, L. 712-10 and L. 954-1 to L. 954-3 under the conditions set out in the article
These facilities must meet the following two conditions:
1° Provide training leading to the issuance of a degree conferring the degree of master or doctoral degree or issuing one of these diplomas;
2° Place a doctoral school or at least one research unit recognized by the State or be associated with one of them.
Without prejudice to the specific provisions governing guardianship over the acts of the institution in question, the deliberation of the board of directors shall be approved by order of the minister responsible for higher education, the minister responsible for the budget and the guardianship minister(s) of the institution.
The Order is made after an audit to ensure the institution's ability to assume the new responsibilities and competencies conferred upon it.
Only a partnership foundation may be established, under the conditions set out in Article L. 719-13, by the administrative public institutions having, in accordance with the provisions of Article R. 711-7, expanded budgetary and human resources responsibilities and competencies.
The transfer of movable and immovable property provided for in Article L. 719-14 may be granted to administrative public institutions with, in accordance with the provisions of Article R. 711-7, extended budgetary and human resources responsibilities and competencies.
It is operated jointly by the institution's guardianship minister(s), the minister in charge of matters and, where applicable, the emotional minister of the transferred property.
Public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature may, pursuant to section L. 711-1, create subsidiaries and take participation in private corporations or groups.
Where an establishment holds more than half of the shares or shares of the corporation referred to in the preceding paragraph, the corporation is referred to as a subsidiary of the corporation.
The deliberation of the board of directors authorizing the creation of the subsidiary or the taking of participations is subject to the approval of the academy rector, chancellor of universities, and of the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education and the Comptrollership and Corporate Accountant.
The deliberation of the institution's board of directors and its annexes, the list and content of which are determined jointly by the Minister responsible for higher education and the Minister responsible for the budget, are forwarded to the academy rector, university chancellor, and to the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for the institutions directly attached to it, to the Minister responsible for higher education and to the budgetary and departmental auditor. The recipients acknowledge receipt.
Upon the expiration of a period of two months from the date of receipt of the deliberation, the deliberation shall be deemed to be approved, unless the academy rector, university chancellor, or the regional director of public finances or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, the minister responsible for higher education or the fiscal and departmental accountant controller makes known, during that period, his opposition.
Where a recipient requests, in writing, additional information or documents, the recipient shall have a period of one month from the date of receipt of such information or documents to make known, if any, its opposition.
After approval of the deliberation referred to in R. 711-12, an agreement is reached between the establishment and the legal person referred to in R. 711-10. It is approved by the board of directors of the establishment.
This Convention specifies, inter alia:
1° Intakes of any nature made by the establishment;
2° The provision, delegation or possible detachment of staff of the establishment;
3° Where applicable, the premises made by the establishment at the disposal of the legal person referred to in R. 711-10.
Within the limits of available resources identified by the activities defined in the eighth paragraph of section L. 711-1 and by derogation from section R. 719-94 for establishments with expanded responsibilities and competencies, or section R. 719-154 for establishments that do not benefit from expanded responsibilities and competencies, the institution may, subject to the authorization of the Minister responsible for the budget, open a common partnership account with the member The board of directors of the establishment shall deliberate on all decisions relating to this common partner account.
The board of directors of the establishment shall designate one or more natural persons to represent the establishment within the governing bodies of each of the legal persons referred to in R. 711-10.
Each year, these representatives submit to the establishment a report on the activity and management of that legal entity, which specifies, inter alia, the conditions under which the obligations set out in the agreement referred to in section R. 711-13 are fulfilled and, where appropriate, the report of the auditor. This report is the subject of deliberation by the board of directors of the institution. Academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, and the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education and the Departmental Budget and Accountant may be provided with this report.
The representative(s) of the institution shall inform the board of directors of all changes affecting the legal or financial situation of the legal person.
No participation or establishment of a subsidiary may take place if the budget of the public institution with a scientific, cultural and professional character is subject to approval, pursuant to sections R. 719-69 and R. 719-71 for establishments with expanded responsibilities and competencies, or pursuant to sections R. 719-135 and R. 719-137 for establishments with no expanded responsibilities and competencies, or if the result account is found in
The university president is responsible for order and security in the premises and premises assigned as principal to the institution he is responsible for. Its liability extends to the premises made available to the users under section L. 811-1 and to those made available to the personnel in accordance with theArticle 3 of Decree No. 82-447 of 28 May 1982 the exercise of the right to organize in the public service. It is exercised in respect of all public or private services and organizations installed in the above-mentioned premises and premises.
The provisions of this subsection do not impede the application of theArticle R. 6142-17 of the Public Health Code.
The delimitation of the premises and premises assigned as principal to an institution is the subject of a rector's order, Chancellor of the universities. When several universities have their seats inside the same enclosure or use common premises, this decree determines the sharing of responsibilities between the presidents. He can determine who is responsible for maintaining order.
The responsible authority referred to in section R. 712-1 may delegate the powers assigned to it for the maintenance of the order in premises and premises, whether or not separate from the institution's headquarters, either to a non-student vice-president or to a director of a training and research unit, a school or an internal institute, or to the person responsible for a service of the establishment or a public body installed in those premises.
The delegation order shall designate the person who exercises the powers of the beneficiary of the delegation in the event of absence or incapacity of the delegation.
Where the statutes of the institution do not organize the suppleance of the responsible authority, the responsible authority is required to make a decision delegating the powers assigned to it for the maintenance of the order when it is absent or prevented.
The powers granted to the President for the maintenance of the order may be exercised only by an alternate or a delegate of French nationality.
If it is not provided by the establishment's rules of procedure, the responsible authority referred to in section R. 712-1 shall determine the premises within which the directors of an internal training and research unit, school or institute are responsible for carrying out the measures ordered under sections R. 712-2 to R. 712-8.
The rules of procedure or, failing that, the responsible authority referred to in section R. 712-1 sets out the rules relating to access in the premises and premises of the establishment and lists the premises made available to the users or personnel under the conditions set out in section R. 712-1. The conditions for the use of these premises, the conditions for the display and distribution of documents in the establishment and the conditions for the organization of meetings are fixed by the authority responsible for the order, after consultation with the board of studies and academic life, and in respect of the freedoms guaranteed by articles L. 811-1 and L. 952-2, and by the Decree No. 82-447 of 28 May 1982 the exercise of the right to organize in the public service.
The rules of procedure and decisions made pursuant to the preceding paragraphs and section R. 712-4 are advertised in the establishment.
The responsible authority referred to in Article R. 712-1 shall be competent to take any necessary action to ensure the maintenance of the order and may in case of necessity appeal to the public force.
It may resort to personnel responsible for ensuring compliance with regulations and the possible breaches of academic discipline. These personnel shall take an oath before the authority provided for in section R. 712-1 to exercise their duties faithfully.
The authority provided for in section R. 712-1 is competent to institute, on its own initiative or at the request of a Director of Training and Research Unit or of Internal Institutes or Schools, a disciplinary action against staff members or users who have allegedly contravened the legislative and regulatory provisions, the rules of procedure or the decisions taken pursuant to sections R. 712-2 to R. 712-8, or who have allegedly engaged in public actions or actions
In the event of disorder or threat of disorder in the enclosures and premises defined in section R. 712-1, the responsible authority referred to in this section shall immediately inform the lucky rector.
In the cases mentioned in the first paragraph:
1° The same authority may prohibit any person and, in particular, staff members and users of the facility or other services or organizations that are installed in the facility.
This prohibition may not be decided for a period of more than thirty days. However, in the event that disciplinary or judicial proceedings are instituted, it may be extended until the final decision of the seized court.
2° It may suspend lessons, regardless of the form in which they are taught. This suspension may not be pronounced for a period exceeding thirty days.
The Chancellor, the Board of Studies and University Life and the Board of Directors, as well as the officials of the organizations or services installed in the premises, are informed of the decisions made under this section.
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the university, constituted in disciplinary section under the conditions and in accordance with the procedure provided for in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions set out in section R. 232-31.
Excludes the disciplinary regime provided for in sections R. 712-9 to R. 712-46:
1° Teacher-researchers and teaching staff in the university, with the exception of medical and scientific staff in hospital and university centres, subject to the provisions of articles L. 952-21 and L. 952-22;
2° Any University User when he is an author or accomplice, including:
(a) fraud or attempted fraud committed on the occasion of registration, continuous inspection, examination or competition;
(b) From a fact of nature to affect the order or functioning of the university;
(c) A fraud or attempted fraud committed on the occasion of a registration in a private higher education institution where this registration opens up access to a examination of public higher education or fraud or attempted fraud committed in this category of institution or in a university, on the occasion of a examination leading to a national diploma.
Teachers and teachers, the users referred to in (a) and (b) of the 2nd of Article R. 712-10 fall under the disciplinary section of the institution where the facts giving rise to prosecution have been committed. If the institution concerned is separate from that in which the teacher-researcher or teacher performs his or her duties or in which the user is registered, the institution is kept informed of the procedure.
In cases where the facts giving rise to prosecution have not been committed in a public institution of higher education, the competent disciplinary section is that of the institution in which the teacher-researcher or teacher is assigned or, if not, where he or she is primarily performing his or her duties, or in which the user is registered at the time of the commencement of the proceedings.
The users mentioned in c of 2° of Article R. 712-10 fall under the disciplinary section of one of the public institutions of higher education under the supervision of the Ministry of Higher Education whose headquarters is located within the jurisdiction of the academy where fraud or attempted fraud has been committed. This establishment is designated annually by the academy rector.
The Disciplinary Section of the Competent Board of Directors for Teachers and Teachers includes:
1° Six university or personal professors assimilated under theArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, including at least one member of the faculty of universities;
2° Six lecturers or assimilated holders, pursuant toArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities;
3° Three representatives of incumbent staff, exercising teaching functions, from another body of public servants.
The Disciplinary Section of the Competent Board of Directors for Users includes:
1° Two university or personal professors assimilated under theArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, including at least one member of the faculty of universities;
2° Two lecturers or personal assistants assimilated under theArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, holders;
3° A representative of the incumbent staff, exercising teaching functions, belonging to another body of public servants;
4° Five incumbent and five alternate users.
Members of the Disciplinary Sections referred to in 1° of sections R. 712-13 and R. 712-14 are elected to the Board of Directors by and among professors of universities and staff assimilated pursuant toArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities.
The members of the disciplinary sections referred to in 2° of sections R. 712-13 and R. 712-14 are elected to the board of directors by and among the lecturers and assimilated personnel pursuant toArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities.
Members of the Disciplinary Sections referred to in 3° of R. 712-13 and R. 712-14 are elected to the Board of Directors by and among other teachers.
Members of the Disciplinary Section referred to in 4th of Article R. 712-14 are elected to the Board of Directors by and among the users.
The election of the members shall take place by a majority multinominal vote of two towers or, where one seat is to be filled, by a majority single vote of two towers. The vote is secret.
The election of each member is acquired by an absolute majority of the votes cast in the first round, by a relative majority in the second round. In the event of an equal vote, the oldest member is designated.
Users' representatives take rank according to the votes obtained by each of them. The incumbent representatives are those who obtained the most votes. In the event of equal suffrage, the oldest member is designated.
Elected members of the relevant disciplinary section in respect of teachers and teachers may be elected as members of the relevant disciplinary section in respect of users.
The president of each disciplinary section is a professor of universities elected within them by all the teachers-researchers members of the section corresponding to the two-way majority vote. The election is secret.
In the event that the members of the Disciplinary Section called for to elect the President are not all present, the election may only be made if at least half of the professor-researchers members of the Disciplinary Section participate in the election.
The election is acquired by an absolute majority of the votes cast in the first round, by a relative majority in the second round. In the event of an equal vote, the oldest member is designated.
When a disciplinary section includes only one university professor, the university chairs it without an election.
In the event of a provisional incapacity of the president of each disciplinary section, the latter is replaced by an elected alternate at the same time as the president and under the same conditions.
The president of the university cannot sit in a disciplinary section.
When members of the board of directors belonging to one or more of the colleges defined in section R. 712-13 are in a lower or equal number than that provided for in the section to represent these colleges in the disciplinary section, they are ex officio members of that section; the order in which they are called to sit in the judgment formations is determined by drawing of lots made during their designation.
When, after application of the provisions of the preceding paragraph, the staff of the disciplinary section is incomplete, the members of the board of directors belonging to the corresponding electoral college, as defined in section R. 712-13, elect two-way majority vote among the staff members of the same college and exercising in the institution those who are called to complete the disciplinary section.
When the section cannot be completed under the conditions set out in the preceding paragraph, the members of the board of directors belonging to the upper-level colleges, the closest being chosen as a priority, elect two towers from the majority vote among the staff in the establishment and under the incomplete college or, if not, from their own colleges those who are called to complete the disciplinary section.
Where an institution may not constitute its disciplinary section in the event of an inexistence or insufficiency of representation in the establishment of one or more of the colleges defined in section R. 712-13, after application of the provisions set out in the preceding paragraph, members of the board of directors belonging to the incomplete college or, if not, members of the college of higher education elect to the majority vote at two towers of the teachers
The provisions of the preceding article are applicable to members of the relevant disciplinary section in respect of users.
Elected representatives of teachers and teachers on the board of directors shall also elect, according to their respective electoral colleges or by default by the members of the college of higher rank, by a single majority vote of two towers of a member of each of the bodies or categories of teaching staff of the same level, who are not represented in the disciplinary section, among the staff members of the board of directors, or, if not, in other functions
The persons so designated shall sit only in the cases provided for in the second paragraphs of sections R. 712-23, R. 712-24 and R. 712-25.
Members of the board of directors are elected members of the disciplinary sections for the duration of their term. The term of office of the members and the term of the persons referred to in section R. 712-20 designated outside of the board of directors shall end as they represent the users or staff on the expiry dates of the terms of office of the representatives of these categories to the board of directors. These members and persons remain in office until their successors are appointed. Their mandate is renewable.
Members of disciplinary sections other than users who cease to be a member of the Board of Directors for any cause or who may not serve under section R. 712-17 shall be replaced, for the remaining term of office, under the conditions prescribed for their designation.
Persons designated under section R. 712-20 who lose the quality for which they have been chosen shall be replaced, for the duration of the remaining term, under the conditions set out in section R. 712-20.
Users who are members of the disciplinary section who cease to be registered in the institution or belong to the board of directors are replaced, for the duration of the remaining term, by an alternate in the order determined by the number of votes collected in the elections to the disciplinary section. In the event of an equal vote, the oldest member is designated. There is then the appointment of a new alternate, which takes place after those previously elected.
When a user representative is temporarily prevented, one of the alternate representatives determined as stated in the preceding paragraph shall be called upon.
With the exception of the case referred to in the first paragraph of section R. 712-18, members of a disciplinary section are required to sit in the trial proceedings in an order determined by the number of votes collected in the elections to the disciplinary section. In the event of an equal vote, the oldest member is designated. Members appointed pursuant to the second paragraph of section R. 712-21 shall be called to sit after those designated under section R. 712-18.
However, where, in the competent judgmental formations in respect of the personnel referred to in 1° of section R. 712-10, there is no member of the same body or class as the person referred, the last elected member of that college, called to sit according to the order of designation defined in the preceding paragraph, is replaced by a member belonging to that body or class, according to the order of designation referred to above.
The training of the disciplinary section called for prosecutions against a university professor or a member of an assimilated staff or an associate teacher at the same level is composed of six members, namely the president and the other five members mentioned at the 1st of section R. 712-13.
The representative of the body or class, elected pursuant to section R. 712-20, sits in place of one of the members referred to in the 1st of section R. 712-13 when the disciplinary section is prosecuted against a person under that body or class.
The training of the disciplinary section called for prosecutions against a lecturer, a member of an assimilated staff or an associate teacher at the same level is composed of six members, namely the President, two other members mentioned at the 1st of Article R. 712-13 and three members designated at the 2nd of Article R. 712-13.
The representative of the body or class, elected pursuant to section R. 712-20, sits in place of one of the members referred to in paragraph 2 of section R. 712-13 when the disciplinary section is prosecuted against a person under that body or class.
The training of the disciplinary section called for prosecutions against another teacher is composed of six members, namely the president and another member mentioned at the 1st of article R. 712-13, two members mentioned at the 2nd of article R. 712-13 and two members mentioned at the 3rd of article R. 712-13.
The representative of the body or class, elected pursuant to section R. 712-20, sits in place of one of the members referred to in the 3rd of section R. 712-13 when the disciplinary section is prosecuted against a person under that body or class.
No one can sit in the training if there is a serious reason to question his impartiality.
Staff and users who are members of the Disciplinary Section who are referred to the competent training or who are responsible for the complaints or witnesses of the facts that have been prosecuted may not sit in the training provided for in articles R. 712-14 and R. 712-23 to R. 712-25.
Any member of a disciplinary section prevented from performing his duties under the preceding section is temporarily replaced by the member of the same college who obtained the largest number of votes in his election to the disciplinary section. In the event of an equal vote, the oldest member is designated. If the prevented member is a user, it is replaced by a designated alternate as stated in the last paragraph of section R. 712-21.
The disciplinary section is assisted by a secretary made available to it by the president of the university.
Subparagraph 1
The proceedings are brought before the competent disciplinary section:
1° By the president of the university in the cases provided for in Article R. 712-11.
In the event of a failure, the academy rector, Chancellor of the universities, initiates the procedure, upon expiry of one month from the notification of an express request to the competent authority for that purpose;
2° By the academy rector in the case provided for in article R. 712-12;
3° By the minister responsible for higher education when the proceedings are brought against the president of the university.
The Disciplinary Section is seized by a letter addressed to its President. This document mentions the name, address and quality of persons prosecuted and the facts charged to them. He is accompanied by all supporting documents.
Subparagraph 2
Upon receipt of the document referred to in R. 712-30 and the attachments, the Chair of the Disciplinary Section shall forward a copy of it by registered letter, with a request for notice of receipt, to each of the persons prosecuted. If it is a minor, a copy is also sent to persons who exercise parental authority or guardianship in respect of them.
The president informs interested parties that they may be assisted by counsel of their choice and that they may be aware of the file during the course of the instruction.
The President of the Disciplinary Section designates, for each case, an instructional board composed of two members mentioned in 1 and 2 of Article R. 712-13, one of whom is designated as Rapporteur.
If the proceedings involve a university professor or a teacher of the same level, the board of inquiry shall consist of only two members mentioned in the 1st of Article R. 712-13.
If the prosecution concerns a user, the board of inquiry consists of two members mentioned in 1° and 2° of Article R. 712-14 and a representative of the users. In this case, the absence of a member of the duly summoned investigating commission does not hinder the meeting of the commission.
The board of inquiry investigates the matter by all means it deems appropriate to clarify it. She must summon the interested person, who may be accompanied by his defence counsel, to hear his observations. The President shall set a time limit for the filing of the investigation report, which shall include only the statement of facts and the observations made by the authority that initiated the prosecution and those submitted by the person referred. This report is forwarded to the President within a time frame that he has previously established and cannot exceed two months. However, the President may order an instruction supplement if he considers that the case is not in a position to be tried. The report and records are made available to the person referred to and the authority that has initiated the proceedings, their counsel and the training members who are required to judge within the time limit set out in the third paragraph of section R. 712-35.
When the prosecution involves a student in medicine, odontology or pharmacy and the facts incriminated take place on the occasion of the person's participation in hospital activity under the conditions determined by the persons articles R. 6153-1 to R. 6153-91-1 of the Public Health Code, the commission of instruction invites the head of the pole or, if not, the head of the service, the functional unit or any other internal structure to make his observations known. They are also invited to make their comments known to the Director of the Public Health Institution in which the person concerned is affected and, where appropriate, the Director of the Public Health Institution where the facts occurred or, if not, the person in charge of the internship entity.
In the event that the jurisdiction is seized of new elements, the President shall order the reopening of the investigation in the form prescribed in the first paragraph of this article.
The President of the Disciplinary Section sets the date of the trial and summons the competent training.
The Chair of the Disciplinary Section shall summon each of the persons referred to in the trial, by registered letter with a request for notice of receipt, at least fifteen days before the date of the sitting.
The summons refers to the right of persons concerned to present their defence orally, in writing and by the board of their choice.
It sets out the conditions of place and time in which the persons concerned may take or make their counsel aware of the report of instruction and the documents of the record ten frank days before the date of appearance before the trial.
In the absence of the deferred person, the training of judgment shall, if any, assess the reasons for the absence and, if it deems unjustified, continue to sit. In case of unjustified absence, the procedure is deemed contradictory.
Instruction and trial sessions are not public.
Training may only validly deliberate if at least half of the members are present.
The training for users cannot include a number of representatives of users above that of teachers' representatives. In this case, the representatives of the users present are called to sit in an order determined by the number of votes cast in the disciplinary section. On an equal basis, older users are designated.
On the day fixed for the judgment session, the rapporteur or, in the event of his absence, a member of the trial training designated by the president among the teachers-researchers read out the report. The interested person and, if requested, his counsel are then heard in their observations.
If the president considers it necessary to hear witnesses, this hearing will take place contradictoryly in the presence of the interested person and, possibly, his counsel.
Can also be heard, at their request and under the conditions set out in the preceding paragraph, persons who have initiated proceedings under section R. 712-29, or their representative.
The deferred person has the last word.
After the interested party and his counsel withdrew, the president deliberated the matter. Only persons in the form of trial and the secretary have access to the proceedings room. No one can deliberate if he has not attended the entire session.
Members of the Disciplinary Section and the Secretary are required to respect the secrecy of all investigative and judgment operations, including the views expressed in the proceedings.
It shall be held record of the trial proceedings. The minutes should not mention the views expressed during the deliberations.
If several sanctions are proposed in the course of the deliberations, the vote is the first.
All decisions are taken by secret ballot by a majority of the present.
If no sanction collects the majority of votes, the prosecution is considered rejected.
Where the sanction is likely to apply a previous sanction with a stay, the disciplinary section decides on the confusion of sanctions.
The decision must be motivated and the penalty shall take effect only on the day of its notification. It is signed by the chair of the meeting and by the secretary.
The decision is posted inside the facility. The Disciplinary Section may decide that this display will not include the identity and, if applicable, the date of birth of the person who has been sanctioned.
It is notified by the president of the Disciplinary Section to the person against whom the proceedings were brought, to the president of the university and to the rector of the academy.
The notification must mention the remedies and the deadlines that the decision can be contested.
Notification to the interested party shall take place by registered letter with request for a notice of receipt. If it is a minor, notification is also sent in the same form to persons who exercise parental authority or guardianship in respect of the minor.
Disciplinary sanctions against teachers or users are on file with the staff concerned. The blame and the reminder to the order for the first, the warning and the blame for the latter are automatically erased from the file after three years if no other sanction occurred during this period.
Subparagraph 3
The appeal and appeal may be filed before the National Council for Higher Education and Research, adjudicating in disciplinary matters against the decisions of the disciplinary sections of the universities, by the persons against whom these decisions were rendered, by their legal representatives, by the president of the university or by the rector of academy.
The appeal is filed within two months of notification of the decision.
The appeal is sent to the chair of the disciplinary section. The latter shall inform the persons referred to in the third paragraph of Article R. 712-41 in writing and shall forthwith transmit the entire file to the secretariat of the National Council for Higher Education and Research.
The appeal is suspensive unless the disciplinary section has decided that its decision would be immediately enforceable notwithstanding appeal.
It may be instituted, by order of the Minister for Higher Education, a disciplinary section common to several boards of directors where the staff of one of these councils, on the date of the institution of this common section, does not permit the establishment of a disciplinary section and that it cannot be appealed, in sufficient number, to personnel or users of the institution.
When a common disciplinary section is established, the members of the respective boards of directors and the personnel and users of the institutions concerned shall be considered, for the purposes of sections R. 712-9 to R. 712-45, as members of the same board or institution. However, each of the chairs or principals of establishment shall exercise the authority set out in section R. 712-29 and the appeal of the decisions made in respect of personnel and users under its establishment. Similarly, institutions are considered separate institutions for the application of sanctions.
This section does not include provisions made by decree.
University institutes of technology are institutes within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions defined in Article L. 713-9.
The Director shall be elected by an absolute majority of the members composing the board.
The distribution of seats reserved for teachers in the board is determined by the statutes of the institute in accordance with the following rules.
The three categories of staff who are intended to teach in the academic institutes of technology to be represented are teachers-researchers and assimilated within the meaning ofArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines, orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, other teachers and teaching officers. The number of seats reserved for teachers-researchers must be at least one third of the total seats allocated to teachers. The number of seats reserved for teaching officers must be equal to that third party.
The election of teachers representatives is carried out by separate colleges, the first group of university professors, the second is the other teachers-researchers and assimilated within the meaning of theArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Ondotological and Pharmaceutical disciplines, orArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, other teachers and teaching officers, the third the other teachers and the fourth the teaching officers.
The external personalities of the board shall be chosen in accordance with the provisions of Article L. 719-3 and in accordance with the following rules.
The statutes of the institute, adopted by a two-thirds majority of the members in office, elected and appointed, of the council, set the number and distribution of seats reserved for external personalities and the duration, which may not exceed four years, of the term of these personalities. The council must include at least one representative of the local authorities. When the statutes provide for the representation of trade union organizations, representatives of trade union organizations of employers and employees must be equal.
The list of communities, institutions and bodies, public or private, to be represented on the board of the institute is determined by deliberation taken by a majority of two thirds of the members in office, elected and appointed, of the council. It can be modified, before each renewal, in the same forms.
The selected communities, institutions and organizations shall designate the person(s) representing them and the alternates to replace them in the event of an impediment. Representatives holding local authorities must be members of their legislative bodies.
External personalities shall be designated by an absolute majority of the members in office, elected and appointed, of the council.
External personalities, whether designated by institutions, communities or organizations or co-operated by the council, are chosen because of their competence and, in particular, their role in the activities corresponding to the specialties taught at the institute.
The university institutes of technology gather departments that correspond to the specialties taught in each of them. The organisation of these departments is determined by the statutes of the university institute of technology.
Each department is headed, under the authority of the director of the institute, by a head of department selected in one of the categories of staff who teach at university institutes of technology.
The head of department is assisted by a council whose composition is statutoryly fixed.
The appointment of the head of department is pronounced by the director of the institute after favourable advice from the council.
The deliberation of the board of the institute is preceded, under statutory conditions, by consultation with the board of department.
The appointment shall be made for a period of three years, immediately renewable once.
When consulted on recruitments, the board sits in restricted training for teachers, eventually supplemented, according to statutory rules, by other teachers of the institute under the various specialties taught in the establishment or, if necessary, by teachers of other institutions. The Chair of Council then attends the deliberations with an advisory vote.
Institutes of preparation for the general administration are institutes within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions laid down in Article L. 713-9.
Among the external personalities serving on the boards of the institutes are the Director General of Administration and Public Service, the Prefect of the Region and a Director of Regional Institute of Administration appointed by the Minister responsible for the Public Service, or their representatives, and representatives of the local authorities.
The distribution of seats reserved for teaching staff within the board is determined by the statutes in accordance with section L. 719-2 and the following rules:
Electors and Eligible Members of the Faculty of Education in the Institutes of General Administration Preparation, Teachers-Researchers and Non-University External Stakeholders as long as they conduct an effective education of at least 25 annual hours.
For the election of council members, electors are divided into three separate electoral colleges:
1° College of Teachers and Associated Personnel;
2° College of other teachers and researchers;
3° College of non-university external stakeholders.
For the implementation of the activities related to the missions entrusted to the institutes of preparation for the general administration, credits and jobs can be allocated directly to them. These are the subject of agreements concluded by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Public Service with the University.
State administrations and public institutions, territorial authorities and their public institutions may also pass conventions with universities to carry out special training activities for the benefit of their personnel.
Each Institute shall transmit to the Minister for Higher Education and to the Minister for Public Service, no later than October 1 of each year, a report on its activities.
The observatories of the Universe sciences are schools, within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions defined by Article L. 713-9.
External personalities serving on the councils of the Universe's observatories of science include the director of the Universe National Institute of Science or his representative and a representative of the region in which the observatory is located.
The observatories of the Universe sciences provide specific missions and joint missions.
1° Specific missions are:
(a) In the field of astronomy, to contribute to the progress of the knowledge of the Universe through the acquisition of observation data, the development and use of appropriate means, the development of the necessary theoretical tools, in the continuity required to meet the needs of astronomy and its applications;
(b) In the field of geophysics, contribute to the progress of Earth knowledge in the same conditions as above, as well as to the tasks of monitoring and predicting natural phenomena related to the physics of the globe;
(c) In the field of oceanography, to contribute in the same conditions as above to the progress of knowledge as well as to research programs for the exploitation and protection of the ocean environment, from a multidisciplinary perspective.
2° The joint missions are:
(a) To provide the national and international community with services related to their research activities;
(b) To contribute, within the framework of the public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character of which they are part, to the initial and ongoing training of students and to the training of all research personnel;
(c) To contribute to the dissemination of knowledge, particularly among teachers and users of the public service of education;
(d) To implement international cooperation activities.
For the implementation of the activities related to the missions entrusted to the observatories of the Universe's sciences and within the framework of the responsibilities of the National Institute of the Universe Sciences, credits and jobs attributed to the university are assigned directly to them.
The institutes of work are institutes within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions defined in Article L. 713-9. They provide a training and research mission in the social sciences of work. In this context, they contribute to the training of members of trade union organizations, social economy organizations and associations.
The labour institutes are headed by a director elected by a majority of the members of the board.
As a secondary legal officer, the director of institutes shall, on behalf of the institution and on behalf of its unit, pass any contract or agreement to be carried out in the budget of the institute. It may, by delegation of the president of the university, sign contracts and conventions that do not enter into this framework.
External personalities sitting on the boards of the labour institutes include representatives of organizations interested in the development of the activities of these institutes, including those responsible for the workers' education services of trade union organizations, and personalities designated.
The statutes of the institutes define the number and distribution of seats allocated to external personalities, the list of bodies to designate their representatives, and the modalities for the designation and duration of the term of office of personalities.
The election of teacher representatives to the boards of the institutes is carried out by separate colleges under the following conditions:
1° College of teachers and assimilated within the meaning ofArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 relating to the National Council of Universities for Medical, Odonological and Pharmaceutical disciplines andArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities, Associated Teachers or Guests of the same level governed by the Decree No. 91-267 of 6 March 1991 relating to associate or invited teachers in certain higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education;
2° College of other teachers-researchers, assimilated and teachers;
3° College of teaching officers.
Representatives of the first two colleges form at least half of the total number of seats allocated to teachers by statutes.
For each of the colleges, they are electors and eligible for staff who provide at least sixteen annual hours of education in the institute.
When consulted on recruitments, the board of the institute sits in restricted training for teachers, eventually supplemented, according to the statutory rules, by staff of the educational institution or not at the institute or, if necessary, by teachers of other institutions.
Teachers who do not belong to Decree No. 84-431 of 6 June 1984 establishing the common statutory provisions applicable to teachers and researchers and bearing particular status of the body of university professors and the body of lecturers are appointed, in accordance with the regulations in force, after consultation with a commission designated by the board of the institute and composed of teachers and external personalities.
Professionalized university institutes are institutes within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions defined in Article L. 713-9. They provide technological and professional training in public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character.
The establishments authorized to issue the diplomas for these courses set the statutes of the professionalized academic institutes under the conditions set out in articles L. 711-1 to L. 711-9.
The Director of the Professional University Institute is designated under the conditions set out in sections L. 712-2 and below. When the institute is not a component of the institution, the director is appointed by the head of institution among university professors or lecturers.
The director of the professional university institute is assisted by a development council responsible for the monitoring of training. This council is composed, in parity, of teachers and teachers, on the one hand, of qualified personalities because of their professional activity, on the other. The Chief of Institution designates the President of this Council as a qualified personalities.
This subsection does not include provisions made by decree.
The academic polytechnics are:
1° Initial training of engineers, including alternate or learning;
2° Continuous training;
3° Training in research;
4° Development of research and technological innovation;
5° The development of national and international results;
6° Aid for sustainable, economic and industrial development.
These schools contribute to the international policy of their university and to the development of information and communication sciences and technologies, including applied to training.
For the implementation of the tasks entrusted to the academic polytechnic centres, credits and jobs can be allocated directly to a school.
Subject to the provisions of the 8th of Article D. 717-1, the institutes of political studies that do not constitute public administrative institutions referred to in Article D. 719-190 are internal institutes, within the meaning of Article L. 713-1, organized under the conditions defined in Article L. 713-9.
Provisions relating to the missions of political institutes are set out in Article D. 719-191.
This subsection does not include provisions made by decree.
This subsection does not include provisions made by decree.
In order to ensure the reception, orientation and professional integration of students, universities may, in accordance with Article L. 714-1, establish common services to their various components.
They may also, in accordance with Article L. 714-2, create common services for several of them.
These services take the name of university reception services, guidance and professional integration, or interuniversity reception, guidance and professional integration services respectively.
The joint university service has the task of organizing the reception, information and orientation of students to their entry to the university and throughout the university curriculum. He subsequently supervises with teachers their professional integration.
To this end, the joint academic service conducts the following actions:
1° It contributes, in conjunction with the NISEP regional delegations, to the information of future students on university courses;
2° It participates in the development of the university's information policy and thus constitutes a documentation on the training provided by the university. It gathers, in conjunction with the relevant departments and institutions, documentation on studies, professions and vocational integration;
3° It promotes the realization of the orientation mission entrusted to the teachers-researchers of the public service of higher education through this code and Decree No. 84-431 of 6 June 1984 relating to the status of teachers-researchers of higher education and collaborates in research, study and documentary and bibliographic research;
4° It develops, in particular within the framework of university-industrial programs, any action intended to promote the professional integration of students and establishes the necessary relations with the world of professions and employment services. He prepares an annual report on the professional integration of former students.
This report, after being submitted to the Board of Directors, is forwarded by the Board to the Research and Higher Education Evaluation Agency.
The university reception, guidance and professional integration service is created by a decision of the university board after the advice of the board of studies and university life.
The board of directors of the university, taking into account the missions of the other components of the university, shall determine in accordance with the provisions of Article D. 714-2 the missions of the common service and shall determine the statutes of the service.
In the absence of this service, the Board of Directors is responsible for the preparation of the report, referred to in section D. 714-2, relating to the professional insertion of students and the transmission of the latter to the Research and Higher Education Evaluation Agency.
The university reception, guidance and professional integration service is headed by a director selected from among the professor-researchers in practice in the university and appointed by the president of the university, after the advice of the university board. The Terms of Service specify the duration of the Director's term.
The Director of the Service is consulted and may be heard, upon request, by the institution's legislative and advisory bodies on any matter relating to the missions of the Service.
The common service has a clean budget integrated into the institution's budget. The service budget is prepared by the Director, who submits it to the Board of Directors of the University.
The service is provided by the university with the necessary facilities for personnel, premises and equipment.
A convention can be concluded between the State and the university to allocate to the common service specific means in operating credits and jobs to enable the fulfilment of its missions.
At the request of the university and by decision of the rector, policy advisors may, within half of their time of service, contribute to the functioning of the common academic service.
The jobs attributed by the State to the university and assigned by convention to the academic information and guidance cell are transferred to the common service provided for in this section as soon as it was established.
The creation, by statutory deliberation of a common interuniversity service of reception, orientation and professional integration of students, is decided by the boards of directors of the institutions concerned, after the advice of the board of studies and academic life.
The establishment of the service is subject to the conclusion of a convention between the establishments.
The service is headed by a director who must belong to a body of teacher-researchers and be in exercise in one of the institutions parties to the convention.
This service carries out, among other things, all or part of the missions listed in section D. 714-2, with the exception of the preparation of the report referred to in section 4, which is the responsibility of each institution.
A convention may be concluded between the State and the institution of connection to allocate to the common service specific means of operating credits and jobs to enable the fulfilment of its missions.
At the request of the universities concerned and upon the decision of the rector, policy advisors may, within half of their time of service, contribute to the operation of the joint interuniversity service.
Within each university, the reception of foreign students is provided by a common service to the training and research units of this university. When an urban agglomeration has several universities, this reception is provided by a common service to all of these universities. These services take the name of university service of foreign students or interuniversity service of foreign students respectively.
The provisions of this section apply to university centres.
The missions of the university department or the interuniversity service of foreign students include:
1° Inform foreign students of academic and research programs and educational opportunities at the university or university grouping;
2° Examine the knowledge of the French language of foreign students and their ability to follow the lessons they choose;
3° Verify whether the foreign diplomas under which they apply for registration in one or more training and research units may be subject to equivalence for the continuation of the planned studies;
4° Ensuring the implementation, in conjunction with the training and research units concerned, of special initiation courses, to put foreign students at the level of the chosen teachings, as well as French language and civilization courses for foreign students. These courses will be organized in the framework of conventions passed jointly with the Ministry of Higher Education and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs;
5° Ensure the implementation of courses for the training of foreign French language teachers and civilizations. These courses will be organized in the framework of conventions passed jointly with the Ministry of Higher Education and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
When a university service for foreign students is established in accordance with the provisions of this section, within a university, its organization and operation shall be determined by a statute approved by the board of directors and annexed to the statute of the university, in accordance with the provisions of this section.
The university service of foreign students is administered by counsel and headed by a director from one of the categories of higher education staff.
The Director is appointed by the President of the University, on the proposal of the Council of the University Service of Foreign Students. If he is not a member of the service board, the director becomes a member of the service.
The Council of the University Service of Foreign Students includes:
1° The president of the university or his representative, president;
2° The Director of the University Service of Foreign Students;
3° The Director of the Regional Centre for Academic and Academic Works or his representative;
4° The representative in the academy of the organization, responsible for the management of scholarships to foreign students;
5° Elected representatives of the board of directors whose number is determined by the statute referred to in Article D. 714-9; representatives of teachers and students must be in equal numbers;
6° External personalities designated because of their competence by the president of the university, on the proposal of the other members of the service council; their number may not exceed the fifth of the council staff.
The expenses of staff and equipment of the university service of foreign students are charged to the university budget.
When an interuniversity service for foreign students is established in accordance with the provisions of this section, interested universities establish a draft convention to regulate the organization and operation of this common service.
The convention sets out the organization, operation and missions of the interuniversity service of foreign students in accordance with the provisions of this section. It mentions the university in which the department establishes its headquarters and the rights and obligations of the co-contracting universities.
The interuniversity service of foreign students is administered by counsel and led by a director from one of the categories of higher education staff.
The Director shall be appointed by the Chair of the Board on the proposal of the Board. If he is not a member of the service board, the director becomes a member of the service.
The Council of the Interuniversity Service of Foreign Students includes:
1° Presidents of interested universities or their representatives;
2° Director of the Interuniversity Service of Foreign Students;
3° The Director of the Regional Centre for Academic and Academic Works or his representative;
4° The representative in the academy of the agency responsible for the management of scholarships to foreign students;
5° Representatives elected by the councils of the universities concerned and whose number is determined by the convention referred to in article D. 714-13; representatives of teachers and students must be in equal numbers;
6° External personalities designated because of their competence by the chairman of the board, on the proposal of the board; their number may not exceed the fifth of the council staff.
The president of the university in the budget of which the recipes and expenses of the interuniversity service of foreign students are included is chairman of the council.
The personal resources and equipment credits of the interuniversity service of foreign students are charged to the budgets of universities. The convention sets out the allocation of the corresponding appropriations between the budgets of the co-contracting universities. The revenues and expenses of the service are included in the university headquarters budget which approves them.
An order sets out the conditions for the application of the articles of this section in the Paris Academy and the exemptions that may be made to this effect.
The provisions of articles D. 714-7 to D. 714-17 do not alter the missions of the national centre and regional centres of academic and academic works, as defined by articles L. 822-1 and L. 822-2.
Each university organizes, in accordance with the provisions of Article L. 831-1, medical protection for the benefit of its students. To this end, it creates a university service of preventive medicine and health promotion by statutory deliberation of the board of directors which adopts its statutes under the conditions set out in this section.
Several universities can have a common service called the interuniversity service of preventive medicine and health promotion.
Other public higher education institutions also provide their students with the services corresponding to the missions indicated in Article D. 714-21. The performance of these benefits may be contractually entrusted to a university service of preventive medicine and health promotion of their choice, with a contribution to the operating costs set by the Director of the service.
As part of the implementation of the institution policy, the academic or interuniversity services of preventive medicine and health promotion are responsible, in the continuity of the health policy for students, to organize a health watch for the entire student population:
1° By conducting at least one preventive examination incorporating a medical, psychological and social dimension during the first three years of study in higher education;
2° By providing a medical visit to all students exposed to special risks during their curriculum;
3° By contributing to the support and integration of students with disabilities in the institution;
4° By participating in the bodies for regulating hygiene and safety;
5° By initiating and coordinating prevention programs and health education activities, playing a role as a counseling and relay with partners, particularly within the framework of the regional plan defined in theArticle L. 1411-11 of the Public Health Code ;
6° By developing studies and research programs on the health of students with the various actors of academic life, including epidemiological studies.
The services provide the delivery of emergency contraception drugs to students.
In addition, services may, at the initiative of the university or co-contracting universities:
1° To establish a health centre in accordance with the provisions for this purpose;
2° Ensure, on behalf of the national body responsible for the reception of foreigners and migration, the compulsory medical examination provided for by the Labour code for foreign students authorized to stay in France;
3° Contributing, where appropriate means are available, to sports medicine and to personal prevention medicine.
They can also contribute to the organization of emergency and health alert management.
When an interuniversity service for preventive medicine and health promotion is established, in accordance with the provisions of this section, interested universities shall, by agreement, regulate the organization and management of this service. This convention mentions the university in which the service establishes its headquarters, called the university of connection, as well as the rights and obligations of the co-contracting universities.
The University or Interuniversity Service for Preventive Medicine and Health Promotion is headed by an assisted director of a service council.
The Director of the University or Interuniversity Service of Preventive Medicine and Health Promotion is a doctor. He is appointed by the president of the university after notice of the board of directors or by the president of the university of connection of the service, after advice of the boards of directors of the co-contracting universities. He is selected from a special degree in public health and social medicine, or from a special degree in public health or with a qualification in public health. In the absence of a candidate with such diplomas or qualifications, he or she may be appealed to a liberal physician.
Under the authority of the president of the university or the president of the university of connection, the director of the service shall carry out the tasks defined in section D. 714-21 and administer the service.
The Director of the Service is consulted and may be heard upon request by the legislative and advisory bodies of the institution or co-contracting institutions on any issue concerning the protection of the health of students.
He writes the annual report of the activity of the service that will be presented to the board of the department and to the board of studies and university life and transmitted to the president of the university and, if applicable, to the presidents of other co-contracting universities.
The Council of the University or Interuniversity Service of Preventive Medicine and Health Promotion is chaired by the President of the University or his representative, or by the President of the University of Staff or his representative, assisted by the Director of Service and the Student Vice-President of the Board of Studies and University Life of the University or the University of Staff.
The university's board of directors or the boards of directors of the co-contracting universities set out the method of designation, the duration of the term and the number of members of the board of the service. When a member of the board loses the quality under which he or she was appointed, he or she shall be replaced in the same manner for the remainder of the term.
The board shall include, in addition to a physician and a member of the nursing staff performing functions in the service, members appointed from the representatives of technical or social administrative personnel, teachers and students elected to the councils of the university or co-contracting universities. It also includes designated external personalities because of their skills.
The council may, on the proposal of its president, invite any person whom it considers useful to attend its meetings.
The service council is consulted on:
1° The health policy of the institution or institutions associated with the service;
2° The means available to the service, prior to their adoption by the board of directors of the university or by the board of directors of the university of connection of the service;
3° Annual Service Activity Report;
4° Where applicable, conventions linking service to other organizations outside the university, prior to their adoption by the university's board of directors or by the university's board of directors.
The board approves the rules of procedure of the service.
The common documentation services are created, pursuant to section L. 714-1, by statutory deliberation of the board of directors.
A number of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature may, by convention, entrust, pursuant to Article L. 714-2, to the same service, the management of libraries or technical and documentary activities of common interest. The establishment of this inter-institutional service is decided by statutory deliberation of the boards of directors or bodies in lieu of the institutions concerned.
All public services are known as libraries.
By decision of the contracting establishments and in accordance with the regulations in force, services with a legal personality, in particular in the form of a public interest group or public institution, or internal services of another legal entity, in particular in the form of a service of a foundation or a department of research and higher education hub, may be substituted for the inter-institutional service.
Libraries contribute to institutions' training and research activities.
These include:
1° Implementing the university's documentary policy, or contracting institutions, coordinating the corresponding means and evaluating the services offered to users;
2° To welcome users and personnel engaged in their activities in the university, or in the contracting establishments, as well as any other public under conditions specified by the board of the university or the convention for an inter-institutional service, and to organize work and consultation spaces;
3° Acquire, report, manage and communicate information documents and resources on any medium;
4° Develop digital documentary resources, contribute to their production and promote their use; participate in the development of scientific and technical information, including through the production, reporting and dissemination of digital documents;
5° Participate, for users, in research on these different resources as well as in the cultural, scientific and technical activities of the university, or in the contracting establishments;
6° Promote by documentary action and the adaptation of services any initiative in the field of initial and ongoing training and research;
7° Cooperate with libraries that contribute to the same objectives, regardless of their status, including through participation in collective catalogues;
8° Train users in the widest possible use of new techniques of access to scientific and technical information.
The inter-institutional service carries out all or part of the tasks defined in Article D. 714-29, in coordination with the common services of the documentation of the contracting establishments if they exist, and in liaison with regional and national cooperation networks.
Where services are designed to ensure the management, development and conservation of undivided collections between several public institutions, as well as certain documentary activities of common interest, these services respect the particular character and obligations resulting from the conditions under which they were established.
Every university library or documentation centre is designed to be integrated into a common service. This decision is made by the Board of Directors following advice from the Joint Service Council and the Board of the component of the library or documentation centre.
The other university's documentary centres are associated with the common service.
The university's components transmit to the Director any information on documentary acquisitions and access to information funded by the university's budget.
Documentary services belonging to components and services conventionally linked to the university may, under the same terms, be associated with the common service.
Each service is headed by a director and administered by a documentary board.
The Minister responsible for higher education shall appoint the Director of the service on the proposal of the President of the University or the Presidents and Directors of the contracting establishments.
The director is placed under the authority of the president of the university, or of the connecting institution.
He is not eligible for the service council.
The functions of inter-institutional service director are compatible with each other and with those of a common service director of a contracting university.
The Director directs the service and the personnel assigned to it.
It develops the rules of procedure of the service that is approved by the Board of Directors of the University, or the related institution.
It prepares the deliberations of the documentary board, including budgetary matters.
It organizes documentary relations with partners outside the university, or contracting establishments, and prepares, as appropriate, documentation records for the various bodies dealing with documentary problems.
It is consulted and may be heard, at its request, by the legislative and advisory bodies of the university, or by the contracting establishments, on any matter relating to documentation. The Director of an inter-institutional service participates in meetings of the common documentation services of the contracting establishments with an advisory voice. It proposes any measures to promote documentary cooperation between institutions.
He submits an annual report on the documentary policy of the service to the Board of Directors of the University, or the related institution.
The documentary board of a common documentation service includes up to twenty members. The documentary board of an inter-institutional service shall comprise not more than thirty members.
Each board consists of:
1° The president of the university, or the presidents or directors of the contracting establishments, or their representatives;
2° Teachers, teachers or researchers from the university or contracting institutions;
3° University students or contracting institutions;
4° Service staff;
5° Staff of the associated documentary bodies of the university or contracting establishments;
6° External personalities designated by the president of the university, or jointly by the presidents or directors of the contracting establishments, after notice by the Director of the service.
It may also include representatives of any other public of the service under the conditions established by the rules of procedure of the service for a common service of documentation, by the convention for an inter-institutional service.
The documentary council is chaired by the president of the university or his representative. An inter-institutional service is chaired by the head of one of the co-contracting establishments in accordance with the terms and conditions established by the convention.
The term of office of the members of the documentary board is four years, except for the members mentioned in the 3° whose term is two years. It's renewable once.
The members referred to in 2° and 3° shall be appointed by their respective representatives to the board of directors of the university or to the boards of directors of the contracting establishments.
The rules of procedure of the service for a common service of documentation, or the convention for an inter-institutional service, set out the composition of the documentary board and the terms of designation of the members mentioned in 4° and 5°.
The Director of the Service, the Secretary General and the accounting officer of the University or the related institution participate, with an advisory voice, in the meetings of the documentary board.
Any person whose presence is deemed to be useful by the President and the directors of the common services of the contracting establishments, if they exist, shall participate, with an advisory vote, in the meetings of the documentary board.
The rules of procedure of the service define the rules of organization and operation of the documentary board, including the periodicity of its meetings, the rules of quorum, the modalities of deliberations and representation of its members, the modalities of convening, establishing and sending the agenda.
The documentary board decides on amendments to the rules of procedure.
He voted on the proposed budget of the service.
It is kept informed of the documentary credits of the associated documentary organizations and their use.
It is consulted on draft conventions with external bodies related to scientific and technical documentation and information.
It develops proposals with respect to the common documentary policy of the university, or contracting institutions, in particular for its regional aspects.
The documentary board may establish any scientific advisory committee on documentation. It sets out its missions, the modalities for the designation of its members and the functioning of them.
These services are subject to general inspection of libraries. In their respects, the evaluation and advice role is played.
A share of the annual tuition fees paid by the students is allocated to the service's own budget, in accordance with the terms set out by a joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
The service may benefit from any other resources allocated by the university, or by the contracting establishments, or by any other public or private person. These endowments can include means of research.
Staff recruited in the library's scientific, technical and service bodies are designed to implement the documentary policy in all libraries of the institution.
Associate library staff are working together to implement the documentary policy.
When an inter-institutional service is established, the establishments concerned shall, without prejudice to the provisions of articles D. 714-35 and D. 714-37, determine the terms and conditions for the management of that service.
This agreement sets out the scope of activities of the service as well as the establishment within which the service establishes its headquarters, which is called a connecting establishment.
It also provides for the premises and facilities necessary for its operation, including contributions to the expenses of the service and other rights and obligations of the contracting establishments as well as the periodic review of the annual fees set out in Article D. 714-38.
It also provides for the terms and conditions of membership of another higher education or research institution, its duration, the terms and conditions of its express renewal and its denunciation.
In the event of non-conduction or denunciation of the convention, a particular convention between the institutions concerned and the State sets out the modalities for the attribution of the collections.
The agreement shall be transmitted to the guardianship authority of the attachment establishment under the conditions laid down in Article L. 719-7.
In order to ensure in the best possible conditions the organization and animation of physical and sport activities in higher education, universities give a place to these activities in the general educational organization, in particular through the development of programs and schedules, and carry out, in accordance with the provisions of articles L. 714-1 and L. 714-2, the creation of common services to the training and research units of a university. In addition, when an urban agglomeration has several universities, they create common services to several universities for better use.
These services take the name "university service of physical and sport activities" and "interuniversity service of physical and sport activities".
The academic or interuniversity services of physical and sport activities may be linked by agreement with the academic services of physical and sport activities located in another academy agglomeration.
The mission of these services is to establish programs of activity, to inform students and to ensure the smooth running of these activities. In the event that sports facilities are assigned to the university or to the co-contracting universities, they manage these facilities which are open to other users.
When a service of physical and sport activities is established, in accordance with the provisions of this section, within the university, the university receives a comprehensive operating subsidy and a job placement from the Minister responsible for sports.
It may also affect a fraction of its own resources in service.
The organization and missions of the academic service of physical and sport activities are determined by the statutes of the university, in accordance with the provisions of this section.
The service of physical and sport activities is administered by a sports council chaired by the president of the university or independent institution or his representative.
The board includes:
1° Teachers, including representatives of physical and sport education teachers assigned to the university or institution concerned;
2° Students who regularly participate in the sports life of the university or institution in numbers equal to that of teachers;
3° Representatives of the administrative departments of the university;
4° Personalities outside the university, chosen according to their competence by the rector after the advice of the sports council, and whose number cannot be more than one-quarter of the sports council staff.
The academic service of physical and sport activities is headed by a director, chosen from among the professors of physical and sport education assigned to the university or institution.
The Director shall be appointed, on the proposal of the Sports Council, by the President of the University or Institution. He manages the service under the authority of the president of the university.
The sports council prepares the budget for the service of physical and sports activities. This budget is presented to the adoption of the university council by its president.
When an interuniversity service of physical and sport activities is established, in accordance with the provisions of this section, at the initiative of universities, interested universities establish a draft convention to address the management problems of this common service.
The convention sets out the organization and missions of the interuniversity service of physical and sport activities in accordance with the provisions of this section. It determines the university within which the service establishes its headquarters and the rights and obligations of the co-contracting universities.
The university in which the department establishes its headquarters receives a comprehensive operating subsidy and an employment allocation for this service. Co-contracting universities can allocate a fraction of their own resources to interuniversity service.
The interuniversity service of physical and sport activities is administered by a sports council and headed by a director.
The sports council of the interuniversity service of physical and sport activities is chaired by the president of the university, headquarters of the service, or his representative.
It includes:
1° Teachers, including representatives of physical and sport education teachers assigned to co-contracting universities;
2° Students who regularly take part in the sports life of co-contracting universities equal to that of teachers;
3° Representatives of the administrative services of the co-contracting universities;
4° Personalities outside the co-contracting universities, chosen because of their competence by the rector after the advice of the sports council, and whose number cannot be more than one-quarter of the sports council.
The director of the interuniversity service, chosen from among the professors of physical and sports education assigned to the co-contracting universities, is appointed, on the proposal of the sports council, by the president of the university after agreement of the presidents of the universities concerned. He manages the service under the authority of the president of the university of connection.
The service council develops the specific budget of the interuniversity service. This budget is proposed by the president of the university council to join the adoption of the university council.
Orders set the conditions for the application of the articles of this section to the academic and interuniversity services of sports and outdoor activities located in the Paris Academy.
The provisions of this section shall, on the one hand, establish the general provisions allowing higher education to carry out the continuing training mission defined in Article L. 123-3 and, on the other, the specific provisions applicable to universities in accordance with Article L. 714-1. These provisions specify the modalities of cooperation between institutions.
The purpose of the provisions of this section is to allow institutions to carry out the continuing professional training tasks set out in Book III of Part 6 of the Labour Code and to encourage the participation of their various components in these missions, as part of the guidance provided by the Board of Directors.
The conventions to which these institutions are parties take into account the priority orientations of the State and the regions and the needs of the companies.
They are concluded pursuant to Book III of Part 6 of the Labour Code.
The provisions of this subsection apply to all ongoing training activities of public higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education subject to specific regulatory provisions.
Continuous training activities are either the responsibility of each component of the institution, or a specific service, or both.
In the absence of a specific service they may be responsible for the studies.
Any action or group of ongoing training actions has an educational officer who is a teacher or researcher of the institution.
The facilities available to the facility to carry out its ongoing training activities include the staff, equipment and credits available to it. Job opportunities on the resources of continuous training, which are open to finance law, can be attributed to it.
It has the product of professional training conventions, registration fees paid by the beneficiaries of continuous training and subsidies for the development of vocational training.
The board of directors, on the proposal of the president or director of the institution, shall, at a minimum, affect to the continuing training activity the equivalent potential on the one hand to the jobs assigned by the State in that capacity, on the other hand to the staff of the paid staff on the resources of the vocational training, as well as the means provided in the multi-year settlement contracts for the execution of continuing training activities and other specific resources of the ongoing training.
Teachers-researchers are subject to the provisions of the provisions of the provisions of the regulations for the continuing training activities they carry out. Decree No. 84-431 of 6 June 1984 establishing the common statutory provisions applicable to teachers and researchers, and bearing particular status of the body of university professors and the body of lecturers, including articles 3, 7 and 8.
The hours of continuous training in respect of the regulatory obligation to service State personnel, with the exception of those allocated by the State to continuous training, result in a compensatory payment for the benefit of the institution, charged to the resources of continuous training.
This compensation is made in accordance with the provisions of Article L. 713-9.
Staff who participate, beyond their statutory duty of service, in the conclusion and implementation of professional training contracts with other legal persons, may receive compensation within a limit agreed jointly by the Budget Minister and the Minister responsible for higher education. These remunerations are distributed by the officer on the proposal of the training officers. Their cost is charged to the proceeds of the corresponding contracts. These remunerations are exclusive to the award of compensation for additional teachings corresponding to the execution of the same contracts.
Staff who, apart from their main activity, are either responsible for the organization of ongoing training actions, or responsible for the financial and accounting management of these actions may be paid by means of additional work allowances established annually and calculated on the basis of the volume of ongoing training activities of the institution, in accordance with the terms and conditions established by the Minister responsible for the budget and the Minister responsible for higher education.
The cost of these allowances is charged against the resources of the institution's ongoing training.
The benefit of other benefits of other benefits of remuneration does not exclude the allowances referred to in this section.
On the proposal of the president or director of the institution, the board of directors defines the general policy for the pricing of ongoing training actions, taking into account the overall cost of continuous training evaluated each year.
With respect to the initial training cycles open to the public of continuous training, the pricing must be determined in such a way that the additional resources obtained by professional training conventions cover the additional costs of structure and management and the pedagogical costs due to specific educational developments.
Exemptions may be granted by the president or director of the institution to trainees whose training fees are not covered under vocational training. In this case, the trainee concerned must pay a minimum fee set by the board of directors.
The entire cost estimate of the institution's ongoing revenue and training expenses is summarized in a statement of real balance, annexed to the institution's budget and submitted to the approval of the board of directors, which also decides on the financial account of the ongoing training for the previous year.
The Board of Directors determines the common expenses of the institution for ongoing training and the modalities of their funding through the resources of professional training.
In accordance with the provisions of the preceding paragraph, the management and use of the resources of the ongoing training related to the actions organized by the institutes and schools provided for in Article L. 713-9 are governed by the law of the director of the institute or school. The management and use of resources related to other actions may, as the case may be, be centralized or raised from the various units of the institution responsible for ongoing training activities.
Where, over one fiscal year, the resources of continuing education are higher than the direct and indirect costs associated with the ongoing training activity, the remainder can only be allocated to the development of ongoing training activities during the following three fiscal years.
In accordance with Article L. 714-1, the provisions of this subsection set out the conditions under which universities may establish a common service to ensure the development of continuing education and to promote the fulfilment of the tasks set out in Article D. 714-55.
The provisions of this subsection may be extended, with, where appropriate, necessary modifications, to higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education other than universities by deliberation of the board of directors of these institutions.
The Joint Continuing Training Service is created by deliberation of the Board of Directors. Its purpose is to ensure, within the framework of the guidelines defined by the Board of Directors of the University, the functions of common interest necessary to the coherence of the institution's intervention in the field of continuous training.
Its denomination and statutes are arrested by the board of directors.
The joint service is responsible, on the one hand, for an internal action of impulse, advice and organization and, on the other hand, for an external action of relations with partners and public of continuous training.
The common service is for universities the specific service referred to in Article D. 714-57.
The establishment provides the common service of continuous training, for the fulfilment of the missions entrusted to it, with a budget and the means necessary for personnel, premises and equipment.
The common service budget is one of the elements of the state referred to in section D. 714-63. The expenses that the institution supports under the common service are part of the common expenses of the ongoing training.
The Joint Continuing Training Service is headed by a Director appointed by the University President following advice from the Board of Directors. The Director may be assisted by an advisory board.
The statutes of the common service specify the duration of the director's mandate. It is renewable in its functions.
The director is responsible for conducting the common service action.
This includes:
1° It prepares the budget of the continuing training service, which it submits to the approval of the board of directors;
2° He teaches professional training conventions submitted for signature by the president of the university;
3° He may receive from the president of the university mission to represent the university to the bodies and external partners of the vocational training;
4° Under the authority of the president of the university, he organizes and develops the relations of the university with these bodies and external partners in conjunction with the various components of the institution;
5° He reports to the Board of Directors of the Joint Continuing Training Service and prepares the documents that must be sent to the various administrative authorities each year.
Higher education institutions coordinate their ongoing training activities at the academic and regional levels.
The regional centres of the National Conservatory of Arts and Crafts are associated with this coordination under conditions established by decree.
The presidents and directors of the institutions may jointly appoint a representative to promote the ongoing training activities of higher education with the competent professional training bodies at the academic and regional levels.
Pursuant to Article L. 714-2, it may be created in the field of continuous training a common service to several public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character.
The decision to establish a common service at several establishments is subject to the conclusion, by the boards of directors of the institutions concerned, of a limited-term, revolving agreement, setting the conditions of operation of the common service.
The agreement provided for in the previous article includes the missions to the common service, the connection establishment, the contribution of each institution to the operation, the rules of organization and operation, the terms and conditions of appointment of the director or manager of the common service, and, where applicable, the authorities to be established.
Pursuant to Article L. 714-1, the provisions of this section set out the conditions for the establishment by universities of a common service responsible for the development of the training of teachers and other trainers.
These provisions may be extended, if necessary, with necessary modifications, to public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature other than universities by deliberation of the board of directors of these institutions.
The joint university training service for trainers is created by deliberation of the board of directors of the university that determines its name and status.
Its purpose is to ensure, within the framework of the guidelines defined by the Board of Directors, the organization and coordination of the interventions of the institution in the areas of the initial and continuing training of all masters of national education and that of other trainers. It promotes the development and promotion of research in education, training and teaching disciplines. It contributes to the dissemination of its results.
The common service is responsible for:
1° Impulse, advice and organisation within the facility;
2° An action of relations with partners and external bodies, particularly in the academy, concerned by the evolution of training of trainers and research in education, training and teaching of disciplines.
The joint university training service of trainers is headed by a director, teacher-researcher, appointed by the president after advice from the board of directors. The Director may be assisted by a guidance board on terms and conditions established by the statutes.
The statutes of the common service specify the duration of the director's mandate.
The Director is responsible for leading the common service.
This includes:
1° It is responsible for the presentation and development of the institution's operations for the missions under section D. 714-74, in conjunction with the various components of the institution;
2° It prepares the budget of the common service that it submits to the approval of the board of directors;
3° He may receive from the president of the university mission to represent the university to the bodies concerned by the training of trainers and research in education, training and teaching of disciplines, especially with academic missions to the training of national education staff.
4° The Director of the Joint Service prepares an annual report to the Board of Directors on the activities organized by the university as part of the duties set out in section D. 714-74. This report is forwarded to the Minister for Higher Education.
Pursuant to Article L. 714-2, it may be established a training service for the common trainers at several public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character.
The decision to establish a common service at several establishments is subject to the conclusion by the institutions concerned of a limited-term, revolving agreement, setting the operating conditions of the common service.
This agreement specifies, among other things, the missions to the common service, the linking establishment, the contribution of each institution to the operation of the service, the rules of organization and operation, the terms of appointment of the Director of the Joint Service and, where appropriate, the bodies to be established.
General services governed by this section shall not be carried out by the components listed in Article L. 713-1 or other common services.
The general services of the university are headed by a director. The Director may be assisted by an advisory body.
The general services of the university are created by deliberation of the board of directors of the university, which adopts its statutes.
The statutes of the general services of the university determine the activities of the university, the terms and conditions of designation and the duration of the term of office of the director, and, where applicable, the composition, powers and terms and conditions of operation of the advisory body.
Several universities may, under the conditions laid down in Article L. 714-2, have in common the same general service. Interested universities regulate by agreement the organization and management of this service.
This convention mentions the missions at the service, the university in which the service establishes its headquarters, called the university of connection, as well as the rights and obligations of the contracting universities. It further specifies the terms and conditions for the appointment of the Director of this service, the duration of its mandate, and, where appropriate, the composition, powers and operating procedures of the advisory proceeding.
The Director prepares the University's General Service budget proposal.
When the statutes of the General Service provide that they have an advisory body, the advisory body shall be deliberated on their budget.
The provisions of this subsection set out the conditions for the creation, organization and operation of the common service responsible for ensuring, within each university, the operation of its industrial and commercial activities.
The common service governed by the provisions of this section is referred to as "industrial and commercial activity service".
The joint service is responsible for managing all the industrial and commercial activities of the university that are not provided by a company or group, including:
1° Negotiate and ensure the execution of industrial and commercial agreements and conventions;
2° Valorize and operate patents, licences, intellectual or industrial property rights and research;
3° Make facilities, materials and means available to business creators or young businesses under the conditions set out in articles D. 123-2 to D. 123-7;
4° Manage publishing activities;
5° Manage leases and commercial rentals;
6° Manage other university business activities.
This service also offers the president of the university, as part of his relations with the economic and industrial world, a development policy. To this end, it is developing a project for the pricing of industrial and commercial benefits.
The Industrial and Commercial Business Department is created by deliberation of the University's Board of Directors in accordance with Article L. 711-7.
The statutes of this service are adopted by deliberation of the board of directors taken by a majority of the members composing the board. They define, inter alia, the duration of the Director's mandate and the composition, skills and operating procedures of the Service Council when it is created.
The service is headed by a director. The Director may be assisted, if any, by counsel.
The Director of the Service is appointed by the President of the University, following advice from the Board of Directors. Under the authority of the University President, the Director administers the service.
In this context, it exercises the following skills:
1° He has authority over staff assigned to the service;
2° It prepares the proposed annexed budget of the service, its amendments and reports on its implementation to the board of directors;
3° It prepares an annual report on the university's industrial and commercial policy, which is presented to the Board of Directors.
For the exercise of the duties and activities carried out at the service, the university has a budget attached to the university's budget and means of personnel, premises, credits and equipment.
A common service to a number of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature, established pursuant to section L. 714-2, may be responsible for the operation of industrial and commercial activities, where these institutions have not entrusted the operation of their own industrial and commercial activities.
The common industrial and commercial activity service at several establishments is created by deliberation of the board of directors of each institution in question, in accordance with section L. 714-2.
The decision to establish this service is subject to the establishment's preliminary conclusion of a limited-term agreement, tacitly renewable.
The agreement, submitted for approval to the board of directors of each institution, specifies, among other things, the activities entrusted by the establishments at the service, the establishment of connection of the service, the contribution of each institution to the operation of the service and the terms and conditions for the distribution of the result of that service between the participating establishments.
The service is headed by a director. The Director may be assisted, if any, by counsel.
The terms and conditions of designation of the Director, the terms and conditions of operation of the service, the composition, skills and operating procedures of the service board, when created, are defined by the agreement referred to in Article D. 714-90.
The Director shall, inter alia:
1° He has authority over staff assigned to the service;
2° It prepares the proposed budget annex to the service, its amendments. He reports on his execution to the boards of directors;
3° It prepares an annual report on the industrial and commercial policy of the service, which is presented to the boards of directors.
The provisions relating to central schools referred to in Article L. 715-1 are set by the following decrees:
1° Ecole Centrale de Lille : Decree No. 93-1144 of 29 September 1993 relating to the Central School of Lille;
2° Ecole Centrale de Lyon : Decree No. 92-378 of 1 April 1992 relating to the Central School of Lyon;
3° École Centrale de Marseille : Decree No. 2003-929 of 29 September 2003 relating to the Central School of Marseille;
4° Ecole Centrale de Nantes : Decree No. 93-1143 of 29 September 1993 relating to the Central School of Nantes.
The national institutes of applied sciences, below referred to as INSA, are public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature to which the status of an outside institute applies to universities defined in Article L. 715-1.
National institutes of applied sciences are:
1° Institut national des sciences applied de Lyon créé par la Act No. 57-320 of 18 March 1957 creating a national institute for applied sciences in Lyon;
2° Institut national des sciences appliqué de Rennes créé par le Decree No. 61-1302 of 29 November 1961 establishing national institutes of applied sciences in Rennes and Toulouse;
3° Institut national des sciences appliqué de Toulouse créé par le Decree No. 61-1302 of 29 November 1961 establishing national institutes of applied sciences in Rennes and Toulouse;
4° Institut national des sciences appliqué de Rouen créé par le Decree No. 85-719 of 16 July 1985 creating a national institute of applied sciences in Rouen;
5° Institut national des sciences appliqué de Strasbourg créé par le Decree No. 2003-191 of 5 March 2003 creating the National Institute of Applied Sciences in Strasbourg.
INSA's mission is the initial and ongoing training of high-qualification engineers for all industries, scientific and industrial research laboratories and public services. They contribute to the training of trainers and in the ongoing training of senior technicians. They provide training in research that are sanctioned by clean diplomas or doctorates and other national graduate degrees that they are entitled to issue.
INSA conducts fundamental and applied research activities in the scientific and technical fields. They contribute to the valorization of the results achieved, the dissemination of scientific and technical information and international cooperation in the field of their competence.
The Director of an INSA can delegate his signature to the Secretary General, the Executive Committee members and the heads of services and centres.
The terms and conditions for the admission of students to INSA and the common conditions of education and the issuance of the engineering degree are set out in sections L. 613-1 to L. 613-4, by the Minister responsible for higher education, after consultation with the board of directors of the institutions.
A joint INSA admission service, managed by an inter-INSA board of admissions, can be created by deliberation of the boards of directors of these institutions.
The Inter-INSA Admissions Commission defines the organization and operation of the common service.
It also prepares the procedures for the functioning of the boards of admission.
It includes, for each INSA, the director and four teacher representatives appointed for three years by the board of directors after advice from the board of studies.
It designates its president for a period of three years, renewable.
It is convened by its president at least once a year or at the request of a quarter of its members or the director of an INSA.
The Secretary General, the head of the schooling service of each INSA and the head of the Joint Admissions Service attend the meetings of the Inter-INSA Commission.
An INSA Coordinating Committee is established with the task of proposing joint actions and monitoring and evaluation. It includes the Chair of the Board of Directors, the Director and a representative of the three boards of each institution. It is presided over by each of the INSA presidents, appointed on a rotational basis by drawing, for a term of two years.
It meets on the convocation of its president. Secretaries General attend meetings.
The provisions on universities of technology are set by the following decrees:
1° University of Technology in Belfort-Montbéliard: Decree No. 99-24 of 14 January 1999 creating the University of Technology of Belfort-Montbéliard;
2° Compiègne University of Technology: Decree No. 89-442 of 28 June 1989 relating to Compiègne University of Technology;
3° University of Technology of Troyes: Decree No. 94-800 of 14 September 1994 relating to the University of Technology of Troyes.
The provisions relating to other schools or institutes outside the meaning of Article L. 715-1 are as follows:
1° Institut supérieur de mécanique de Paris : Decree No. 90-928 of 10 October 1990 relating to the Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris;
2° École nationale supérieure des arts et industries textiles : Decree No. 2003-1089 of 13 November 2003 relating to the National School of Textile Arts and Industries;
3° Saint-Etienne National Engineering School: Decree No. 2009-1513 of 7 December 2009 relating to the Ecole Nationale d'Engines de Saint-Etienne.
The provisions concerning the National School of Public Works of the State are fixed by the Decree No. 2006-1545 of 7 December 2006 relating to the National School of Public Works of the State.
The provisions of articles R. 712-1 to R. 712-8 relating to the security of property and persons shall apply to the establishments referred to in articles D. 715-1, D. 715-3, D. 715-9, D. 715-10 and D. 715-11.
For the purposes of these provisions, the words "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the director of the institution".
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the institute or school constituted in disciplinary section under the conditions and procedure set out in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions set out in section R. 232-31 and the provisions applicable to the establishment referred to in section D. 715-11.
For the purposes of sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, the words "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the director of the institution". For the purposes of R. 712-10, the words "university" and "university" are replaced by the words "institution".
The provisions relating to higher normal schools referred to in Article L. 716-1 are set by the following decrees:
1° Upper normal school: Decree No. 87-695 of 26 August 1987 relative to the upper normal school;
2° Cachan College: Decree No. 2011-21 of 5 January 2011 relating to the Cachan Superior Normal School;
3° École Normale Supérieure de Lyon : Decree No. 2012-715 of 7 May 2012 setting the rules for the organization and operation of the Ecole Normale Supérieure de Lyon.
The provisions of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-8 apply to the establishments referred to in section D. 716-1 subject to the specific regulatory provisions of those establishments, and subject to the following reservation: The words: "the president of the university" are replaced by the words: "the head of institution".
In the establishments referred to in section L. 716-1, the consultation of the Board of Studies and University Life under the second paragraph of R. 712-5 is, unless otherwise provided by the statutes, replaced by that of the Board of Directors.
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the school constituted in the disciplinary section under the conditions and procedure set out in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions set out in section R. 232-31 and the exemptions in force in the establishments referred to in section D. 716-1.
For the purposes of sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, the words "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the head of institution". For the purposes of R. 712-10, the words "university" and "university" are replaced by the words "institution".
The provisions relating to major institutions under the supervision of the Minister for Higher Education are set out in the following decrees:
1° Collège de France : Decree No. 90-909 of 5 October 1990 establishing the College of France and decree of May 24, 1911 regulating the College of France;
2° Observatoire de Paris : Decree No. 85-715 of 10 July 1985 relating to the Paris Observatory;
3° Conservatoire national des arts et métiers : Decree No. 88-413 of 22 April 1988 relating to the National Conservatory of Arts and Crafts;
4° National Institute of Eastern Languages and Civilizations: Decree No. 90-414 of 14 May 1990 relating to the National Institute of Oriental Languages and Civilizations;
5° National School of Charters: Decree No. 87-832 of 8 October 1987 relating to the National School of Charters;
6° Central School of Arts and Manufactures: Decree No. 90-361 of 20 April 1990 organizing the Central School of Arts and Manufactures;
7° School of Higher Education: Decree No. 2005-1444 of 24 November 2005 relating to the practical school of high studies;
8° Institut d'études politiques de Paris : Decree No. 85-497 of 10 May 1985 relating to the Institute of Political Studies of Paris;
9° École nationale supérieure d'arts et métiers : Decree No. 2012-1223 of 2 November 2012 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure d'arts et métiers;
10° Institut de physique du Globe de Paris : Decree No. 90-269 of 21 March 1990 relating to the Institut de physique du Globe de Paris;
11° Ecole des hautes études en sciences sociales : Decree No. 85-427 of 12 April 1985 relating to the School of High Studies in Social Sciences;
12° Ecole nationale supérieure des sciences de l'information et des bibliothèques : Decree No. 92-25 of 9 January 1992 relating to the organization of the National School of Information Sciences and Libraries;
13° Université de technologie en sciences des organisations et de la décision de Paris-Dauphine : Decree No. 2004-186 of 26 February 2004 creating the University of Technology in Organizational Science and the decision of Paris-Dauphine;
14° Institut polytechnique de Grenoble : Decree No. 2007-317 of 8 March 2007 relating to the Polytechnic Institute of Grenoble;
15° Institut polytechnique de Bordeaux : Decree No. 2009-329 of 25 March 2009 creating the Polytechnic Institute of Bordeaux;
16° University of Lorraine: Decree No. 2011-1169 of 22 September 2011 creating the University of Lorraine.
The provisions relating to large institutions under the joint supervision of ministers responsible for higher education and one or more other ministers are set by the following decrees:
1° National Museum of Natural History, under the joint supervision of ministers responsible for higher education, research and the environment: Decree No. 2001-916 of 3 October 2001 relating to the National Natural History Museum.
2° National Institute of Art History, under the joint supervision of ministers responsible for higher education, research and culture: Decree No. 2001-621 of 12 July 2001 creating the National Institute of Art History;
3° High School of Public Health Studies, under the joint supervision of ministers responsible for higher education, research, health and social affairs: Decree No. 2006-1546 of 7 December 2006 relating to the School of High Studies in Public Health;
4° National Institute of Agricultural Sciences, Food and the Environment, under the joint supervision of ministers responsible for higher education and agriculture: Decree No. 2009-189 of 18 February 2009 creating the National Institute for Agricultural Sciences, Food and the Environment (AgroSup Dijon).
The provisions relating to large institutions under the supervision of the Minister for Agriculture are set out in the following decrees:
1° Institut des sciences et industries du vivre et de l'environnement (Agro Paris Tech): Decree No. 2006-1592 of 13 December 2006 creating the Institute of Life and Environment Sciences and Industries (Agro Paris Tech);
2° Centre international d'études supérieures en sciences agronomiques (Montpellier Sup Agro) : Decree No. 2006-1593 of 13 December 2006 establishing the International Centre for Graduate Studies in Agricultural Sciences (Montpellier Sup Agro);
3° Institut supérieur des sciences agronomiques, agroalimentaires, horticoles et du paysage (Agro campus Ouest) : Decree No. 2008-616 of 27 June 2008 creating the Higher Institute of Agricultural, Agri-Food, Horticultural and Landscape Sciences (Agro campus West);
4° Institute of Higher Education and Research in Food, Animal Health, Agricultural Sciences and the Environment (Vet Agro Sup): Decree No. 2009-1641 of 24 December 2009 creating the Institute for Higher Education and Food Research, Animal Health, Agricultural Sciences and the Environment (Vet Agro Sup);
5° National veterinary, food and food school, Nantes-Atlantique (ONIRIS): Decree No. 2009-1642 of 24 December 2009 creating the National Veterinary, Agri-Food and Food School, Nantes-Atlantique (ONIRIS).
The provisions relating to the National School of Bridges and Roads, a large institution under the supervision of the Minister of Equipment, are set by the Decree No. 93-1289 of 8 December 1993 relating to the National School of Bridges and Roads.
The provisions relating to the Higher Institute of Aeronautics and Space, a large institution under the supervision of the Minister of Defence, are fixed by the Articles R. 3411-1 to R. 3411-28 of the Defence Code.
The provisions relating to the National Higher Maritime School, a large institution under the supervision of the Minister for the Sea, are fixed by the Decree No. 2010-1129 of 28 September 2010 creating the National Higher Maritime School.
The provisions relating to the National Institute of Sport, Expertise and Performance, a large institution under the supervision of the Minister for Sport, are set by the Articles R. 211-1 to R. 211-18-6 of the Sport Code.
The provisions relating to the Group of National Schools of Economics and Statistics, a large institution under the supervision of the Minister for Economics, are fixed by the Decree No. 2010-1670 of 28 December 2010 relating to the Group of National Schools of Economics and Statistics.
The provisions relating to the Mines-Télécom Institute, a large institution under the supervision of ministers responsible for industry and electronic communications, are set by the Decree No. 2012-279 of 28 February 2012 relating to the Mines-Télécom Institute.
The provisions of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-8 are applicable to the major establishments referred to in sections D. 717-1 to D. 717-9, subject to the specific regulatory provisions of those establishments, and subject to the following reservation: "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the head of institution".
In these institutions, the consultation of the Board of Studies and University Life under the second paragraph of section R. 712-5 is, unless otherwise provided by the statutes, replaced by that of the Board of Directors.
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the large institution constituted in disciplinary section under the conditions and procedure set out in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions set out in section R. 232-31 and the exemptions in force in the establishments referred to in sections D. 717-1 and D. 717-2, of the extension of the establishments
For the purposes of sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, the words: "the president of the university" are replaced by the words: "the head of institution". For the purposes of R. 712-10, the words "university" and "university" are replaced by the words "institution".
French schools abroad are public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character subject to the provisions of this Code and to the texts taken for its application subject to the exemptions provided by the Decree No. 2011-164 of 10 February 2011 relating to French schools abroad.
French schools abroad are placed under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education who exercises, in their regard, the skills assigned to the rector of academy, chancellor of universities, by this code and the texts taken for its application.
French schools abroad are:
1° French School of Athens;
2° French School of Rome;
3° French School of Far East;
4° Institut français d'archéologie orientale du Caire ;
5° Casa de Velázquez de Madrid.
In geographical areas and scientific areas defined inArticle 3 of Decree No. 2011-164 of 10 February 2011 on French schools abroad, French schools abroad have the task of developing basic research on the ground and training in research.
They define and implement a scientific research policy that they value by publishing and disseminating their work.
They provide researchers with their documentary resources. They promote access to other sources and archives that are in their areas of influence.
They are a place of exchange between French and foreign researchers and contribute to the radiance of French science.
They collaborate with French or foreign research or higher education organizations and contribute to international scientific cooperation.
They recruit members under the conditions set out in articles 19 to 22 of the aforementioned decree of 10 February 2011.
They welcome, for the continuation of their work, students and, within the framework of the scientific programmes, researchers, research teachers and scientific personalities, under the conditions provided for in articles 25 and 26 of the decree of 10 February 2011 mentioned above.
The provisions of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-8 apply to the establishments referred to in section R. 718-1, subject to the specific regulatory provisions of those establishments, and subject to the following reservation: "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the director of the school".
In these institutions, the consultation of the Board of Studies and University Life under the second paragraph of section R. 712-5 is, unless otherwise provided by the statutes, replaced by that of the Board of Directors.
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the French school abroad constituted in the disciplinary section under the conditions and procedure set out in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions set out in section R. 232-31 as well as the exemptions in force in the institutions referred to in section R. 718-1.
For the purposes of sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, the words "the president of the university" are replaced by the words "the director of the school". For the purposes of R. 712-10, the words "university" and "university" are replaced by the words "institution".
The provisions of sections D. 719-2 to D. 719-40 set out the conditions for the exercise of the right of suffrage, the composition of the electoral colleges and the modalities of assimilation and level equivalence for the representation of staff and students on the advice of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character, as well as the procedure for appeal against elections.
The provisions of sections D. 719-1 to D. 719-40 shall apply to all public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature subject to this Code, subject to special provisions to certain institutions, taken under articles L. 716-1, L. 717-1, L. 718-1 and the fourth paragraph of Article L. 719-2.
The president of the university or the director of the institution is responsible for organizing the elections.
For all organizational operations, it is assisted by an advisory electoral committee comprising representatives of staff and users and whose composition is determined by the statutes or the rules of procedure of the institution.
Appeals against elections are lodged before the electoral control committee referred to in Article D. 719-38.
For the election of members of the boards of training and research units and, subject to the regulations provided for in the last paragraph of section L. 719-2, members of the boards of internal institutes and schools, electors of the different categories are divided into the electoral colleges on the following grounds:
I. ∙ For teachers, teachers and researchers, the composition of electoral colleges is based on the following:
College A of qualified teachers and staff includes the following categories of personnel:
1° Professors of universities and professors of associate or invited universities;
2° Professors of universities-patients and associate professors of universities or guests in medical or odontological disciplines;
3° Staffs of other bodies of higher education, assimilated to teachers by the decrees provided for in theArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 amended on the National Council of Universities or theArticle 5 of Decree No. 87-31 of 20 January 1987 amended on the National Council of Universities for Medical, Odonological and Pharmaceutical Disciples and Associated Teachers or Guests of the same level governed by the Decree No. 91-267 of 6 March 1991 amended on associate or invited teachers in certain higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education;
4° Researchers of the level of research directors of public scientific and technological institutions or any other public or recognized public research institutions, and researchers performing similar functions;
5° Contractual agents recruited pursuant to Article L. 954-3 to perform teaching, research or teaching and research functions of the level of staff mentioned in 1°, 2°, 3° and 4° above.
The researchers mentioned in the 4th above may constitute a separate college as long as the electors of this category represent at least 10% of the staff of the College A staff.
College B of other assimilated teachers, teachers and staff includes staff not mentioned above, including:
1° Teachers-researchers or assimilated teachers and associate or invited teachers who do not belong to College A;
2° The teaching officers defined in Article L. 952-1;
3° Other teachers;
4° Researchers from public scientific and technological institutions or from any other public institution, or recognized as public research utility;
5° Scientific staff of libraries;
6° Contractual agents recruited under Article L. 954-3 to perform teaching, research or teaching and research functions that do not belong to College A.
Separate colleges may be established for the teaching officers mentioned in 2° above, for the researchers mentioned in 4° above, or for the scientific staff of the libraries mentioned in 5° above, when the electors of one of these three categories represent at least 10% of the staff of the staff of College B.
The P College of Personnel involved in the practical training of second- and third-cycle medical students includes hospital practitioners responsible for services where practical training is provided to students in the second and third cycles of medical studies.
II. ― For users, the college includes students regularly enrolled in the institution.
It also includes people receiving ongoing training and listeners.
III. ― For administrative, technical, labour and service personnel, the College includes engineering, administrative, technical, labour and service personnel, library staff other than library scientists, and social and health services personnel.
It also includes members of engineering bodies, technical staff and research administration.
For the election of members of boards of directors and boards of studies and academic life, the electors of the different categories are divided into the electoral colleges on the following basis:
I. ― Teachers, professors and similar staff, on the one hand, other teachers-researchers, teachers and similar staff, on the other hand, are divided between colleges A and B in accordance with the terms defined in section D. 719-4, I.
II. ― For users, the College includes the persons referred to in Article D. 719-4, Part II.
III. ― For administrative, technical, labour and service personnel, the College includes the personnel referred to in Article D. 719-4 III.
For the election of members of the scientific councils, the electors concerned are divided into electoral colleges whose composition is fixed on the following bases.
I. ― The composition of the staff electoral colleges is based on:
1° College of Teachers and Associated Personnel: These staff are grouped according to the terms defined for College A in I of Article D. 719-4;
2° College of staff authorized to conduct research that does not fall within the previous categories;
3° College of staff with a doctorate other than university or exercise not belonging to previous colleges; these staff may either constitute a single college or be divided into two separate colleges, comprising the teaching staff, on the one hand, the other staff concerned, on the other hand, as long as the electors entering each of these two categories represent at least 10% of the staff with such a doctorate;
4° College of Other Research Teachers, Teachers, Researchers and Associated Personnel;
5° College of Engineers and Technicians not belonging to previous colleges;
6° College of Other Personnel: This College includes all personnel referred to in section D. 719-4 not belonging to previous colleges.
II. ― For users, the College includes the persons referred to in the II of Article D. 719-4 following a postgraduate training under Article L. 612-7.
No one can take part in the vote if he is not on an electoral list.
The president of the university or the director of the institution establishes an election list by college. Registration on the lists of electors is made ex officio for students based on registrations made with the relevant services of the institution.
Personnel and users whose registration on the lists of electors is subject to an application on their part must have made this application no later than five frank days before the date of the election, in the forms fixed by the president of the university or the director of the institution.
The lists of electors are posted in all locations of the establishment concerned by the election at least 20 days before the election date.
Requests for correction of these lists are addressed to the president of the university or the director of the institution, who decides on these claims.
Any person who meets the conditions to be an elector, including, where appropriate, that of having applied for the elector under the conditions set out in the last paragraph of section D. 719-7, and whose name is not on the list of electors of the college to which he or she reports, may request the president of the university or the director of the institution to have his or her registration, including the election day. In the absence of an application made by the day of the election, it may no longer contest its lack of registration on the list of electors.
The Electoral Operations Control Board referred to in Article D. 719-38 examines the disputes relating to the transactions described in this section.
Receipts in the corresponding colleges are the incumbent teacher-researchers and teachers who are assigned to an activity position in the unit or institution, or who are detached or made available to it, provided that they are not on long-term leave.
Receiving teacher-researchers and teachers who do not meet the conditions set out in the preceding paragraph, but who perform duties on the date of the vote in the unit or institution, are electors provided that they conduct a number of teaching hours at least equal to one-third of the reference teaching obligations, valued on the academic year as defined by the institution, and that they apply.
Contractual agents recruited by the institution for an indefinite period to perform teaching or teaching and research functions are electors provided that they perform in the unit or establishment a number of teaching hours at least equal to the third of the reference teaching obligations, valued on the academic year as defined by the institution.
Other non-registrant teachers are electors provided that they are in office on the date of the election, that they perform in the unit or establishment a number of hours of teaching at least equal to one-third of the basic teaching obligations, valued on the academic year as defined by the institution, and that they apply.
Teachers referred to in the three preceding paragraphs who carry out their teaching activities in several training and research units and who do not fulfil in any of these units the number of hours of teaching required to be electors are allowed to exercise their right to vote in the unit of their choice.
Teachers who benefit from a discharge of teaching service or a discharge of service activity or a leave for research or thematic conversions are electors in the establishment where they are assigned to an activity position or received in detachment or made available, in their attachment unit or, if not, in the unit of their choice, in the corresponding colleges.
No one can exercise his right to vote for the election of the boards of units more than twice.
For the election of the Board of Directors, the Scientific Council and the Board of Studies and University Life, no one can have more than one vote.
Staff in College A referred to in 3° I of section D. 719-4 are electors in the unit or facility where they fulfill their service obligations.
P College staff defined in section D. 719-4 are electors in the corresponding college, subject to their request.
Researchers from public scientific and technological institutions or any other public institution, or recognized as public utility, research, as well as members of engineers, technical staff and research administration are electors in the corresponding colleges, provided that they are assigned to a research unit of the scientific, cultural and professional public institution. Is considered as a research unit of the establishment the unit that is attached to it as its principal basis under the multi-year contract referred to in Article L. 711-1.
Contractual research staff performing teaching or research functions in public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character shall be electors provided that their teaching activities are at least equal to one-third of the basic educational obligations, in accordance with the provisions of Article L. 952-24.
With the exception of those recruited for an indefinite period, the personnel referred to in the previous paragraph must also apply for registration on the list of electors to be electors.
The scientific staff of the libraries are registered on the lists of electors of their college, subject to being assigned to the position of activity in the institution, or to be detached or made available to them, and not to be on long-term leave.
The scientific staff of the libraries serving in an inter-institutional documentary cooperation service vote in the connection establishment of this service. They only take part in the elections referred to in articles D. 719-5 and D. 719-6. The scientific staff of the libraries serving in a common documentation service only participate in the elections referred to in articles D. 719-5 and D. 719-6.
Electors in the colleges of users are people regularly registered for the preparation of a diploma or competition, having the quality of students.
Also electors in these colleges are those who receive continuous training, provided they are enrolled in a training cycle of a minimum of one hundred hours and run for a period of not less than six months and are in training at the time of electoral operations, and are requested to do so.
Auditors are also electors, provided that they are regularly registered in this capacity, that they follow the same training as students and that they apply.
Students recruited under section L. 811-2 are electors in these colleges at the institution in which they are registered.
Each user can only be an elector in a training and research unit, unless he is registered in a unit, institute or school on a list established by decree allowing him to vote in another unit.
Registrants in the College of Administrative, Technical, Workers and Service Personnel who are assigned to the position of activity in the establishment or who are detached or made available to it, subject to long-term leave.
Non-registrant officers are eligible to be assigned to the establishment and not to be on unpaid leave for family or personal reasons. They must also be in office at the election date for a minimum period of ten months and provide at least one half-time service.
Personnel engineers, administrative, technical, workers and service in a joint interuniversity service vote in the establishment of connection of this service. They only take part in the elections referred to in articles D. 719-5 and D. 719-6.
The engineering, administrative, technical, labour and service personnel in the internal common services or in the central departments of the university are involved only in the elections referred to in articles D. 719-5 and D. 719-6.
No one may be an elector or eligible in the college of students if he or she belongs to another college of the institution.
Personnel who belong to two colleges – other than those of the students – of two training and research units of the same university are allowed to vote in both units.
Electors who cannot vote personally have the opportunity to exercise their right to vote by an agent, giving them a written power to vote in their place and place.
The agent must be registered on the same list as the principal. No one can carry more than two mandates. The agent must present, as the case may be, the student card or the justification for the professional quality of his or her mandate.
Eligible in the college of which they are members all electors regularly registered in the lists of electors in accordance with articles D. 719-7 to D. 719-17.
The president of the university or the director of the institution verifies the eligibility of the candidates. If he finds their ineligibility, he requests that another candidate be substituted for the ineligible candidate.
The Electoral Operations Control Board referred to in Article D. 719-38 examines the disputes relating to the transactions described in this section.
No one can be elected to more than one university board of directors.
The members of the councils are elected by the list vote at one turn to the proportional representation with the distribution of the remaining seats to be filled according to the rule of the strongest remains, without dressing.
For the election of the representatives of the professor-researchers and the staff assimilated to the board of the university, in each of the colleges, it is assigned to the list that obtains the most votes a number of seats equal to half of the seats to be filled or, in case the number of seats to be filled is odd, the entire number immediately greater than half of the seats to be filled. The other seats are distributed among all lists to the proportional representation of the strongest remains.
For each user representative, an alternate shall be elected under the same conditions as the holder.
The election of the members of the scientific council shall take place by majority vote in a tower when there is only one seat to be filled for a specific college.
The number of votes assigned to each list is equal to the number of ballots collected by each of them.
The number of votes cast is equal to the total of votes collected by all lists.
The electoral quota is equal to the total number of votes cast divided by the number of seats to be filled. For the election of user representatives, the electoral quota is equal to the total number of votes cast divided by the number of seats of incumbent members to be filled.
Subject to the provisions set out in the second paragraph of Article D. 719-20, it shall be assigned to each list as many seats as the number of its votes shall contain the electoral quota.
For the election of user representatives, each list is entitled to as many seats as the number of votes collected by it contains the electoral quota. An alternate is elected with each elected member.
The seats not distributed by application of the preceding provisions are allocated successively to the lists that contain the strongest remains.
When a list has obtained a lower number of votes than the electoral quota, the number of votes remains.
When several lists have the same rest, the seat returns to the list with the largest number of votes. If the lists in question collected the same number of votes, the seat shall be assigned by lot.
When the number of seats assigned to a list exceeds the number of candidates nominated by this list, the seats exceeding that number are not allocated. A by-election was then held.
The seats are assigned to the candidates according to the order of presentation of the list.
For the election of the representatives of the users, for each list, the number of seats obtained by the user shall be taken within the limit of the number of seats obtained by the user in the election of the holders, and the election of an equal number of alternates, in the order of presentation of the candidates from the list. Each alternate member so designated associates with a member in the order of presentation of the list.
When a staff representative loses the quality for which he or she was elected or when his or her seat becomes vacant, he or she is replaced, for the remaining term of office, by the candidate of the same list immediately after the last elected candidate. In the event of impossibility, a partial renewal is carried out.
When a user representative loses the quality for which he or she was elected or when his or her seat becomes vacant, he or she is replaced, for the remainder of the term to be run, by his or her alternate who becomes a holder. When the seat of an alternate representative becomes vacant for any cause, it shall be assigned, for the remainder of the term, to the first of the unelected candidates of the same list. Where the vacancy of a incumbent representative may no longer be filled in the order of presentation of the list pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph, a partial renewal shall be effected.
When there is a single seat to be filled for a particular college as part of a partial renewal, the election shall take place by majority vote in a tower. For the election of a user representative, the declaration of nomination of each candidate to a holder's seat is, in the shortest possible time, accompanied by the declaration of nomination of the candidate to the alternate seat associated with him.
Nominations are mandatory. Lists of candidates must be sent by registered letter or filed with the president of the institution, with acknowledgement of receipt.
The lists must be accompanied by a declaration of application signed by each candidate. Lists may be incomplete, candidates are ranked in preferential order. The lists of candidates are composed in view of the objective of balanced representation between men and women.
For the election of representatives of professor-researchers and assimilated staff to the board of directors of the university, each list of candidates shall ensure the representation of the major training sectors taught in the university concerned defined in Article L. 719-1. The lists may be incomplete as long as they have at least half of the seats to be filled. A list of university professors and assimilated staff and a list of lecturers and assimilated staff may be associated with an institution project.
For the election of user representatives, candidates must provide a photocopy of their student card or failing a school certificate. The list includes a maximum number of candidates equal to double the number of seats of eligible members. The lists may be incomplete as long as they have at least half of the number of incumbent and alternate members to be filled. For the election to the university's board of directors, each list ensures the representation of at least two of the major training areas taught in the university concerned.
Applicants who file lists may specify their membership or support on their application statements and programs. The same details are on the ballot papers.
The deadline for the filing of lists of candidates may in no case be more than fifteen frank days or less than two frank days before the date of the ballot.
Public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature ensure strict equality between the lists of candidates, particularly with regard to the distribution of the sites reserved for the electoral display, and, where appropriate, meeting rooms and all the electoral materials they make available to them.
The president of the university or the director of the institution addresses to the electors of the College of Users the professions of faith either electronically, when all electors of the college have an email address assigned by the institution, or by post. To this end, the professions of faith are transmitted by the lists of candidates who wish it to the president of the university or to the director of the institution, within the time and in the manner determined by the latter.
During the voting period, propaganda is allowed in the university buildings, with the exception of the rooms where polling stations are installed.
Each polling station consists of a president, appointed by the president of the institution among the permanent, teachers and administrative, technical, workers and service staff of the establishment and at least two assessors.
Each list in attendance has the right to propose an assessor and an alternate assessor designated among the electors of the college concerned. If, for any reason, the number of assailants so proposed, excluding alternate assessors, is less than two, the president of the establishment himself designates these assessors among the electors of the college concerned.
If, for any reason, the number of assailants so proposed, excluding alternate assessors, is greater than six, the office may be composed of six assessors designated by random draw among the proposed assessors.
The office provisionally decides on the difficulties that arise in the electoral process.
His decisions are motivated and must be recorded in the minutes.
Each polling station has one or more isoloirs. There must be an urn per college. The polling station checks the ballot boxes that must be closed at the beginning of the poll and remain closed until it is closed. When the election period exceeds one day, a person designated for this purpose by the president of the university or the director of the institution shall be publicly sealed on the ballot box every day at the close of the polling stations. The seals are deposited under the same conditions at the reopening of the offices.
Throughout the electoral process, a copy of the electoral list remains on the table around which the polling station sits.
This copy is the starting list.
The electoral envelopes as well as ballots constituted by the lists of candidates are placed, in each office, at the disposal of the electors, under the responsibility of the polling station.
The ballots must be identical in colour for the same college. They can be handwritten.
The vote is secret. The passage through isoloir is mandatory.
Each elector puts in the ballot box his ballot before being introduced into an envelope.
The vote of each elector is recorded by its signature affixed to ink on the bootlist in front of its name.
Subject to the provisions of the fourteenth paragraph of Article D. 719-21, each elector shall vote for a list of candidates.
Each elector can vote only for a list, without delisting or adding names and without changing the order of presentation of candidates.
Any bulletin established in ignorance of any of these conditions shall be void.
Are considered null:
1° Bulletins with a number of names higher than the number of seats to be filled;
2° White ballots;
3° The ballots in which voters have been recognized;
4° Bulletins found in the urn without envelope or in non-regulatory envelopes;
5° Bulletins written on paper of a different colour than the one that was selected for the college;
6° Bulletins or envelopes bearing internal or external recognition signs;
7° Bulletins including names of individuals who have not made an application.
If an envelope contains several ballots, the vote is null when the ballots have different lists. Multiple ballots count only for one when they designate the same list.
The office designates a number of deputy returning officers from among the electors who must be at least three. If several lists are in attendance, they are allowed to designate the deputy returning officers respectively.
The remains are public.
The number of envelopes is checked from the opening of the urn. If their number is different from that of the start, reference is made to the report.
The blank and void ballots are annexed to the minutes as well as the non-regulatory envelopes and countersigned by office members. Each of the attached bulletins must mention the causes of the annexation.
At the end of the electoral process, each polling station shall produce a report to the president of the university or the director of the institution.
The president of the university or the director of the institution proclaims the results of the election within three days of the end of the electoral process. The results of the election are immediately posted on the premises of the establishment.
It is established in each academy, at the initiative of the rector, one or more electoral control boards, chaired by a member of the administrative tribunals and administrative appeals courses, active or honorary, designated by the president of the administrative tribunal in whose jurisdiction the institution is located. When the judge is assigned to an administrative court of appeal, his or her appointment may only be made with the prior agreement of the president of the court.
The commission is composed, in addition to its president, of at least two assessors chosen by the latter and a representative designated by the rector.
It meets at the headquarters of the administrative tribunal in which it is established, or at a place designated by the chair of the commission.
The Electoral Operations Control Board shall exercise the powers set out in articles D. 719-8 and D. 719-18.
The Electoral Operations Control Board is aware of all the challenges presented by the electors, by the president of the institution or by the rector, on the preparation and conduct of the voting operations, as well as on the proclamation of the results of the election.
It is seized no later than the fifth day after the proclamation of results.
She must decide within fifteen days.
The Electoral Control Board may:
1° Find the ineligibility of a candidate and substitute the following candidate for the same list for the ineligible candidate;
2° Rectify the number of votes obtained by the lists or candidates;
3° In the event of an irregularity in which the vote is to be taken, cancel the election operations of the college in which the irregularity was observed.
The non-observance of the provisions contained in sections D. 719-22 to D. 719-36 does not result in the invalidity of the electoral process, since it is established that it was intended or a consequence of impairing the sincerity of the ballot.
Every elector and the president of the institution and the rector have the right to invoke the irregularity or invalidity of the electoral operations before the territorially competent administrative tribunal.
This remedy is admissible only if it has been preceded by a pre-appeal before the electoral control board.
The administrative court must be brought before the sixth day after the decision of the supervisory board.
The Administrative Court shall rule within a maximum of two months.
Sections D. 719-42 to D. 719-47 set out the terms and conditions for the designation of external personalities referred to in section L. 719-3, subject to specific regulatory provisions.
The statutes state:
1° The number of external personalities called to sit on the councils;
This number must respect the proportions relating to the participation of outside personalities in the various councils where the particular law or decrees provide for them;
2° The distribution of seats between the categories of external personalities, determined in accordance with the proportions defined in Article D. 719-43;
3° Based on this distribution, the list of territorial authorities, institutions and bodies whose representatives sit on the councils and the number of their representatives;
4° The duration of the mandates of external personalities and the mode of designation by these councils of those serving in their personal capacity. The term of office may not exceed four years.
In the absence of specific regulatory provisions, not less than 50% and not more than 80% of seats are divided among the following categories of external personalities:
1° External personalities designated by territorial authorities;
2° Representatives of economic activities, including professional organizations and consular chambers, trade union organizations of employers and employees, and organizations in the social economy sector. The representatives of the union organizations of employers and employees are equal;
3° The rest of the statutory workforce is:
(a) Representatives of scientific and cultural associations, major public services and, possibly, lessons learned from the first and second degree;
(b) Personalities designated by the boards.
The number of representatives of the same organization or organizations of the same object may not exceed one-quarter of the statutory staff of external personalities.
It cannot be derogated from the principle of parity between representatives of trade union organizations of employers and employees.
An outside personality may not sit in the same institution in more than one of the boards provided for in articles L. 712-3, L. 712-5 and L. 712-6.
Territorial authorities, institutions and organizations, on the list established in accordance with the provisions of Article D. 719-42, shall designate the person(s) representing them and the alternates to replace them in the event of an impediment.
Representatives holding local authorities must be members of their legislative bodies.
When these individuals lose the quality for which they have been called to represent these institutions or organizations, they designate new representatives.
Researchers, teachers, researchers and non-teachers in the institution and students enrolled in the institution cannot be designated as external personalities.
The proceeds of the tuition fees paid by the students are allocated in recipes to the budget of public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature in which the students register.
The beneficiaries of a higher education grant granted by the State and the pupils of the Nation are, in full right, exempted from the payment of tuition fees for the preparation of a national diploma or the title of a graduate engineer, in public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character under the Minister responsible for higher education.
In addition, the same exemption may be granted to students who apply for it because of their personal situation, including refugees and jobless workers.
Exemption decisions are made by the president of the institution, in accordance with general criteria established by the board of directors and within 10% of the students enrolled, not including the persons referred to in section R. 719-49.
Public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character with broad budgetary responsibilities and competencies under the conditions set out in section L. 712-8 are subject to the budgetary, financial and accounting regime defined in sections R. 719-52 to R. 719-112 and, to the extent that the latter is not derogated from the provisions of headings I and III of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 relating to public accountancy.
The approved budget of the establishment, as set out below by "budget", consists of the main budget as well as, where applicable, the annexed budget of the Industrial and Commercial Activities Service and a budget per academic foundation.
It includes an annual project of performance and documents and tables for the monitoring of jobs, multi-year investment programmes and the remains to be realized on research contracts.
The resources of the institution allocated to the activity of the research units, complemented by the extrabudgetary resources provided by partner organizations, particularly within the framework of units formed with them, are reflected in an information document attached to the budget that distinguishes:
1° The facility's contributions to its own units;
2° The facility's contributions to formed units with partners;
3° The contributions of the partners.
I. ― The main budget, the annex budget and the budget of each foundation shall be prepared in accordance with provisions of Article 175 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
The terms and conditions for the first paragraph are defined by a joint order of the Minister for Budget and the Minister for Higher Education.
II. ― Credits are presented by crossing the destination and nature of each expenditure. The distribution of credits by nature distinguishes:
1° The envelope dedicated to staff expenses that is accompanied by:
(a) a limit of authorization for all jobs paid by the institution;
(b) From a ceiling of employment fixed by the state of employment financed by the state;
2° The envelope of operating credits excluding staff costs;
3° The envelope of investment credits.
III. ― The Minister responsible for higher education determines the nomenclature of spending destinations, consistent with the actions of the departmental programs that finance them and the nomenclature of submitting revenues. Within each expenditure destination, subdivisions may, as appropriate, be created, or approved for foundation budgets, by the board of directors.
The annual project of facility performance presents the objectives pursued. It includes indicators of efficiency, effectiveness and quality of the public service of higher education defined in Article L. 123-3 associated with these objectives. These indicators, which are consistent with those of departmental programs in which institutions report, contribute to the information of the Board of Directors and departmental program managers and to the monitoring of the multi-year settlement contract.
The annexed budget of the Industrial and Commercial Business Service provides, in revenue and product, the resources derived from its industrial and commercial activities, including:
1° Products and revenues of industrial and commercial agreements and conventions, in particular contracts for research, testing, studies, analysis, advice and expertise on behalf of third parties;
2° Products and revenues from the exploitation of patents, licences, intellectual or industrial property rights and research;
3° Products and revenues of service services that contribute to the valuation of research defined by regulation;
4° Products and recipes of publishing, leases and commercial rentals and other commercial activities.
It retraces expenses and expenses:
1° Personnel costs for the operation and operation of the service;
2° Participation in the common expenses of the establishment;
3° Operating and equipment costs and, in general, all expenses or expenses required for the operation and conduct of the service activities.
The fiscal year is the calendar year.
The budget appropriations do not create any fees under the following budget.
However, the Coordinator may defer to the fiscal year all or part of the credits for the annual unexecuted portions of the multi-year investment programs and ongoing multi-year research contracts.
The amount of deferrals is reported to the Board of Directors on the occasion of the first budget change in the fiscal year.
The budget describes all revenues and expenditures and all expenses and products.
Revenues from the establishment with a specified destination are retained.
The balance of the budget is appreciated in terms of the respective balances:
1° Main budget;
2° From the annexed budget;
3° From the budget of each foundation under the conditions set out in articles R. 719-194 to R. 719-205.
The balance of the main budget, the annex budget and the budget of each foundation is achieved at the level:
1° The table showing the financial balance resulting from the budgetary balance of the revenue forecasts and payment credits, and cash transactions;
2° Forecast result account;
3° From the forecast state of the evolution of the recognized rights heritage situation.
The budget is considered in real balance when the following four conditions are met:
(a) The table presenting the financial balance, the forecast result account and the forecast state of the evolution of the heritage situation are each balanced;
(b) Revenues and expenses as well as products and expenses are assessed in a sincere and sustainable manner;
(c) The amount of staff costs shall not exceed the annual payroll allowance of the State plus its own operating income;
(d) The resources in the table with the financial balance, excluding borrowing revenues, allow to cover the capital reimbursement of borrowing annuities to echo during the fiscal year.
In order to achieve real balance, the board of directors may authorize a levy on the establishment's working capital for the financing of investment transactions.
For the same purposes, the board of directors may be authorized to withdraw from the reserve of the institution by the rector of academy, chancellor of universities, or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, by the minister responsible for higher education for the financing of other operations.
The terms and conditions for the application of sections R. 719-59 to R. 719-61 may be determined by joint order of the Minister responsible for the budget and the Minister responsible for higher education.
The credits in the main budget are limited by envelope referred to in R. 719-54.
The appropriations in the annexed budget and a foundation's budget are assessed.
Subparagraph 1
The budget is prepared under the authority of the president or director of the institution in accordance with the priorities and orientations defined by the board of directors in accordance with the provisions of the multi-year settlement contract.
To this end, a debate is held at the Board of Directors on the general directions of the budget for the year as well as on the ongoing and planned multi-year commitments.
On the proposal of the president or director of the institution, the board of directors shall determine the internal procedure for the development of the budget, including the terms and conditions for the association of the various components, in accordance with the competences assigned to the scientific council in respect of the credits of research, the provisions of Article L. 719-5 and Article L. 713-9 relating to the internal institutes and schools.
The budget proposal is communicated by the president or director of the institution to the rector of academy, chancellor of universities, or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, to the minister responsible for higher education, at least 15 days before his presentation to the board of directors of the institution.
The budget and its annexes shall be voted by the board of directors of the establishment, or by the organ taking place, under the conditions set out in section R. 719-68.
The board of directors shall vote, in the same form, the main budget and the annexed budget of the industrial and commercial activity service and approve the budget of each academic foundation.
The board of directors votes the budget in real balance.
It sets out multi-year investment programs and a forecasting state of the remains to be realized on research contracts.
In budgetary matters, the Board of Directors is validly deliberating if half of the members in exercise are present.
These deliberations are taken by a majority of votes cast by members present or represented. The maximum number of representation warrants that may be held by a member present is determined by the statutes of the institution.
In the event of the equal sharing of votes, the president has a dominant voice.
At the meeting of the board of directors, the rector of academy, chancellor of universities, or the minister's representative may decide that the budget is subject to its approval in the following cases:
1° The proposed budget was not communicated within the time limit set out in article R. 719-65;
2° The main budget or the annexed budget or budget of a foundation is not in real balance, particularly with regard to the provisions of Articles R. 719-59 to R. 719-62 relating to the levies on the working capital or on reserves;
3° The main budget does not provide the necessary credits to meet the institution's obligations and commitments;
4° The employment ceiling defined in the b of 1° of II of Article R. 719-54 is exceeded.
Subject to the provisions of sections R. 719-71 and R. 719-75, the budget is enforceable from the date of its communication to the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for the institutions directly attached to it, to the minister responsible for higher education.
In the event that the budget is submitted for approval, it is deemed to be acquired if it is not refused within one month of the transmission of the budget deliberation.
In the event of a refusal of approval, the Board of Directors again deliberates on the budget within one month of notification of refusal. The new deliberation is subject to approval.
In the absence of further deliberation within one month, or if it has not been remedied by the new deliberation to the irregularities that have motivated the refusal of approval, the budget is stopped by the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, by the minister responsible for higher education.
The budget shall be made public no later than one month after it has been adopted, agreed or approved. The terms and conditions of this advertisement are fixed by the establishment's statutes or by its rules of procedure.
Subparagraph 2
The changes made to the current year's budget in the following cases are adopted by the Board of Directors under the same conditions as the original budget:
1° Changes in the balance of the table with the financial balance, the balance of the forecast result account or the balance of the forecast state of the evolution of the heritage situation of the main budget or the annexed budget;
2° Transfer of credits between envelopes of the main budget;
3° Change in the overall job ceiling;
4° Increase in the main budget envelopes.
The amendments are made enforceable under the same procedure and under the same conditions as the initial budget to which they relate.
When the balance of a foundation's budget is, in the course of the year, substantially affected, the president or director of the institution requests the management board of the academic foundation to make the necessary changes.
The board of directors may delegate to the president or the director of the institution, subject to the conditions set out in section L. 712-3, the power to adopt amended budget decisions.
These decisions are enforceable, as the case may be, from their approval by the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for institutions that are directly attached to him, the minister responsible for higher education within fifteen days after their transmission to that authority, or at the expiry of that period unless the competent authority has, within the same period, refused its approval.
The competent authority may refuse its approval in the cases provided for in Article R. 719-69.
The amended budget decision is brought to the attention of the Board of Directors at its next session.
Subparagraph 1
The budget is enforceable on January 1 of the fiscal year provided that it has been regularly adopted or, where applicable, approved.
Where the budget is not enforceable on January 1 of the fiscal year, revenue and expenditure transactions are carried out on a temporary basis on the basis of 80% of the previous year's budget, deducting, if any, for the main budget, appropriations for non-recurrent expenditures.
Academy rector, chancellor of universities, or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education may decide that a portion of the budget corresponding to the main budget or the annexed budget or the budget of a foundation is enforceable.
If the budget is not enforceable on March 1 of the fiscal year, it is stopped by the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, by the minister responsible for higher education.
The budget is executed by nature of expenditure and recipe according to the accounting nomenclature. Imputation by destination is returned no later than for the establishment of the financial account.
Subparagraph 2
The president or director of the institution is the Budget Officer.
The university president may delegate his signature under the conditions provided for in Article L. 712-2. The president or director of the other institutions may delegate his signature in accordance with the terms set out in the statutory decree of the institution.
The directors of the internal institutes and schools of the universities, the president of each university foundation and the director of a common service to several institutions established under the provisions of Article L. 714-2 are secondary ordinators for matters of interest to them.
Secondary ordinators may delegate their signature to public officials under their authority.
The accounting officer is the head of the accounting department of the institution.
The suspension authority for accounting officers is exercised by the academy rector, the university chancellor, or, for institutions that are directly attached to him, by the minister responsible for higher education. The Minister who pronounced the detachment of the interested party is notified of the suspension.
Secondary accounting officers may be instituted on the proposal of the president or director of the establishment. They are designated by joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister responsible for the budget, after approval by the Chief Accountant.
Accountants may delegate their signature.
The president or director of the institution may create revenue or advances under the conditions fixed by order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
When an ordering officer has requested an accountant to pay, he or she shall return to the requisition. He reports to the Minister responsible for the budget and informs the Minister responsible for higher education.
The accounting officer must refuse to return to the order of requisition when the suspension of the payment is motivated by one of the cases provided for in theArticle 195 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management. The accounting officer immediately reports his refusal to the Minister responsible for the budget and informs the Minister responsible for higher education.
Subparagraph 3
The expenses of the institution are paid by the accounting officer on the basis of the acceptance of the expenses by the informationor. The acceptance is materialized, regardless of the support, in the form of a dated and signed statement affixed to the memory, invoice or any other piece by taking place, or in the form of a separate service performance certificate, one or the other specifying that the settlement may be validly operated for the amount indicated.
The recovery orders are forwarded by the informationor to the accounting agent, regardless of the support.
Control of expenditures by the accounting officer under theArticle 19 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 relating to budgetary and public accounting management is adapted and proportionate to the risks associated with the amount and nature of the expenditure. The terms and conditions for the implementation of these procedures are determined by the accounting officer after information of the president or director of the establishment.
The accounting officer may pay without prior order, provided that the appropriations are available in the budget, certain categories of expenditures determined jointly by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
A fact-finding service under the authority of the accounting officer may be responsible for centralizing receipt of invoices. In this case, the certification of the service made by the Coordinator authorizes payment by the accounting agent as long as the invoice is in accordance with the undertaking and the service done. This certification of the service takes place in order of the expenditure.
The rewards and non-value admissions of the institution's receivables are decided by the president or director of the institution on the proposal of the board of directors and, for academic foundations, the management board of the foundation, after the advice of the chief accountant. The provisions of this section shall not apply to the debts of the accounting officer.
Agreements relating to acquisitions, exchanges and disposals of buildings are concluded by the president or director of the establishment. They are subject to approval by the Board of Directors.
The board of directors of the institution may delegate its powers to the president or director of the establishment in respect of building rentals if the term of the contract is less than nine years and the amount of the annual rent does not exceed a limit set by a joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
Acceptance of donations and bequests is authorized by the board of directors under the conditions provided by the general code of public ownership.
In the event of overpayment by a creditor of the institution, the order of payment is issued.
Any payments made prior to the fiscal year's closure result in a recovery of credit.
Payments made after the closure of the year of attachment of the expenditure are made in the current year's budget.
When the officer refuses to issue an order of expenditure, the creditor may appeal to the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for institutions that are directly attached to him, the minister responsible for higher education. The latter shall, if any, proceed to the terms of office within the limits of the appropriations, if any and after the unresolved period.
Subparagraph 4
In the cases provided for in the legislative and regulatory provisions in force, the use of the loan is subject to the approval of the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, and the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for the institutions directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education and the Comptrollership and Corporate Accountant.
A borrowing cannot be borrowed to ensure the financing of the loan annuities.
The establishment's funds are deposited and placed under the conditions set out in theArticle 197 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
Funds may, however, be deposited in banking institutions or the Caisse des dépôts et consignations for use strictly related to a technical transit or to investments of the liberalities received by the institution and funds of the academic foundations.
Subparagraph 5
The accounting year is the calendar year.
All acquired rights and services rendered during a fiscal year must be recorded for that fiscal year.
The accounting plan for public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character is established in accordance with provisions of Article 54 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management. It is approved jointly by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
The Coordinator maintains a permanent inventory of all the movable and immovable property available to him. This inventory distinguishes the property of the establishment from the property that is assigned to it or that is made available to it. It is consistent with the accounting inventory.
Each institution has an established accounting in accordance with provisions of articles 59 and 209 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
Multi-year investment programs are monitored specifically to track the status of multi-year commitments undertaken by the institution.
The facilities for the activity of the research units referred to in R. 719-53 are subject to a performance report.
The financial account is accompanied by a statement of the remains to be realized on the research contracts and a presentation report reflecting the activities of the institution for the year under review, including the results of the analytical accounting.
The institution's annual performance report, prepared by the Coordinator, is attached to the financial account.
Accounts are deemed to be issued on the date on which all documents are signed and dated jointly by the Coordinator and the Accountant.
The Board of Directors approves the financial account in the light of the report of the auditor(s) within the time limits set out in theArticle 212 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
The approved financial account shall be communicated without delay to the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, to the minister responsible for higher education.
The financial account is sent to the accounting judge under the conditions provided by theArticle 214 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 relating to budgetary and public accounting management, regardless of the support.
The Board of Directors deliberates on the allocation of results from the main budget and the annexed budget.
It approves the allocation of results from each foundation's budget.
In the event of a negative result of the result account of the industrial or commercial business establishment or service, it determines the return to equilibrium conditions for the following fiscal year.
Subparagraph 1
The facility is equipped with retrospective and forecasting analytical instruments and financial information restitution and recovery tools in the form of indicators or analysis reports for the financial and heritage management of the facility.
These instruments and tools must, among other things, enable information to be obtained according to an appropriate periodicity:
1° Monitoring the payroll and consumption of jobs in full-time equivalents; for this purpose, as a transitional measure, for a period of time fixed by 31 December 2017, a service delivery agreement shall be concluded between the establishment and the competent regional or departmental management of public finances in order to ensure payment of monthly remuneration to the staff of the establishment;
2° The execution of the budget in revenue and expenditure, as well as that of its annual performance project;
3° The financial balance of the establishment;
4° Heritage management.
The Board of Directors is informed of the implementation of these tools and instruments.
The institution transmits to the Minister responsible for higher education the information necessary for the monitoring of the budgetary programs to which the institution is attached, including the financial situation of the institution, the fulfilment of its contractual commitments and the evolution of its salary and employment.
These elements are forwarded to the Minister responsible for higher education on a periodicity and a medium that he determines. The transmission can be carried out in dematerialized form.
The budget and its amendments and the financial account of the institution are forwarded to the Budget Minister.
The organization's anticipated job management document and employee creditsArticle 182 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 the authority referred to in section R. 719-108 shall be forwarded to the public accountant and budgetary management authority without being notified.
For the exercise of the competencies defined in sections R. 719-59 to R. 719-62, R. 719-69, R. 719-71, R. 719-73, R. 719-74, R. 719-76, R. 719-77, R. 719-92 and R. 719-109, and under the terms established by a partnership agreement, the rector, Chancellor of universities,
Subparagraph 2
The institution shall, at its request, communicate to the rector, Chancellor of the universities, or, for the institutions directly attached to it, to the Minister responsible for higher education any necessary elements for the exercise of its budgetary control.
When the result account shows a deficit for two consecutive years, the budget that follows the finding of deficits is established by the academy rector, university chancellor, or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, by the minister responsible for higher education. It cannot be modified throughout the exercise without its prior agreement.
Measures can be extended to the full recovery of the financial balance.
The provisions of sections R. 719-52 to R. 719-109 are applicable to common services to several establishments established under section L. 714-2.
The powers vested in the board of directors and the institution's coordinator are exercised respectively by the board of directors and the chair or director of the service's attachment establishment. The Senior Service Officer prepares the proposed service budget. If the service is provided with advice, it shall decide on the project before it is forwarded to the board of directors of the attachment establishment that determines the budget of each service.
The budget of the service is attached to the budget of the attachment establishment.
The accounting of the service is maintained by the accounting officer of the related service establishment.
The proceedings of the board of directors of the attachment institution relating to the activity of the common service to several establishments are forwarded for information to the president or director of each of these establishments. These deliberations are communicated to the boards of directors of each of the institutions concerned.
Orders made under sections R. 719-146 and R. 719-147 are deemed to have been made under sections R. 719-84 and R. 719-90.
As part of a grouping of establishments provided for in section L. 711-1, the temporary legislative body of the new institution shall exercise the powers vested in the board of directors by sections R. 719-51 to R. 719-111.
Public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature that do not have broader responsibilities and competencies are subject, subject to the provisions of articles R. 719-114 to R. 719-180, to the provisions of headings I and III of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 on budgetary management and public accountancy.
Subparagraph 1
The budget is the act by which the amount and allocation of the revenues and expenses of the year for the entire establishment are provided and authorized.
The budget of the institution incorporates the budget of each unit, school, institute or common service and includes, as an annex, the documents and tables listed in section L. 719-5.
The industrial and commercial activity service referred to in section L. 711-1 has an attached budget to the facility's budget under the conditions set out in sections R. 719-160 to R. 719-171.
Each university foundation referred to in Article L. 719-12 has a budget under the conditions set out in Articles R. 719-172 to R. 719-179 and R. 719-194 to R. 719-205.
An aggregate presentation of the institution's budget, the annexed budget of the industrial and commercial activity service and the budget of each foundation is prepared.
The budget of the institution and those it integrates, established in accordance with provisions of Article 175 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 in respect of budgetary management and public accountant, are presented by income and expenditure. They contain chapters, and possibly articles or paragraphs, according to a nomenclature jointly agreed by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
With respect to revenue forecasts, commitment authorizations and payment credits, chapters, specializing in revenue and expenditure, are grouped in two sections, one relating to operations, the other relating to capital transactions.
This budget nomenclature is established in accordance with the specific accounting plan for scientific, cultural and professional public institutions.
The limiting nature of the appropriations in the institution's budget applies:
1° Within the operating section, in the amount of all chapters relating to personnel expenses, on the one hand, in the amount of all other chapters of operating expenses, on the other;
2° The capital operations section;
3° Eventually, in the amount of a chapter or article determined by the Board of Directors.
The establishment's budget is supplemented by a management budget that presents income and expenditure by destination and outlines the management objectives for the establishment's major development axes. An order of the Minister for Higher Education sets out the content and modalities for the development of the management budget.
The fiscal year is the calendar year.
The budget appropriations do not create any fees under the following budget.
However, may be deferred from a fiscal year to the following:
1° Credits for annual unimplemented tranches of multi-year investment programmes;
2° The appropriations for specifically identified transactions that were the subject of a start of execution, within 10% of the allocation of the corresponding sections of the budget for the previous year.
Multi-year investment programs are the subject of a document annexed to the institution's budget. They are voted by the board of directors of the establishment.
Subparagraph 2
The president or director of the institution is the principal sponsor of the institution's budget.
The principal officer may delegate his signature to the persons referred to in the last paragraph of Article L. 712-2.
Secondary ordinators of internal institutes and schools may delegate their signature to public officials of the component they lead.
The accounting officer is the head of the accounting department of the institution.
The suspension authority for accounting officers is exercised, for institutions that are directly attached to it, by the minister responsible for higher education and by the academy rector, Chancellor, for other institutions. The Minister who pronounced the detachment of the interested party is notified of the suspension.
Secondary accounting officers may be instituted, on the proposal of the Senior Coordinator. They are designated by joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister responsible for the budget, after approval by the Chief Accountant.
Agents of the accounting officers must be approved by the appropriate agent.
The liability of the accounting officer is not likely to be incurred in connection with the management budget transactions referred to in R. 719-118.
When an ordering officer has requested an accountant to pay, he or she shall return to the requisition. He reports to the Minister responsible for the budget and informs the Minister responsible for higher education.
The accounting officer must refuse to return to the order of requisition when the suspension of the payment is motivated by one of the cases provided for in theArticle 195 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management. The accounting officer immediately reports his refusal to the Minister responsible for the budget and informs the Minister responsible for higher education.
Subparagraph 1
The budget is prepared under the authority of the principal ordinner in accordance with the major priorities and key data determined by the institution's board of directors.
Each component and common service referred to in R. 719-115 develops an activity forecast, determines the means necessary for its implementation and prepares its revenue forecast.
The board of directors of the establishment shall deliberate on the forecast of activity of the components and services referred to in section R. 719-115. It sets out the financial balance and the major categories of income and expenditure of the proposed budget of the institution.
Forecasts, when related to research, are submitted to the Scientific Council for advice.
The Senior Coordinator prepares the proposed budget for the institution, which is supplemented by its proposed management budget.
In this context, each component or service referred to in R. 719-115 shall prepare its proposed budget, supplemented by its proposed management budget.
The proposed budget, supplemented by the proposed management budget, is communicated to the academy rector, chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to him, to the minister responsible for higher education, at least 15 days before his presentation to the board of directors of the institution.
When the proposed budget is not communicated within this time frame, the academy rector, chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education, may decide, at the session of the Board of Directors, that the budget will be submitted to its approval.
Subparagraph 2
Each component or common service board referred to in R. 719-115 shall adopt its budget.
When the Joint Component or Service Board has not adopted its budget or has not voted it in balance, the Board of Directors may request a new deliberation from the board concerned or to stop it.
The Board of the component or common service must re-deliberate on its budget no later than fifteen days after the Board of Directors has returned. If it does not meet this deadline, the board of directors of the establishment shall determine the budget of the component or service concerned.
The board of directors shall vote the budget of the establishment completed by the management budget. The budget is voted in real balance.
The Board of Directors determines the budgets of common services that are not provided with a clean board.
The board of directors shall deliberate validly in the preparation, voting, execution or modification of the budget if the majority of the members composing it is present.
These deliberations are taken by the board of directors by a majority of the members present or represented.
At the meeting of the board of directors, the rector of academy, chancellor, or the representative of the minister may decide that the budget is subject to its approval if he finds that the budget is not in balance, that it does not respect the allocation of the means allocated by the State or by any public or private body or community or that it does not open the credits necessary to respect the obligations and commitments of the institution,
The budget is communicated to the academy rector, chancellor, or, for the institutions directly attached to it, to the minister responsible for higher education.
In the absence of this communication and subject to the provisions of sections R. 719-131 and R. 719-135, the budget is not enforceable.
In the event that the budget is submitted for approval, it is deemed to be acquired if it is not refused within fifteen days of the transmission of the budget deliberation.
In the event of a refusal of approval, the Board of Directors again deliberates on the budget within one month of notification of refusal. The new deliberation is subject to approval.
In the absence of further deliberation within one month, or if it has not been remedied by the new deliberation to the irregularities that have motivated the refusal of approval, the budget is decided by the academy rector, Chancellor, after notice of the Receiver General for Finance or the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister responsible for Higher Education, after notice.
The budget shall be made public no later than one month after it has been adopted, agreed or approved. The terms and conditions of this advertisement are fixed by the establishment's statutes or by its rules of procedure.
Subparagraph 1
The budget is enforceable on January 1 of the fiscal year provided that it has been regularly adopted and, where applicable, approved.
Where the budget is not enforceable on January 1 of the fiscal year, revenue and expenditure transactions are carried out on a temporary basis on the basis of 80% of the final budget estimates for the previous fiscal year, deducting, where applicable, credits for non-recurrent expenditures.
If the budget is not enforceable on March 1 of the fiscal year, it shall be decided by the academy rector, Chancellor, after notice of the Receiver General for Finance or the Regional Director for Public Finance or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, by the Minister for Higher Education, after notice of the Minister for Budget.
The organization's anticipated job management document and employee creditsArticle 182 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 the authority referred to in section R. 719-131 shall not be subject to a notice as provided for in section 182 of the above-mentioned decree.
The accounting officer may pay without prior order, provided that the appropriations are available in the budget, certain categories of expenditures determined jointly by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
The awarding and non-value admissions of the establishment's receivables are decided by the board of directors of the establishment after notice of the principal accountant. The board of directors may delegate this jurisdiction to the principal ordinner.
The provisions of this section shall not apply to the debts of the accounting officer.
The works, real estate and constructions, which are mastered by the establishment, are the subject of a program deliberated by the Board of Directors on the proposal of the Principal Coordinator.
The Principal Coordinator may create revenue or advances under the conditions established by a joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
Contracts and agreements relating to acquisitions, exchanges and disposals of buildings are entered into by the principal shipper after notice of the board of directors.
The board of directors of the institution may delegate its powers to the principal landlord in respect of leases and leases of buildings if the contract is less than nine years and the annual rent does not exceed a limit set by a joint order of the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister for Budget.
Acceptance of donations and bequests is authorized by the board of directors under the conditions provided by the State domain code.
The property maintains a permanent inventory of all movable and immovable property available to it. This inventory distinguishes the property of the establishment from the property that is assigned to it or that is made available to it.
The expenses of the institution are paid by the accounting officer on the basis of the acceptance of the expenses by the informationor. The acceptance is materialized, regardless of the support, in the form of a dated and signed statement affixed to the memory, invoice or any other piece by taking place, or in the form of a separate service performance certificate, one or the other specifying that the settlement may be validly operated for the amount indicated.
The recovery orders are forwarded by the informationor to the accounting agent, regardless of the support.
Control of expenditures by the accounting officer under theArticle 19 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 relating to budgetary and public accounting management is adapted and proportionate to the risks associated with the amount and nature of the expenditure. The terms and conditions for the implementation of these procedures are determined by the accounting officer after information of the president or director of the establishment.
A fact-finding service under the authority of the accounting officer may be responsible for centralizing receipt of invoices. In this case, the certification of the service made by the Coordinator authorizes payment by the accounting agent as long as the invoice is in accordance with the undertaking and the service done. This certification of the service takes place in order of the expenditure.
Subparagraph 2
The changes to the initial budget of the establishment during the fiscal year are decided by the Board of Directors under the same conditions as the initial budget when they relate to:
1° Change of overall balance;
2° Transfer of credits between the operating section and the capital operations section;
3° Transfer of credits between sections relating to staff costs and other sections of the operating section;
4° Exceeding a chapter whose limiting character is decided by the board of directors.
Changes to the initial budget in the current fiscal year may be decided by the Senior Coordinator when he or she has received delegation from the Board of Directors for this purpose.
It was reported to the Board of Directors at the first meeting of the Board following the amendment.
The amendments are published and enforced under the same conditions as the initial budget to which they relate.
In the event that the budget is approved, the changes made during the fiscal year are also subject to approval.
The amendments to the original budget of the common components and services referred to in section R. 719-115 during the fiscal year are decided by the appropriate board.
The addressee may receive board delegation to decide on these changes when they do not affect the limiting nature of the credits in the institution's budget. These amendments are reported to the Board at the first meeting of the Board following these amendments.
Subparagraph 3
In the cases provided for in the legislative and regulatory provisions in force, the use of the loan is subject to the approval of the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, and the Regional Director of Public Finance or, for the institutions directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education and the Comptrollership and Corporate Accountant.
A loan cannot be made to finance the reimbursement of borrowing annuities or capital.
The establishment's funds are deposited and placed under the conditions set out in theArticle 197 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
Subparagraph 4
When an institution receives a balance subsidy from the Minister responsible for higher education, or when the accounts show a deficit for two consecutive years, the budget that follows the payment of the grant or the finding of the deficits is established by the academy rector, chancellor, or by the Minister responsible for higher education for institutions that are directly attached to it, and may not be altered throughout the year without its prior agreement.
When the management of the ordainor involves irregularities in order to create a de facto deficit, the Minister for Higher Education shall take all interim measures necessary to ensure the financial administration of the institution.
The measures set out in the two paragraphs above may be extended to the full recovery of the financial balance.
When the ordainor fails to commit the expenses of the institution in a timely manner, the rector of academy, chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to it, the Minister for Higher Education may, at the request of the creditor or his own initiative and after the unimpedededed implementation, substitute for him to carry out the commitment and mandate of these expenses on his own. For this purpose, he may designate a special delegate.
The specific accounting plan for public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature, in accordance with the General Accounts Plan, is approved jointly by the Minister for Higher Education and the Minister responsible for the budget after notice of the accounting standards authority.
Each institution has an established accounting in accordance with provisions of articles 59 and 209 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
The financial account shall be prepared and submitted under the conditions provided for in Articles 211 to 214 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 Financial and Public Accounts Management.
It is approved by the Board of Directors of the establishment within the time limits set to theArticle 212 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 referred to above and promptly communicated to the academy rector, chancellor, or, for the institutions that are directly attached to him, to the minister responsible for higher education.
If the financial account is not addressed in the forms prescribed by theArticle 214 of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 As mentioned above, the Minister for Higher Education is informed by his representative on the Board of Directors.
The financial account may also be sent to the account judge in dematerialized form.
The supporting documents are retained, regardless of the support, by the establishment at least during the period allowing the liability of the accountant to be put into play. second paragraph of Article 60 of Law No. 63-156 of 23 February 1963 Financial for 1963.
The financial account is also communicated to the Minister responsible for higher education accompanied by the other budgetary and financial documents of the institution. This transmission can be carried out in dematerialized form.
Subparagraph 1
The provisions of sections R. 719-114 to R. 719-159 apply to industrial and commercial activity services subject to the provisions of sections R. 719-161 to R. 719-169.
The annexed budget of the Industrial and Commercial Business Service includes:
In resources, the products and revenues derived by the establishment from its industrial and commercial activities, including:
1° Products and revenues of industrial and commercial agreements and conventions, in particular contracts, essays, research, studies, analysis, advice and expertise on behalf of third parties, excluding proceeds from ongoing training activities under sections D. 714-55 to D. 714-72;
2° Products and revenues from the exploitation of patents, licences, intellectual or industrial property rights and research;
3° Products and revenues of service benefits referred to in Article D. 123-2;
4° Products and recipes of publishing, leases and commercial rentals and other commercial activities.
The resources of the industrial and commercial activity service also include State subsidies financed by the revenues of the competition fund shown below.
In jobs:
1° Personnel costs for the operation and operation of the service;
2° The payment to the State, in the form of a competition fund, on the part of the expenses of personnel paid on the State budget, corresponding to their participation in the profit activities of the industrial and commercial activity service. The amount of this payment is determined by means of an analytical accounting provided for in article R. 719-158;
3° Operating and equipment costs and, in general, all expenses and expenses required for the operation and conduct of the service activities.
The board of directors of the establishment determines the share of the common expenses of the establishment supported by the service under its industrial and commercial activities and the terms and conditions of their financing by the products derived from these activities.
The resources included in the annex budget are assessed.
The annexed budget is supplemented by a management budget that presents the revenues and expenses of the service by destination, according to a nomenclature of that service, adopted by the board of directors of the establishment.
The board of directors of the establishment shall vote the annexed budget of the service completed by the management budget.
The annexed budget of the service is enforceable under the conditions defined in section R. 719-139.
The changes to the original schedule budget of the service, during the fiscal year, are decided by the board of directors of the establishment when they affect the balance of the annexed budget.
The establishment's accounting officer establishes a service-specific financial account. This account is aggregated to the institution's financial account.
The board of directors of the establishment deliberates on the allocation of the service result.
In the event of a negative result, it determines the conditions of return to equilibrium for the next two years.
Subparagraph 2
The industrial and commercial activities common to several establishments, established pursuant to section L. 714-2, have a budget annexed to the budget of the attached facility under the conditions defined in sections D. 714-89 to D. 714-92.
An aggregate presentation of the annexed budget of the Industrial and Commercial Activities Service and the related budget is prepared.
The proceedings of the board of directors of the attachment institution relating to the activity of the common industrial and commercial activity service to several establishments are forwarded for information to the president or director of each of these establishments.
These deliberations are communicated to the boards of directors of each of the institutions concerned.
The provisions of sections R. 719-160 to R. 719-169 apply to industrial and commercial services common to several establishments subject to the following provisions:
1° The competences vested in the board of directors of the establishment shall be exercised by the board of directors of the establishment of connection of the service;
2° Competency with the principal ordinance officer of the institution is exercised by the principal ordinance officer of the service attachment establishment;
3° The accounting of the service is maintained by the accounting officer of the related service establishment.
The budget for each foundation is assessed.
The budget of each foundation is supplemented by a presentation of the foundation's income and expenses by destination, according to a nomenclature specific to it, adopted by its management board.
The board of directors of the institution approves the budget of each foundation, supplemented by the presentation referred to in section R. 719-173, under the conditions defined in section R. 719-134.
Each budget is enforceable under the conditions set out in sections R. 719-139 to R. 719-141.
When the balance of a budget is substantially affected during the fiscal year, the Foundation Management Board proposes the necessary modifications.
A financial account is established for each foundation. This is aggregated to the institution's financial account.
The Board of Directors approves the allocation of results for each budget.
By derogation from section R. 719-154, funds from academic foundations may be deposited for their placement with bank institutions.
Public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature that are authorized to benefit from the expanded budgetary responsibilities and competencies under the conditions laid down in Article L. 712-8 shall submit the following budget in the forms provided for in Articles R. 719-51 to R. 719-112.
As part of a grouping of establishments provided for in section L. 711-1, the temporary legislative body of the new institution shall exercise the powers vested in the board of directors by sections R. 719-51 to R. 719-112.
Public institutions of higher education may, within the framework of their international cooperation mission, offer specific training, in their content and in their terms, to the nature of the target audiences and the objectives they pursue, as well as services associated with these trainings:
1° To foreign students who are welcomed in France as part of this mission;
2° To foreign students staying in other countries, in the form of on-site or remote services.
This offer of training and services can be offered in a collective capacity, in the framework of conventions, or in an individual capacity.
Training may lead to the issuance of diplomas issued on behalf of the State as part of the regulatory provisions governing them as well as to the issuance of certificates of establishment or certificates.
Subject to the European and international commitments of France and in accordance with the agreements reached, if any, by the establishment, board of directors or the proceeding that takes place, shall establish the conditions for remuneration of these training services.
The resulting pricing takes into account, inter alia, the related costs:
1° Specific educational arrangements;
2° Specific reception, tutoring and educational support;
3° To the educational follow-up of the courses;
4° Training engineering benefits;
5° To the general costs associated with this offer of training and services.
Under the conditions established by the board of directors or the proceeding that takes place, the president or director of the institution may exempt students from their personal situation.
All revenue and expenditure forecasts, including staff costs, for the training services referred to in section D. 719-181 is summarized in a statement in real balance, annexed to the institution's budget and subject to the approval of the board of directors.
The Board of Directors also decides on the financial account for these training services for the previous year.
In addition, the forecast statement and the financial account must include in the annex the number of students benefiting, for the year in question, from the exemption provided for in section D. 719-183, as well as the amount of expenditure for the benefits provided to these students.
The provisions on international cooperation of public higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education are set out in sections D. 123-15 to D. 123-22.
The engineering schools, which are listed in this section, are public administrative institutions attached to a public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character pursuant to Article L. 719-10, governed by the Decree No. 86-640 of 14 March 1986 establishing the rules for the organization and operation of certain engineering schools attached to a scientific, cultural and professional public institution:
1° Clermont-Ferrand National School of Chemistry, attached to Clermont-Ferrand-II University;
2° Ecole Nationale Supérieure de Chemistry, Lille-I University;
3° Ecole nationale supérieure de chemistry de Montpellier, affiliated to the Université Montpellier-II;
4° Paris Graduate School of Chemistry, attached to the Paris-VI University;
5° Ecole nationale supérieure de chemistry de Rennes, affiliated to the Université Rennes-I;
6° École nationale supérieure d'informatique pour l'industrie et l'entreprise, affiliated to the University of Evry-Val d'Essonne;
7° Caen National College of Engineers, attached to Caen University;
8° Ecole nationale supérieure de mécanique et d'aérotechnique de Poitiers, affiliated to the University of Poitiers;
9° École nationale supérieure de mécanique et des microtechniques, affiliated to the University of Besançon.
The main tasks of the schools mentioned in the previous article are:
1° The initial training of engineers;
2° Continuous training of engineers and managers;
3° Conducting research, study and testing.
National engineering schools, which are listed in this article, are national administrative public institutions with educational, administrative and financial autonomy:
1° Brest National Engineering School, attached to the University of Western Brittany by the Decree No. 2004-1436 of 23 December 2004 bringing together the Brest National Engineers School at Brest University;
2° National School of Engineers of Metz, attached to the University of Lorraine by decree of February 18, 1986, linking the National School of Engineers of Metz to the University of Metz;
3° National School of Engineers of Tarbes, attached to the national polytechnic institute of Toulouse by the Decree No. 2002-1107 of 30 August 2002 bringing together the National School of Engineers of Tarbes to the National Polytechnic Institute of Toulouse;
4° École nationale d' ingénieurs du Val de Loire, affiliated to the University of Tours by the Decree No. 2006-932 of 27 July 2006 creating the National School of Engineers of the Loire Valley.
These schools are under the supervision of the Minister for Higher Education and are intended to be attached, in particular for scientific cooperation, to a public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character, pursuant to section L. 719-10.
Their rules of organisation and operation are fixed by the Decree No. 2000-271 of 22 March 2000 carrying out national engineering schools and the establishment's rules of procedure.
National engineering schools provide theoretical and practical higher education with the initial training of general engineers in the fields of production and product design systems. Each school delivers, in particular, the titles of graduate engineers for which it has been authorized.
They participate in the ongoing training of the industry's senior engineers, executives and technicians and trainers. Continuous training actions can be graduated.
They provide research training and may be empowered to jointly issue with a scientific, cultural and professional public institution of graduate national degrees. National engineering schools can issue clean diplomas.
They conduct research activities in the scientific and technological fields. They contribute to the valorization of the results obtained, the dissemination of scientific and technical information and industrial development.
They develop research training and research activities in conjunction with a scientific, cultural and professional public institution.
National engineering schools operate in close collaboration and, where appropriate, operate in common with other French or foreign institutions.
They ensure that their trainings are continuously adapted to scientific developments and business needs.
The political institutes, which are listed in this article, are public institutions of higher education with administrative character and financial autonomy:
1° Aix-en-Provence Institute of Political Studies, attached to the University of Aix-Marseille;
2° Institut d'études politiques de Bordeaux, affiliated to the Université Bordeaux-IV ;
3° Institut d'études politiques de Grenoble, affiliated to the University Grenoble-II;
4° Institut d'études politiques de Lyon, affiliated to the Université Lyon-II;
5° Institut d'études politiques de Toulouse, affiliated to Toulouse-I University;
6° Institut d'études politiques de Lille, affiliated to the Université Lille-II;
7° Institut d'études politiques de Rennes, affiliated to the Université Rennes-I.
They are attached, pursuant to Article L. 719-10, to one of the universities in the academy where they have their headquarters and are governed by the Decree No. 89-902 of 18 December 1989 relating to political institutes with a public institution status attached to a university.
Conventions between the institutes and the related universities include educational and scientific cooperation and possibly mutual representation of institutions in their respective councils.
Political institutes are under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education.
The political institutes are:
1° To contribute, in both initial and continuing training, to the training of senior officials in the public, parapublic and private sectors of the nation, including public functions of the State and territorial authorities;
2° To develop, in particular in relation to higher education institutions, the National Political Science Foundation and the National Centre for Scientific Research, political and administrative research.
To this end, they graduated cleanly. They can also participate in the preparation of national degrees and university degrees.
When political institutes have a public administrative institution status attached, the terms of such participation are provided by agreement with their university of association.
Recruitment of students is carried out after verification of skills and knowledge according to the terms set by the board of directors in the educational regulations of each institute.
The provisions relating to the status and administrative and financial organization of the other related institutions are as follows:
1° École nationale supérieure de ceramic industrielle de Limoges, a national public institution with a civil personality and financial autonomy attached to the University of Limoges Decree No. 2001-804 of 3 September 2001 : Decree No. 79-867 of 3 October 1979 having the status of the national school of industrial ceramics;
2° Observatoire de la Côte d'Azur, a national public institution with administrative, financial and scientific autonomy, under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education and attached to the University of Nice by the Decree No. 2008-1134 of 3 November 2008 : Decree No. 88-384 of 19 April 1988 carrying out the observatory of the French Riviera;
3° Institut d'administration des entreprises de Paris, public institution with administrative and financial autonomy attached to the Paris-I University by the Decree No. 89-928 of 21 December 1989 relating to the Institut d'administration des entreprises de Paris : Decree No. 89-928 of 21 December 1989 relating to the Institut d'administration des entreprises de Paris;
4° Bibliothèque nationale et universitaire de Strasbourg, public institution with administrative character attached to the University of Strasbourg: Decree No. 92-45 of 15 January 1992 organizing the national and academic library of Strasbourg;
5° École nationale supérieure d' ingénieurs de Bourges, a national public institution with an administrative character with a pedagogical and scientific, administrative and financial autonomy attached to the University of Orleans by the Decree No. 2002-1290 of 23 October 2002 : Decree No. 97-319 of 9 April 1997 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure de Bourges;
6° Ecole des ingénieurs de la ville de Paris (EIVP) ― Ecole supérieure du engineering urbain, governed with financial autonomy and moral personality within the meaning ofArticle L. 2221-10 of the General Code of Territorial Communities, attached to the National School of Bridges and Roadways by the Decree No. 2011-516 of 11 May 2011 : Articles R. 2221-53 to R. 2221-62 of the General Code of Territorial Communities ;
7° École nationale du génie de l'eau et de l'environnement de Strasbourg, public institution with administrative character attached to the University of Strasbourg by the Decree No. 2007-1463 of 12 October 2007 Articles R. 812-3 to R. 812-24 of the Rural and Maritime Fisheries Code;
8° National Veterinary School of Toulouse, public administrative institution attached to the Institut national polytechnique de Toulouse by the Decree No. 2010-1681 of 28 December 2010 Articles R. 812-3 to R. 812-24 of the Rural and Maritime Fisheries Code;
9° Alfort National Veterinary School, public administrative institution attached to the Paris-XII University by the Decree No. 2012-575 of 24 April 2012 bringing the National Veterinary School of Alfort to the University of Paris-XII: articles R. 812-3 to R. 812-24 of the Rural and Maritime Fisheries Code;
10° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Strasbourg, national public institution with administrative character attached to the University of Strasbourg by the Decree No. 2013-284 of 3 April 2013 bringing together the Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Strasbourg to the University of Strasbourg: Decree No. 78-266 of 8 March 1978 establishing the administrative and financial regime of the higher national schools of architecture.
The statutes of the academic foundations, which have no legal personality, are established in public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character under the conditions laid down in Article L. 719-12, are approved by the board of directors of the institution that houses them in accordance with the provisions of Articles R. 719-195 to R. 719-205.
The administration of the foundation is entrusted to a management board.
This board includes twelve to eighteen members.
It consists of three colleges:
1° The College of Representatives of the Institution;
2° The college of founders representing natural or legal persons who have irrevocably affected property, rights or resources for the purpose of the foundation;
3° The college of qualified personalities competent in the field of activity corresponding to the purpose of the foundation.
The founding college cannot have more than one third of the seats.
The statutes of the foundation may provide for the possibility of creating a fourth college representing donors.
They specify the terms and conditions of appointment of Council members and the duration of their term, which may not exceed four years. This mandate is renewable.
The president of the foundation is appointed by the management board. It ensures the representation of the foundation. He exercises the powers delegated to him by the management board in accordance with the statutes of the foundation.
He may receive signature delegation from the head of institution.
The Management Board also designates an office that includes at least, in addition to the Chair, a Vice-Chair, a Treasurer and a Secretary.
The functions of a board member and office member are performed free of charge.
The statutes determine the conditions for the reimbursement of mission fees and other expenses set out by Council members and by any other person on the occasion of their collaboration with the foundation's activities.
The rector of the academy, Chancellor of Universities, in whose jurisdiction the institution hosting the foundation has its headquarters, is responsible for the functions of Commissioner of the Government to the foundation.
He participates with an advisory voice in meetings of the Management Board. He can be represented on this occasion. It may obtain communication of any document relating to the activity or management of the foundation.
The Board of Management resolves the affairs of the foundation through its deliberations.
It deliberates in particular on:
1° The program of activity of the foundation;
2° The annual activity report submitted by the office on the moral and financial situation;
3° The budget and accounts of the year ended, on the proposal of the treasurer;
4° Acceptance of donations and bequests and related charges as well as the general terms and conditions of such acceptance and, in particular, the minimum amount over which such gifts and bequests may be accompanied by charges;
5° Recruitment and compensation decisions for contractual staff recruited for the Foundation ' s activities.
The deliberations of the foundation are forwarded to the head of the institution.
The board of directors of the establishment may object within the two-month period and by a decision motivated to carry out a deliberation on the acceptance of gifts and bequests with the related charges made under section 4 of R. 719-199 and those taken under section 5 of the same section.
The budget as well as the accounts of the foundation shall be forwarded to the head of the institution which shall protect it and submitted to the board of directors of the foundation for approval on a periodicity provided by the statutes of the foundation and at least once a year.
The Foundation's budget is attached to the institution's budget that houses the foundation.
The statutes of the foundation determine how the budget is prepared. They set out specific rules for the performance of revenue and expenditure transactions and derogations from the provisions of the Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 relating to the budgetary and public accounting management necessary for the conduct of the activities of the foundation in accordance with its constituent acts and in accordance with the fourth paragraph of Article L. 719-12.
The statutes of the foundation also determine the conditions for the creation and operation of the income and expenditure boards.
The establishment's accounting agent that houses the foundation establishes a foundation-specific financial account. This financial account is attached to the financial account of the institution.
The annual resources of the foundation consist of:
1° Endowment income;
2° Of the consumable portion of the endowment that cannot exceed 20 per cent of the total endowment each year, provided that the constitutive act of the foundation does not impede such use;
3° Financial products;
4° Revenues from the property belonging to the institution and from the foundation;
5° Gifts and bequests that may or may not be accompanied by charges;
6° Products of partnerships;
7° Sales and remuneration for services rendered;
8° And all other products authorized by laws and regulations.
Public individuals cannot provide more than 50% of the amount of the original staffing. The expendable portion of the endowment cannot exceed 50%. Donations from public institutions are allowed provided they come from their own resources.
The annual expenses and expenses of the foundation consist of:
1° Purchases of goods and services or equipment necessary for the activity of the foundation;
2° The amount of the specific assistance provided pursuant to the provisions of the second paragraph of Article L. 821-1;
3° Expenses arising from the acceptance of gifts and bequests;
4° Staff and management costs required to carry out the foundation ' s missions;
5° Management costs reimbursed to the establishment that houses the foundation;
6° Any expenditure contributing to the fulfilment of his or her missions.
Decisions involving an expenditure of more than 500,000 euros per transaction or, for multi-year transactions, more than 1,000 000 euros are enforceable only after approval by the board of directors of the establishment that houses the foundation.
The budget shall be voted and balanced after use, if any, of the annual expendable portion of the allocation determined under the conditions set out in 2° of section R. 719-202.
The president of the foundation is the secondary sponsor of the foundation's revenues and expenses. It may delegate its signature to one or more officers. The accounts are maintained according to the rules applicable to the accounts of the foundations.
The establishment's accounting agent that houses the foundation collects revenues and makes payments for the foundation's activities.
The board of directors of the institution that houses the foundation shall appoint, after advice from the board of management of the academic foundation, at least one auditor and one alternate; these may also be the auditor of the institution and its alternate.
The contracts referred to in Article L. 719-14 shall be entered into by the authority of the establishment to which the contracting authority is assigned by the status of the establishment. If not, these contracts are entered into by or authorized by the establishment's legislative body.
I. ― The draft contracts conferring real rights to a third party referred to in Article L. 719-14 shall be submitted by the public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional nature to the prior agreement:
1° The Minister of Trustees and the Minister responsible for the area where the amount of the proposed work is greater than or equal to three million euros excluding taxes;
2° The Minister of Guardianship of institutions that are directly attached to him or, in the case of other institutions, to the rector of academy, chancellor of universities when the amount of the planned work is less than three million euros excluding taxes.
II. ― Ministers or rectors referred to in I shall, among other things, decide on clauses to ensure continuity of public service to which the property concerned is affected.
III. ― Failure to obtain the prior express agreement referred to in I shall be deemed to refuse this prior agreement from the expiry of a period, as the case may be:
1° Two months from the seizure of the authorities mentioned at 1° of I;
2° A month from the seizure of the authorities mentioned at 2° of the I.
The contracts referred to in section R. 719-206 apply sections R. 2122-17 to R. 2122-27 of the General Ownership Code. The duration of the contracts and the duration of the real rights conferred upon them is fixed by these contracts according to the object, nature and importance of the goods and the work on which they carry.
By derogation from section D. 719-4, the statutes of the academic institutes for teacher training distribute the seats of the representatives of the staff performing training activities at the institute between the following colleges:
1° College of University and Personal Teachers assimilated pursuant to the provisions of the Order in CouncilArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 relating to the National Council of Universities;
2° College of Other Teachers-Researchers and Associated Personnel pursuant to the provisions of the Order in CouncilArticle 6 of Decree No. 92-70 of 16 January 1992 referred to above ;
3° College of Other Teachers and Other Trainers.
The number of seats reserved for teachers-researchers must be at least one third of the total seats allocated to teachers.
Electors and Eligible in the colleges mentioned in the previous article, except for the university teacher training institute of the University of Corsica:
1° Teachers-researchers and assimilated personnel who provide in the university teacher training institute at least one quarter of their reference service obligations;
2° Other teachers, other trainers who provide in the university teacher training institute at least fifty annual hours of teaching.
Articles D. 721-1 and D. 721-2 are applicable to the university teacher training institute of the University of Lorraine.
This chapter does not include provisions made by decree.
The organizational and operational rules of the National Higher Institute for Training and Research for the Education of Young Persons with Disabilities and the appropriate teachings are set by the Decree No. 2005-1754 of 30 December 2005 relating to the National Higher Institute for Training and Research for the Education of Young Persons with Disabilities and the appropriate teachings.
The opening statements under articles L. 731-2, L. 731-3 and L. 731-4 shall be accompanied by:
1° The birth certificate of directors or teachers;
2° Of their degrees, in case they are due.
After the receipt of the receipt, the rector or inspector shall transmit within 24 hours the statement received from the Public Prosecutor to the court in which the planned course or establishment is to be opened. He encloses the birth certificate of the interested parties. Notice of this transmission is given to the minister responsible for higher education and to the department's prefect.
The statement made to the rector or academy inspector is posted for ten days, by the rector and the mayor, at the door of the academic offices and at the door of the city hall where the course or private higher education institution must be opened.
Within ten days of the opening statement of a private higher education institution, the rector visits or visits the premises, without prejudice to the security provisions in public buildings.
Forty-eight hours before the expiry of the ten-day period established by the fourth paragraph of Article L. 731-3, the rector or inspector shall communicate to the public prosecutor the comments to which the statement may have been made or the information that it has not been received at the academy or at the city hall.
Pursuant to section L. 731-4 and the first paragraph of section L. 731-13, a register shall be held in each establishment containing the names, names, date and place of birth of the teachers attached to the establishment, with the indication of the functions that each of them performs.
In each private higher education institution, the register indicates whether teachers are doctors or not. This register must be communicated to any requisition of the authorities involved in the monitoring and inspection of such facilities.
Each year, at least ten days before the opening of the first semester, any private higher education institution is required to address the academic authority the list of teachers and the curriculum of courses.
The same procedure applies in the event of the creation or modification of the program or the recruitment of new teachers.
When one of the conferences provided for in the fourth paragraph of Article L. 731-4 is to be held in a private higher education institution, the head of institution is required to inform the academic authority at least 24 hours in advance.
Constitutes private higher education institutions attached to a scientific, cultural and professional public institution:
1° Graduate School of Electricity attached to the Paris-XI University by decree of 13 February 1974;
2° École supérieure d'optique attached to the University of Paris-XI by the decree of 9 December 1974 linking the Ecole Supérieure d'optique to the University of Paris-XI;
3° Special School of Public Works of the Building and Industry attached to the National School of Arts and Crafts by the Decree No. 99-1020 of 30 November 1999 bringing together the Special School of Public Works of the Building and Industry to the National School of Arts and Crafts;
4° École supérieure de commerce de Lille affiliated to the Ecole Centrale de Lille by the Decree No. 2001-324 of 9 April 2001 bringing the Ecole Supérieure de Commerce from Lille to the Ecole Centrale de Lille;
5° Private ICN Graduate School attached to the University of Lorraine by the Decree No. 2003-383 of 23 April 2003 bringing together the ICN Private Higher Education School at Nancy-II University;
6° Graduate School of Advanced Industrial Technologies at Bordeaux-I University and Pau University by the Decree No. 2005-1654 of 26 December 2005 bringing together the Ecole Supérieure des Technologies Industries advanced to Bordeaux-I and Pau universities;
7° École internationale des sciences du traitement de l'information affiliated to the Institut supérieur de mécanique de Paris by the Decree No. 2006-264 of 1 March 2006 bringing together the International School of Information Sciences at the Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris;
8° Graduate School of Organic and Mineral Chemistry attached to Compiègne University of Technology by the Decree No. 2008-1148 of 6 November 2008 bringing the High School of Organic and Mineral Chemistry to Compiègne University of Technology;
9° Graduate School of Chemistry-Physics-Electric of Lyon attached to the University of Lyon-I by the Decree No. 2009-534 of 12 May 2009 bringing together the Ecole Supérieure de Chemistry-Physics-Electronics from Lyon to the University of Lyon-I;
10° Ecole supérieure de fonderie et de forge affiliated to the Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris by the Decree No. 2010-1517 of 8 December 2010 bringing together the Ecole Supérieure de fonderie et de Forge at the Institut Supérieur de mécanique de Paris;
11° Purpan Engineering School attached to the Institut national polytechnique de Toulouse by the Decree No. 2010-1682 of 28 December 2010 bringing together the Ecole d'Engines de Purpan at the Institut national polytechnique de Toulouse;
12° Higher Institute of Building and Public Works attached to the University of Aix-Marseille by the Decree No. 2011-326 of 24 March 2011 bringing together the Higher Institute of Building and Public Works at the University of Aix-Marseille;
13° Female Polytechnic School attached to the University of Technology of Troyes by the Decree No. 2011-547 of 18 May 2011 bringing together the Women's Polytechnic School at the University of Technology in Troyes;
14° Institute of Computer Engineering (3iL) attached to the University of Limoges by the Decree No. 2012-815 of 22 June 2012 bringing together the Institute of Computer Engineering (3iL) at the University of Limoges.
The appointment of members of the councils of national higher education institutions of an administrative nature, carried out in accordance with the regulations setting the statutes of the said institutions, is pronounced by academy rectors.
The provisions relating to administrative public institutions other than those mentioned in articles D. 719-186 to D. 719-193 are set by the following decrees:
1° National Nuclear Science and Technology Institute: Decree No. 56-614 of 18 June 1956 establishing a National Institute of Nuclear Science and Technology;
2° Académie des sciences d'outre-mer : Decree No. 72-1038 of 16 November 1972 revamping statutes and approval of the rules of procedure of the overseas sciences academy and Decree No. 2009-200 of 18 February 2009 approving the rules of procedure of the Academy of Overseas Sciences;
3° École nationale supérieure de l'electronique et de ses applications de Cergy (ENSEA): Decree No. 75-29 of 15 January 1975 having the status of the national school of electronics and its applications;
4° École nationale supérieure des arts et techniques du théâtre : Decree No. 91-601 of 27 June 1991 relating to the National School of Theatre Arts and Techniques;
5° École nationale supérieure Louis Lumière : Decree No. 91-602 of 27 June 1991 relating to the École nationale supérieure Louis-Lumière;
6° Institut français de mécanique avancée : Decree No. 91-1251 of 16 December 1991 creating and organizing the French Institute of Advanced Mechanics;
7° Ecole nationale supérieure de la nature et du paysage de Blois : Decree No. 93-722 of 29 March 1993 relating to the École nationale supérieure de la nature et du paysage.
8° Bibliographic Agency for Higher Education: Decree No. 94-921 of 24 October 1994 establishing the Bibliographic Agency for Higher Education;
9° Technical Centre for the Book of Higher Education: Decree No. 94-922 of 24 October 1994 establishing the Technical Centre for the Book of Higher Education;
10° National Computer Centre for Higher Education: Decree No. 99-318 of 20 April 1999 establishing the National Computer Centre for Higher Education;
11° Centre universitaire de formation et de recherche du Nord-Est Midi-Pyrénées Jean-François-Champollion : Decree No. 2002-522 of 16 April 2002 relating to the university center of formation and research of the Nord-Est Midi-Pyrénées Jean-François Champollion;
12° National Centre for Distance Education: Articles R. 426-1 to R. 426-24;
13° Public establishment of the Musée du quai Branly: Decree No. 2004-1350 of 9 December 2004 relating to the status of the public establishment of the Musée du quai Branly;
14° Centre universitaire de formation et de recherche de Mayotte : Decree No. 2011-1299 of 12 October 2011 creating the University Centre for Training and Research in Mayotte.
The disciplinary power provided for in section L. 712-4 shall be exercised first by the board of directors of the public institution of an administrative character, when exercising higher education missions, constituted in disciplinary section, under the conditions and in accordance with the procedure provided for in sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, subject to the provisions provided for in section R. 232-31 as well as exemptions in force in the establishments referred to in sections D.
For the purposes of sections R. 712-10 to R. 712-46, the words: "the president of the university" are replaced by the words: "the head of institution". For the purposes of R. 712-10, the words "university" and "university" are replaced by the words "institution".
In addition to the major establishments mentioned in the 4th of Article D. 717-2 and Article D. 717-3 and public administrative establishments attached to a public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character mentioned in the 7th and 8th of Article D. 719-193, public agricultural higher education under the Minister responsible for agriculture includes the following schools, whose regime is set out in articles R. 812-2 to R. 812-2 to R. 812
1° École nationale supérieure du paysage de Versailles ;
2° École nationale de formation agronomique de Toulouse ;
3° National School of Agricultural Engineering in Bordeaux.
The provisions relating to the administrative and financial organization of national architectural schools, which are listed in this section, are fixed by the Decree No. 78-266 of 8 March 1978 establishing the administrative and financial regime of the higher national schools of architecture:
1° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture et de paysage de Bordeaux ;
2° École nationale supérieure d'architecture de Bretagne ;
3° Clermont-Ferrand National School of Architecture;
4° École nationale supérieure d'architecture de Grenoble ;
5° École nationale supérieure d'architecture et de paysage de Lille ;
6° École nationale supérieure d'architecture de Lyon ;
7° École nationale supérieure d'architecture de Marne-la-Vallée ;
8° École nationale supérieure d'architecture de Marseille ;
9° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Montpellier;
10° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Nancy ;
11° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Nantes ;
12° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Normandie ;
13° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Paris-Belleville ;
14° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Paris-La Villette ;
15° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de ParisMalaquais ;
16° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Paris-Val de Seine ;
17° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Saint-Etienne ;
18° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Toulouse ;
19° Ecole nationale supérieure d'architecture de Versailles.
The provisions relating to the City of Architecture and Heritage are fixed by the Decree No. 2004-683 of 9 July 2004 relating to the public establishment of the City of Architecture and HeritageArticle L. 142-1 of the Heritage Code.
The provisions concerning schools of mines are set by the following decrees:
1° Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Paris (Mines ParisTech): Decree No. 91-1033 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Paris;
2° École nationale supérieure des mines de Saint-Etienne (Mines Saint-Etienne): Decree No. 91-1034 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Saint-Etienne;
3° École nationale supérieure des mines d'Alès (Mines Alès): Decree No. 91-1035 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines d'Alès;
4° École nationale supérieure des mines de Douai (Mines Douai) : Decree No. 91-1036 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Douai;
5° Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Nantes (Mines Nantes): Decree No. 91-1037 of 8 October 1991 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines de Nantes;
6° Ecole nationale supérieure des mines d'Albi-Carmaux (Mines Albi-Carmaux): Decree No. 93-38 of 11 January 1993 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure des mines d'Albi-Carmaux.
In addition to the Higher Institute of Aeronautics and Space, a major institution mentioned in section D. 717-5, public higher education under the supervision of the Minister of Defence includes the following schools:
1° Polytechnic : Decree No. 96-1124 of 20 December 1996 relating to the organization and administrative and financial regime of the Polytechnic School;
2° Graduate School of Advanced Techniques: Articles R. 3411-29 to R. 3411-56 of the Defence Code ;
3° École nationale supérieure de techniques avancée Bretagne : Articles R. 3411-57 to R. 3411-87 of the Defence Code ;
4° Ecoles du service de santé des armées du Val de Grace, de Lyon et de Bordeaux : Decree No. 2008-429 of 2 May 2008 on schools and training of the military health service.
The School of High Studies in Public Health is a public institution of a scientific, cultural and professional character, constituted in the form of a large institution, referred to in the 3rd of Article D. 717-2.
The National Higher Maritime School is a scientific, cultural and professional public institution, constituted in the form of a large establishment, referred to in Article D. 717-6.
Provisions relating to the National Political Science Foundation are set by the Decree No. 72-1266 of 28 December 1972 approving the statutory provisions of the National Political Science Foundation.
The provisions relating to higher education institutions of music, dance, theatre and circus arts whose responsibility and responsibility are entirely vested in the State are:
1° École supérieure d'art dramatique du Théâtre national de Strasbourg : Decree No. 72-461 of 31 May 1972 bearing the status of the National Theatre of Strasbourg;
2° Conservatoires nationales supérieure de musique et de danse de Paris et de Lyon : Decree No. 2009-201 of 18 February 2009 bearing the status of the national superior conservatories of music and dance in Paris and Lyon;
3° Ecole du ballet de l'Opéra de Paris : Decree No. 94-111 of 5 February 1994 establishing the status of the Paris National Opera;
4° Conservatoire national supérieure d'art dramatique : Decree No. 2011-557 of 20 May 2011 Status of the National Conservatory of Dramatic Art.
The higher education of plastic arts under the educational control of the Ministry responsible for culture has two cycles:
1° A first cycle consisting of two courses leading to the national diploma of arts and techniques and the national diploma of plastic arts.
The curriculum leading to the national art and technical degree offers students the following options: graphic design, space design, product design and textile design.
The curriculum leading to the national diploma of plastic arts offers students the following options: art, design and communication;
2° A second cycle consisting of a curriculum leading to the national higher degree of plastic expression.
The curriculum leading to the national higher degree of plastic expression offers students the following options: art, design and communication.
The options of each curriculum can be supplemented by specialties.
National diplomas are obtained by initial and ongoing training, learning or, in whole or in part, by validation of the acquired experience.
National diplomas are issued by higher education institutions of plastic arts authorized by the Minister responsible for culture under the conditions set out in sections D. 75-10-5 to D. 75-10-7.
The organization of graduate studies of plastic arts is set by order of the Minister responsible for culture.
National diplomas or school diplomas are authorized, as defined in Article L. 75-10-1, national public institutions and public cultural cooperation institutions that:
1° Provide a higher education mission for plastic arts, including the development and enhancement of research, international cooperation and the monitoring of the professional integration of graduates;
2° Organize their teachings according to a project methodology based on artistic, experimental, practical, theoretical and scientific qualities and a permanent participation of art professionals in the teaching teams and juries;
3° Complete their teachings through partnerships with creative and diffusion structures or workshops as well as through artist residences;
4° Respect the provisions of the Order of the Minister for Culture, which organizes the plastic arts studies referred to in Article D. 75-10-4.
The authorization of the institutions mentioned in section D. 75-10-5 to issue national diplomas or school diplomas is issued by decree of the Minister responsible for culture. The order specifies the options and, where applicable, the mention of the diploma.
Under Article L. 216-3, it is authorized to provide teachings sanctioned by diplomas issued by or accredited by the State:
1° Higher educational institutions of plastic arts authorized to issue national degrees under the conditions set out in articles D. 75-10-5 and D. 75-10-6;
2° Other public arts educational institutions authorized by order of the Minister for Culture if they meet the conditions set out in 1° to 4° of section D. 75-10-5. The order specifies the duration of the authorization, the options and, where applicable, the mentions of the degree that punishes the teaching provided.
The provisions relating to higher education institutions of plastic arts whose responsibility and responsibility are wholly vested in the State are:
1° École nationale supérieure des beaux-arts : Decree No. 84-968 of 26 October 1984 carrying out administrative and financial organization of the National School of Fine Arts;
2° École nationale supérieure de création industrielle : Decree No. 2013-291 of 5 April 2013 relating to the Ecole nationale supérieure de création industrielle;
3° National School of Decorative Arts: Decree No. 98-981 of 30 October 1998 relating to the National School of Decorative Arts;
4° Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Bourges : Decree No. 2002-1514 of 23 December 2002 transforming the Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Bourges into a national public institution with the status of this institution;
5° Cergy National Art School: Decree No. 2002-1515 of 23 December 2002 transforming the Cergy National School of Art into a national public institution with the status of the institution;
6° École nationale supérieure d'art de Limoges-Aubusson : Decree No. 2002-1516 of 23 December 2002 transforming the Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Limoges-Aubusson into a national public institution with the status of this institution;
7° École nationale supérieure d'art de Nancy : Decree No. 2002-1517 of 23 December 2002 transforming the Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Nancy into a national public institution with the status of this institution;
8° International Art and Research Pilot School of Villa Arson: Decree No. 2002-1518 of 23 December 2002 transforming the International Pilot School of Art and Research of Villa Arson into a national public institution and bearing the status of this institution entitled Villa Arson;
9° Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Dijon : Decree No. 2002-1519 of 23 December 2002 transforming the Ecole nationale supérieure d'art de Dijon into a national public institution with the status of this institution;
10° Ecole nationale de la photographie d'Arles : Decree No. 2003-852 of 3 September 2003 erecting the National School of Photography in a national public institution and bearing the status of this institution.
This chapter does not include provisions made by decree.
In each academy, the Chancellery, an administrative national public institution with civil personality and financial autonomy, is placed under the supervision of the minister responsible for higher education.
The Chancellery ensures the administration of indivisible assets and expenses between several public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature and, where applicable, one or more public administrative institutions under the Minister for Higher Education of the same academy In this context, the State may also entrust it with the task of acquiring or assigning furniture.
By derogation from the previous paragraph, the Chancellery of the Paris Academy administers the indivisible assets and expenses between public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character and, where applicable, administrative public institutions under the Minister for Higher Education, the list of which is set by a decree of the Minister for Higher Education.
The State may entrust to a chancellery the mission to ensure the rental, adaptation and management of premises intended to temporarily accommodate users and personnel involved in the execution of the public service of higher education during the real estate work in the premises they usually occupy.
The Chancery administers and manages the real property that is assigned to it or that is made available to it by the State.
It may be responsible for the administration and management of movable and immovable property acquired by public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature and, where applicable, by administrative public institutions under the Minister for Higher Education, or that are assigned to or made available to them by the State, after the decision of the legislative proceeding of these institutions.
The State may entrust to a Chancellery the conduct of pre-university development, construction, development or rehabilitation of buildings belonging to it or made available to public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional character and, where applicable, administrative public institutions under the Minister responsible for higher education.
The Chancellery also ensures the management of means from, among other things, the state and public institutions of a scientific, cultural and professional nature, made available to the Chancellor of Universities for the exercise of the duties entrusted to it by this Code with respect to these institutions.
Chancery is authorized to transfer, within the meaning ofArticle 2044 of the Civil Code.
The Chancellery may, where applicable, provide, by agreement with the State or one or more public institutions, services in an expensive capacity, in the context of the missions referred to in Article D. 762-2.
Each chancery is administered by a board of directors and led by the rector.
The Board of Directors includes:
1° The rector of the academy, chancellor of universities, president, or his representative as well as, for the academy of Paris, the vice-chancellor of the universities of Paris, or his representative;
2° The presidents of universities and directors of institutes and schools outside the universities whose headquarters is located within the academy, or their representatives. For the academy of Paris, and when the board of directors deliberates on the matters set out in the second paragraph of Article D. 762-2, the presidents and directors of public higher education institutions whose list is fixed by the order set out in that same paragraph are members of the board of directors;
3° The Regional Director of Public Finance or his representative and, for the Paris Academy, the Regional Delegate of Public Finance for the Ile-de-France Region or its representative;
4° Four personalities chosen by the Minister of National Education; this number is increased to eight for the Paris Academy;
5° The budgetary controller placed with the institution, the secretary general of the academy and the accounting officer attend the sessions of the board of directors with an advisory voice.
The board of directors deliberates on:
1° The budget, the budget or the supplementary budgets of the Chancery, their amendments and the financial account;
2° Acquisitions, alienations and exchanges of buildings and acceptance of gifts and bequests;
3° Agreements, conventions and transactions concluded by the academy rector, Director of Chancery.
The budget and financial account deliberations are carried out under the conditions set out in Title III of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 on budgetary and public account management.
The Board of Directors meets at least twice a year, on the convocation of its President, who sets out its agenda.
The Board of Directors is validly deliberated if half of the current members are present. The deliberations are adopted by a majority of members present or represented.
The Chancellery is led by the rector who is responsible for the operation of the facility and for representing it in justice and in all acts of civil life. No action may be filed without the authorization of the Board of Directors. The rector is the order of the institution's revenues and expenses.
The Chancery is subject to the provisions of headings I and III of Decree No. 2012-1246 of 7 November 2012 on budgetary management and public accountant.
The chancery has a budget.
It may also be provided with supplementary budgets to ensure:
1° Management of cost-effective services;
2° The execution of operations and the realization of benefits entrusted to it by the State, by one or more public institutions, in accordance with articles D. 762-2 and D. 762-3;
3° Management of gifts and bequests with conditions, charges or real estate assignments.
The creation of an annex budget is decided by deliberation of the Chancery Board.
The annexed budget is subject to the same rules of preparation, voting and execution as the chancery budget.
The expenses of the public institution include personnel, operating and possibly equipment costs and, in general, all expenses required for the activity of the establishment.
Revenue from the establishment includes:
1° State subsidies and participation of other persons of public law;
2° Donations and bequests and their income;
3° The income of the property that is its property;
4° Funding and outputs of management and service delivery operations referred to in sections D. 762-2 and D. 762-3.
The forms and conditions prescribed for the state markets apply to the markets passed by chancery.
Revenues and advances may be instituted by the academy rector, chancellor, under the conditions fixed by the Decree No. 92-681 of 20 July 1992 amended on revenue-based and advance-based authorities of public bodies. The directors are appointed by the rector, after the approval of the Chancery Accounting Officer.
Public higher education institutions under the Minister for Higher Education are authorized to transfer and conclude arbitration agreements under the conditions set out in sections D. 123-9 to D. 123-11.
The contracts referred to in the third paragraph of Article L. 762-2 shall be entered into by the authority of the establishment to which the contracting authority is assigned by the status of the establishment. If not, these contracts are entered into by or authorized by the establishment's legislative body.
I. ― The draft contracts conferring real rights to a third party referred to in L. 762-2 are submitted by the public higher education institution concerned with the prior agreement:
1° The Minister of Trustees and the Minister responsible for the area where the amount of the proposed work is greater than or equal to three million euros excluding taxes;
2° From the prefect when the projected amount of work is less than three million euros excluding taxes.
II. ― Ministers or Prefects referred to in I shall, in particular, decide on clauses to ensure continuity of public service where the goods concerned are necessary for the performance of this service.
III. ― Failure to obtain the prior express agreement referred to in I shall be deemed to refuse this prior agreement from the expiry of a period, as the case may be:
1° Two months from the seizure of the authorities mentioned at 1° of I;
2° A month from the seizure of the authorities mentioned at 2° of the I.
The contracts referred to in section R. 762-15 apply sections R. 2122-17 to R. 2122-27 of the General Ownership Code. The duration of the contracts and the duration of the real rights conferred upon them is fixed by these contracts according to the object, nature and importance of the goods and the work on which they carry.
The departmental director of public finances, whose property is the subject of the occupation title provided for in the last paragraph of Article L. 762-2, is the administrative authority of the competent State to render the notice referred to in that same article.
It shall render this notice within one month of the date of receipt of its referral by the public establishment that issues the title referred to in the preceding paragraph. His notice is deemed to have been rendered upon the expiry of that period.
By derogation from the previous paragraph, if the particular complexity of the transaction warrants it, it may request that the public institution, prior to the expiration of the one-month period referred to in the preceding paragraph, stop by mutual agreement an additional period. The notice is deemed to have been rendered upon the expiry of this additional period.
By derogation from sections R. 4111-1 to R. 4111-6 of the general code of public property, where the contract referred to in Article L. 762-2 is not detachable from a lease contract, the opinion of the departmental director of public finances referred to in Article R. 762-18 also deals with the financial conditions of the entire operation and, in particular, on the rental value of the property. This notice is rendered under the conditions set out in section R. 762-18.
The provisions of Decree No. 2002-677 of 29 April 2002 relating to the obligation to decorate public buildings and specifying the conditions for contracting to meet this obligation apply to constructions under the Ministry of Higher Education and Research.
R. 715-2, R. 715-4, R. 715-12, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-3, R. 716-2, R. 715-4, R. 715-12, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-3, R. 716-1
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
714, D-1, D. 714, D. 714, D. 714, D. 711, D. 714, D. 714, D. 714, D. 714, D. 714, D. 714-33
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-46 and sections R. 719-113 to R. 719-180.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections D. 714-5, D. 714-41 to D. 714-46, the second paragraph of section D. 719-38, the second paragraph of section D. 719-39 and the first paragraph of section D. 719-40.
For the purposes of section R. 712-12, users are responsible, in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, for the disciplinary section of the University of New Caledonia.
For the application in the Wallis and Futuna Islands of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-5, the words: "the Prefect of the Region" are replaced by the words: "the representative of the State in the Wallis and Futuna Islands".
For the application of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-9 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, the words "and a representative of the region" are replaced by the words "and a representative of the territorial assembly".
For the application of the 1st of Article D. 714-2 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, the words "ONISEP regional delegations" are replaced by the words "ONISEP services".
For the purposes of Article D. 714-11 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands:
(a) The 3° is deleted;
(b) At 4°, the words "in the academy" are replaced by the words "in the community".
For the purposes of Article D. 714-21 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands:
(a) In the sixth paragraph, the words: "in particular within the framework of the regional plan defined in theArticle L. 1411-11 of the Public Health Code are not applicable;
(b) The eleventh preambular paragraph reads as follows:
"2° Ensure a medical examination for foreign students allowed to stay in the community."
For the application of 2° of Article D. 714-74 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, the words: "in the spring of the academy" are replaced by the words: "in the spring of the community".
For the application of the first paragraph of Article D. 719-38 in the Wallis and Futuna Islands, the words "in each academy" are replaced by the words "in Wallis-et-Futuna".
In R. 719-65, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
In R. 719-74, the words "the fifteen-day period" are replaced by the words "the month".
In R. 719-131, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
In R. 719-137, the words "the fifteen days" are replaced by the words "the month".
For the purposes of this book in Mayotte, the competences vested in the academy rector, the chancellor of universities or the rector are exercised by the minister responsible for higher education.
For the application of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-5 in Mayotte, the words "the prefect of the region" are replaced by the words "the representative of the State in Mayotte".
For the purposes of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-9 in Mayotte, the words "and a representative of the region" are replaced by the words "and a representative of the General Council".
For the application of the 1st of Article D. 714-2 in Mayotte, the words "ONISEP regional delegations" are replaced by the words "ONISEP services".
For the application of the 3rd of Article D. 714-11 in Mayotte, the words: "The Director of the Regional Centre for Academic and Academic Works" are replaced by the words: "the head of the department in charge of academic and academic works".
Sections D. 762-1 to D. 762-13 are not applicable to Mayotte.
R. 715-2, R. 715-8, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-10, R. 715-8, R. 715-12, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-10-3, R.
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
711-5, D. 714-6
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-46 and sections R. 719-113 to R. 719-180.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections D. 714-5, D. 714-41 to D. 714-46, the second paragraph of section D. 719-38, the second paragraph of section D. 719-39, and the first paragraph of section D. 719-40.
For the purposes of article R. 712-12, users are in French Polynesia under the disciplinary section of the University of French Polynesia.
For the application in French Polynesia of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-5, the words "the prefect of the region" are replaced by the words "the representative of the State in French Polynesia".
For the application of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-9 in French Polynesia, the words "and a representative of the region" are replaced by the words "and a representative of the Assembly of French Polynesia".
For the application of the 1st of Article D. 714-2 in French Polynesia, the words "ONISEP regional delegations" are replaced by the words "ONISEP services".
For the purposes of article D. 714-11 in French Polynesia:
(a) The 3° is deleted;
(b) At 4°, the words "in the academy" are replaced by the words "in the community".
For the purposes of article D. 714-21 in French Polynesia:
(a) In the sixth paragraph, the words: "in particular within the framework of the regional plan defined in theArticle L. 1411-11 of the Public Health Code are not applicable;
(b) The eleventh preambular paragraph reads as follows:
"2° Provide a medical examination for foreign students allowed to stay in the community. »
For the application of 2° of Article D. 714-74 in French Polynesia, the words "in the spring of the academy" are replaced by the words "in the jurisdiction of the community".
For the application of the first paragraph of Article D. 719-38 in French Polynesia, the words "in each academy" are replaced by the words "in French Polynesia".
For the purposes of article D. 719-41 in French Polynesia, the words "in article L. 719-3" are replaced by the words "in articles L. 719-3 and L. 773-2".
For the purposes of sections D. 719-41 to D. 719-47 in French Polynesia, an external personality may only be a member of the board of directors or scientific council constituted within the establishment established under section L. 773-2.
In R. 719-65, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
For the application of the second paragraph of Article R. 719-74 in French Polynesia, the words "the fifteen-day period" are replaced by the words "the month".
In R. 719-131, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
In R. 719-137, the words "the fifteen days" are replaced by the words "the month".
For the election to the councils of the universities referred to in Article D. 721-2 and to the council of each of the academic institutes of teacher training, the officials in training at the institute are electors and eligible in the college referred to in Article D. 719-4 II.
R. 715-2, R. 715-4, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-5, R. 715-4, R. 715-12, R. 715-13, R. 716-2, R. 716-3, R. 716-2, R. 715-4, R. 715-12, R. 715-13
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
711-2, D. 714-6, D. 714-3,
These provisions are applicable in their drafting Decree No. 2013-756 of 19 August 2013.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections R. 712-1 to R. 712-46 and sections R. 719-113 to R. 719-180.
The Minister for Higher Education shall exercise the powers vested in the academy rector, Chancellor of Universities, for the purposes of sections D. 714-5, D. 714-41 to D. 714-46, the second paragraph of section D. 719-38, the second paragraph of section D. 719-39 and the first paragraph of section D. 719-40.
For the purposes of section R. 712-12, users report in New Caledonia to the disciplinary section of the University of New Caledonia.
For the application in New Caledonia of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-5, the words: "the prefect of the region" are replaced by the words: "the representative of the State in New Caledonia".
For the application of the second paragraph of Article D. 713-9 in New Caledonia, the words "and a representative of the region" are replaced by the words "and a representative of the Congress of New Caledonia".
For the application of the 1st of Article D. 714-2 in New Caledonia, the words: "ONISEP regional delegations" are replaced by the words: "ONISEP services".
For the purposes of section D. 714-11 in New Caledonia:
(a) The 3° is deleted;
(b) At 4°, the words "in the academy" are replaced by the words "in New Caledonia".
For the purposes of section D. 714-21 in New Caledonia:
(a) In the sixth paragraph, the words: "in particular within the framework of the regional plan defined in theArticle L. 1411-11 of the Public Health Code are not applicable;
(b) The eleventh preambular paragraph reads as follows:
"2° Ensure a medical examination for foreign students allowed to stay in New Caledonia. "
For the application of 2° of Article D. 714-74, the words: "in particular in the academy's spring" are replaced by the words "in New Caledonia".
For the application of the first paragraph of Article D. 719-38 in New Caledonia, the words "in each academy" are replaced by the words "in New Caledonia".
For the purposes of section D. 719-41 in New Caledonia, the words "in section L. 719-3" are replaced by the words "in sections L. 719-3 and L. 774-2".
For the purposes of sections D. 719-41 to D. 719-47 in New Caledonia, an external personality may only be a member of the board of directors or scientific board established within the establishment established under section L. 774-2.
In R. 719-65, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
In R. 719-74, the words "the fifteen-day period" are replaced by the words "the month".
In R. 719-131, the words: "15 days" are replaced by the words: "one month".
In R. 719-137, the words "the fifteen days" are replaced by the words "the month".
For the election to the councils of the universities referred to in Article D. 721-2 and to the council of each of the academic institutes of teacher training, the officials in training at the institute are electors and eligible in the college referred to in Article D. 719-4 II.
Done on August 19, 2013.
Jean-Marc Ayrault
By the Prime Minister:
Minister of Higher Education
and research,
Geneviève Fioraso
Minister of National Education,
Vincent Peillon
Minister of Social Affairs
and Health,
Marisol Touraine
Minister of Defence,
Jean-Yves Le Drian
Minister of Culture
and communication,
Aurélie Filippetti
Minister of Overseas,
Victorin Lurel
